Home

ACID User Manual

1. Rendering the surround project SampleProject wav results in six WAV files Render as Oaa 2x CE Save in E SurroundProjects e 1 e Ed File Edit View Favorites Tools Help E de Bark 3 search LL Folders SK ls DZ x e Z ua Address IS SurroundPrajects 0 0 P a SA SampleProject Center Wav LA T E SampleProject Left Surround way Desktop bn E SampleProject Left Wav SurroundProjects E SampleProject LFE wav My Documents E SampleProject Right Surround waw E Select an item to view its description i SampleProject Right wavy My Com uter See also K My Documents File name SampleProject wav Save My Network Places My Network P Save as type Wave Microsoft wav y Cancel My Computer Template 44 100 Hz 16 Bit Mono PCM y l T E 6 objectis 165 ME My Computer Description Render 44 100 Hz 16 Bit Mono PCM wave About file _ trout T Save project as path reference in rendered media T Render loop region only IC Save project markers with media file IZ Save each channel as a separate file IT Stretch video to Fill output Frame do not letterbox F Fast video resizing CHP 12 WORKING WITH 5 1 SURROUND 298 Burning AC 3 files to DVD With the addition of the AC 3 DVD Burner included in the Sony 5 1 Surround Plug In Pack you can burn AC 3 files toa DVD 1 From the Tools menu choose Start AC 3 DVD Burner The AC 3 DVD Burner application starts 2 Follow the instructions for burnin
2. 4 Note When you remove an envelope from a track and then add it again you must recreate its envelope points TE T Removing volume pan bus or assignable effect envelopes 1 Select the track s from which you want to remove the envelope s 2 From the Insert menu choose Envelopes A submenu appears showing a check mark next to the envelopes being used 3 From the submenu choose the type of envelope you want to remove The envelope type is removed from the selected track s e _ 4 Tip Press V to remove a volume envelope or press P Jto remove a pan envelope A NN CHP 7 WORKING WITH TRACKS 13 r Removing effect automation envelopes This feature is available only in ACID Pro software 1 Click the arrow adjacent to the Track FX button H and choose FX Automation from the menu The FX Automation Chooser appears 2 Click the plug in whose automation envelopes you want to remove The parameters for the effect appear in the dialog 3 Clear the check boxes for the envelopes to be removed 4 Click OK LEE 4 Tip You can bypass effect automation without removing envelopes For more information see Bypassing effect automation on page 122 R WORKING WITH TRACKS CHP 7 L 131 Choosing stereo pan types When you pan a track using the multipurpose slider or a pan envelope you can choose among several pan types to determine how the track is panned _ _ _ _ ___
3. 0c cece eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eeeeeeees 112 Using Chopper toolbar and keyboard commandsS cece eee eee eeeeees 112 Inserting markers and regions in the Chopper 00 e cece cece eee eee eens 113 Creating selections inthe Chopper 0000 cece cece eee eee 113 Placing files in the Chopper 0 00000 cece eee eee eee e eee S 113 Creatina SCICCHONS 3 427025 His ee eS OPER Ge pbk ee eeu cid va aos alle elos de na wages 113 Creating selections of a specific musical length 00 cece eee eee ees 114 TABLE OF CONTENTS G Inserting INC MENS vices lt lt lt lt lt lt e e e A ad 114 Creating Increments arista A da 115 Creating increments of a specific musical length e 0 ccc eee eee ee eee eee 115 Creating increments of a custom musical length 2200 cc cece eee eee eee eee 115 Inserting selections in the track VIEW 0 0c cee eee eee eee eee 116 Using the Insert Selection button 0 cc eee eee eee eee eeeees 116 Using CODY and Pasteur eas eaten ewe ude det cg Aas des ete hoe hand tia bicis 116 Dragging SCleCuiOns 42 322 32 athe bea shee eee beeen wetted eA 116 Moving the insert position In the track view 202s 116 Saving Chopper selections as new fileS 00 0 ee ee 116 Using the Chopper with one shots 000 cece eee eee eee teens 117 VVOFKING WI DFaCKS sicario aaa ees 119 Using tracket a soir dee ad aa eed ae eae AA A 1
4. 1 Select a track and press V volume or P pan to add an envelope 4 4 4 Tip You can also use this technique on a bus track For more information see Automating mixer controls in track view on page 165 S N 2 Click the Envelope Tool button 41 to select the envelope tool 3 Right click the first point on the envelope and choose Hold from the shortcut menu 4 Add several more points by double clicking the envelope Note that each new point also has the hold fade curve 5 Set each point to a different level For more information see Adjusting individual envelope points on page 127 You can repeat the pattern by copying and pasting the envelope points repeatedly For more information see Cutting copying and pasting envelope points on page 128 Turning automated effects on and off This feature is available only in ACID Pro software You can use effect automation envelopes to change effect settings over time but you can create a simple dramatic effect by simply automating whether the effect is processed on or bypassed off 1 Add an automatable effect to a track and adjust the effect s parameters to your liking For more information see Using track effects on page 119 2 In the Audio Plug In window click the FX Automation button to display the FX Automation Chooser 3 Click the automatable plug in at the top of the FX Automation Chooser A list of the effect s automatable pa
5. CUSTOMIZING ACID SOFTWARE 228 _ OO Item Autoname new MIDI tracks Keep bypassed FX running to avoid pause on bypass enable Confirm groove deletion when still in use Enable Windows XP Theme support Save media usage relationships in active media library Enable Media Manager requires ACID restart Allow snapping for post groove markers Check acd file type association at startup Recently used project list Default All CUSTOMIZING ACID SOFTWARE Description Select this check box if you want to automatically name and save new MIDI files as you create them The file is named New MIDI track X and saved to the recorded files folder designated in the Record dialog When this check box is cleared you are prompted to specify a name and location for each new MIDI file as you add it to your project Select this check box if you want effects to remain open so you can bypass enable effects with no pause for A B testing When the check box is cleared effects are fully bypassed conserving processing power When this check box is selected a message box will appear asking if you want to delete a groove that is currently in use by the project When this check box is selected the ACID window will inherit the appearance of the current theme when using Windows XP When the check box is cleared user interface elements will maintain the classic Windows operating system appearance When this check box is
6. With bus tracks you can use a volume envelope to fade in and out of the entire project any Bus tracks are available only in ACID Pro and ACID Music Studio software 1 Press U to view bus tracks For more information see Automating mixer controls in track view on page 165 2 Select the Master bus track and press V to add a volume envelope 3 Add and adjust envelope points to fade into and out of the project For more information see Adjusting envelopes on page 126 ACID TIPS AND TRICKS APPENDIX B 2 Adding build ups If you are attempting to build projects that escape the perceived limitations of computer generated loop based music you should concentrate on reproducing the subtle and not so subtle dynamics associated with live instrumentation One of the simplest but most effective examples of this is the build up When musicians play live there is a tendency to increase dynamics as a song enters a chorus or refrain Think of how a drummer uses accents drum rolls and fills that steadily increase in volume to enter a song or indicate an approaching change from verse to chorus or chorus to bridge This effect is easily reproduced by adding a volume envelope to the track Add points at the various drum beats and adjust them so that the volume steadily increases For more information see Adding volume or pan envelopes on page 124 mons wah wah effects with automated Track EO This feature is available only in ACID
7. 2 In the Tag name box type the name you want to display for the tag 3 Select a thumbnail image to choose the icon that will be displayed for the tag in the Search pane and in the Search Results pane when the tag is added to a media file 4 Click the OK button to apply your changes and close the Tag Editor dialog USING THE MEDIA MANAGER CHP 4 L 85 Viewing or creating palettes The palette view provides another way of working with tags that can be useful for more focused searching You can use a palette to concentrate on a portion of the current tag tree In the palette view tags are displayed as a grid of buttons instead of the standard hierarchical tag tree 1 Click the Change Tags View button to toggle the display of the tag tree and palette view 2 Click the down arrow lt next to the button to choose a saved palette or create a new palette Creating a palette 1 Click the down arrow e next to the Change Tags View button and choose New Palette from the menu The New Palette dialog is displayed 2 In the Name box type the name you want to use to identify the palette 3 In the Rows box specify the number of rows of buttons you want to display in the palette 4 In the Columns box specify the number of columns of buttons you want to display in the palette 5 Click OK to create the palette The palette is displayed as a grid with empty buttons Assigning palette buttons 1 Perform either of the foll
8. Audio Compression Manager ACM APPENDIX C 247 Glossary An ACID project file that contains all information regarding the project including track layout envelope settings and effects parameters In addition all audio files used in the project are embedded into the project file This number is based on the Computer ID number of the computer on which the software is installed Each computer has a unique number similar to a license plate When you register your copy of the software Sony generates an activation code for you based on the Computer ID number Once you enter the activation code the ACID application will not time out Since the activation number is based on the Computer ID it is important that you have the software installed on the computer where you will be using it A method of compressing audio data Although the theory for compression using ADPCM is standard there are many different algorithms employed For example Microsoft s ADPCM algorithm is not compatible with the International Multimedia Association s IMA approved ADPCM See Windows Media Format A type of distortion that occurs when digitally recording high frequencies with a low sample rate For example in a motion picture when a car s wheels appear to slowly spin backward while the car is quickly moving forward you are seeing the effects of aliasing Similarly when you try to record a frequency greater than one half of the sampling rate the Ny
9. Ctrl Alt 1 Ctrl Alt 2 F6 Shift F6 Tab Shift Tab Explorer window commands Description Keys Add all selected files to the track list Enter INTRODUCING ACID SOFTWARE Description Restore project magnification to the default settings Restore track height to a level where all track list controls are displayed Reduce timeline magnification so the entire length of the project and as many tracks as possible are displayed Zoom time in out small increments when timeline has focus Zoom time in out large increments when timeline has focus Zoom in time until each video thumbnail represents one frame Zoom track height in out when timeline has focus Change track height for all tracks 24 pS Magnification and view commands Keys FQ Shift F9 Ctrl F9 Up or Down Arrow Ctrl Up or Down Arrow Alt Up Arrow Shift Up or Down Arrow Ctrl Shift Up or Down Arrow Minimize restore track height for all tracks Return all tracks to the default height Minimize restore the window docking area Minimize restore timeline vertically and horizontally window docking area and track list will be hidden Minimize restore the track list Show Hide bus tracks Description Add selected file or currently playing file to the track list Ctrl F11 or Alt Ctrl F11 or Ctrl Alt Shift F11 or Shift Alt U Keys Ctrl Enter CHP 1 Cursor placement loop region and time selection command
10. 3 In the File name box type the name you want to use to identify the library 4 Click the Save button To restore the backup at a later time open the backup file USING THE MEDIA MANAGER CHP 4 re Opening a Reference Library A reference library contains information about media from an outside source or vendor You can also use a reference library to search media files that you aren t part of your collection For example if you re unable to find the perfect loop for an ACID project in your own collection you could use the Sony Sound Series Loops amp Samples reference library to search the entire Sony Sound Series Loops amp Samples catalog and purchase a new loop library You can use the Media Reference Library drop down list in the Media Manager Options dialog to determine which library is opened when you click the Switch to Media Reference Library button w 1 Click the Switch to Media Reference Library button il The reference library specified in the Media Manager Options dialog is opened Media in a reference library is displayed in gray text to indicate that the files are not available on your computer 2 Find the media you re looking for with a standard or advanced search 3 Tag media from the reference library as needed For more information on tagging see Tagging media files on page 82 4 When you select a file in a reference library the Product Information pane displays information about the sel
11. Landsc landscape OF way Landsc landscape 08 waw Landsc EU Media Files EC Audio E Elia Loops and Samples a Sonic Excursions Fr H Elements i 23 Introspective b Click the Maximize Minimize button to control the size of the window in the window docking area Y Landscape 3 Loopettes Y L Sonic Grab Bac landscape 09 wav Landsc landscape 10 wav Landsc Py Landscape 11 wav Landsc Landscape 12 way Landsc My Landscape 13 way Landsc poi mE Sweet and Low Ba EL Stills 7 YL SurroundProjects m eee ENF K Explorer i Media Manager i Groove Pool d Click a tab to view a window Click the handle to drag a window to a different location or dock The default windows display in the window docking area when you start ACID software for the first time Additional windows can be displayed by clicking the window s tab or by choosing the desired window from the View menu qc A Tip You can quickly hide or show the window docking area by pressing F11 NER _ _ _ In ACID Pro the available windows can be docked anywhere at the bottom of the ACID window or floated over the ACID window or on a secondary monitor this setup requires a dual monitor video card You can also create floating docks anywhere by dragging more than one window to the same area CHP 1 INTRODUCING ACID SOFTWARE 22 pS Explorer window
12. the CD R disc remains unplayable on most systems until you close the disc The advantage of track at once writing is that you can record tracks onto the disc as you finish them versus waiting until you have finished your whole album Track at once writing burns the entire project as a single track Disc at once Single Session or Red Book Disc at once writing is the most common burning method in the music industry This writing mode is used when creating a master disc to be sent to a disc manufacturer for mass replication Disc at once works just as it sounds Multiple tracks of audio are written to the CD in one recording session Burning single tracks track at once AA Note The entire project length is written to a CD track If your project has events on muted tracks that extend beyond the end of the audible material the muted events burn as silence at the end of your CD track To burn just a portion of a project create a loop region and select the Burn loop region only check box vn 1 Insert a blank CD in a supported CD R CD RW drive 2 From the Tools menu choose Burn Track at Once Audio CD Notice that the Burn Track at Once Audio CD dialog indicates the amount of time that the current project will fill on the CD as well as the total amount of time remaining on the CD If the Time needed for audio value exceeds the Time available on disc value you are not allowed to write the track to the CD _ 4 Note If there
13. 4 Note When applying stereo pan types a monaural track is interpreted as a stereo track with the same data in both channels ee Click the multipurpose slider label and choose Pan The pan slider appears Click the multipurpose slider label again choose Pan from the menu and choose a pan type from the submenu e The Add Channels pan type is most useful for panning stereo source material This pan type makes the stereo image appear to move as a unit between the speakers As the fader is moved from the center to a side more and more of the signal from the opposite side is folded into the side you are panning towards until at the extreme both channels are fed at full intensity into a single channel This pan type uses a linear panning curve e The Balance pan type is most useful for adjusting the relative signal levels of the right and left channels in stereo source material In this pan type moving from the center to a side the opposite side starts at a base dB level either O dB 3 dB or 6 dB and decays to no signal level The signal in the side you are panning towards starts at the base dB level either O dB 3 dB or 6 dB and increases to 0 dB When the stereo source is panned fully to one side that side plays at O dB while the other side provides no signal at all This pan type uses a linear panning curve e The Constant Power pan type is most useful for panning mono source material As you move the fader from side t
14. RTSP Redirector File Region Rendering Resample Sample Sample Rate GLOSSARY 252z The file created when a media file is opened for the first time This file stores the information regarding the graphic display of the waveform so that opening a file is almost instantaneous This file is stored in the directory where the audio file resides and has a sfk extension If this file is not in the same directory as the audio file or is deleted it is recalculated the next time you open the file Working with certain types of media files with particular audio compression schemes can be inefficient and slow To compensate for this audio proxy files are created for these formats to dramatically increase speed and performance The file is saved as a proprietary sfap0 file with the same name as the original media file and the same characteristics as the original audio stream The conversion happens automatically and does not result in a loss of quality or synchronization You can safely delete audio proxy files at any time since these files are recreated as needed PCM is the most common representation of uncompressed audio signals This method of coding yields the highest fidelity possible when using digital storage PCM is the standard format for WAV and AIFF files The correction of rhythms to align with selected note lengths or beats in a MIDI sequence A proposed standard for controlling broadcast of streaming med
15. The Explorer window works similarly to the Windows Explorer You can use the Explorer window to locate preview and select media files to be added to your project You can also use the Explorer window to perform common file management tasks such as renaming files or creating folders Display the Explorer by choosing Explorer from the View menu or pressing Alt 1 Chopper This feature is available only in ACID Pro and ACID Music Studio software The Chopper isolates audio events so that you can dissect them and reinsert them into a project to produce elaborate slice n dice effects with minimal effort Display the Chopper by choosing Chopper from the View menu or pressing Alt 2 For more information see Using the Chopper on page 111 Mixer The Mixer window provides access to output levels as well as soft synth controls and the project audio properties Display the Mixer by choosing Mixer from the View menu or pressing Alt 3 For more information see Using the Mixer window on page 53 Video Preview This window displays prerendered video files that can be imported and synchronized with an ACID project The video file displays during project playback and can be rendered with the project to an appropriate format Display the Video Preview window by choosing Video Preview from the View menu or pressing 4 For more information see Using the Video window on page 205 Media Manager R This feature is available only in A
16. ToolTip that explains the effect of groove marker adjustments Se WORKING WITH TRACKS 146 CC Ra Using folder tracks This feature is available only in ACID Pro software You can use the folder track feature to help organize your track list and timeline by grouping tracks so they can be quickly and easily minimized or expanded When the folder track is minimized you can perform edit operations on clustered events in the group but you cannot create events with the Draw or Paint tools or perform edge trimming Expand the folder track to edit individual events IOD0 AAA Tip You can also use folder tracks to maintain alternate mixes of a project For example create two distinct drum parts and move the tracks to separate folder tracks Mute one of the drum folder tracks to choose which beat is used when you play or render your project SS Creating a folder track From the Insert menu choose Folder Track A folder track is added below the currently selected track You can create nested folder tracks by dragging a folder track to an existing folder track Adding existing tracks to a folder track To add an existing track to a folder track drag the track to the folder track When the folder track is expanded you can specify the location of the track by dragging it to the desired position When the folder track is minimized dragging the track to the folder track header places the track at the top of the list within
17. You can move a region without changing its size by holding Att while dragging either region tag EEE lt A WORKING IN THE TRACK VIEW CHP 5 L 103 Naming regions You can name the placed regions in your project You may want to name regions based on parts of the project or to define the amount of time that the regions encompass For example you may want to identify introductions solos or special time related features in your project as reference points 1 Right click the region s start tag and choose Rename from the shortcut menu A box appears next to the tag 2 Type a region name and press to save the name Navigating to regions While you are working on your project you may have scrolled to a portion of the project where the cursor is not visible You may click in the track view to move and view the cursor or you may use region tags to bring the cursor into view To move the cursor to the selected region tag right click the region tag and choose Go To from the shortcut menu r _ 4 Tip You may also navigate between regions in your project by pressing Ctrl left right arrow key or the number key not on the numeric keypad corresponding to the region number lO O Selecting regions You may use the region s start and end tags to make a time selection across all tracks in your project The information within the time selection can then be used for playback or editing To s
18. feature This feature is available only in ACID Pro software Creating a new media library You can create multiple media libraries as necessary to organize your media Each media library is maintained by the Media Manager software as a separate database that stores information about the media contained within it 1 From the Media Manager window click the Media Library actions button ai 1 and choose New Media Library from the menu The New Media Library dialog is displayed 2 In the Name box type the name you want to use to identify the library 3 The Folder box displays the path to the folder where the library will be created Click Browse to choose a different location 4 Click the Create button to create the new library Opening a media library The Media Manager window displays the contents of the current media library You can open a different library at any time eee 4 Important When you open a media library the Media Manager tool creates a transaction log file This file is created in the same folder as the medialib file and uses the same base name as the medialib file For example the transaction log file for default medialib would be default_log ldf Do not delete these log files Doing so will prevent you from opening the associated library When the Media Manager tool closes it automatically removes the log file If the application terminates inappropriately close all running ACID windows restart
19. 47 02 to a single file 21 4702 253225 e Choose Read by range and enter a starting time a ee and ending time or a starting time and length E A The time range is extracted to a new track in your ne roject Lo corw CED a008 1p id p J Drive LG CE A CED 80808 1 04 0 0 Click Play to preview your selection In order to Speed Max F Configure Eject preview your CD drive s audio output must be connected to your sound card or you can connect headphones to the front of the CD drive Selected length 00 00 00 5 From the Speed drop down list choose the speed at which you want to extract audio 6 Click OK The Save As dialog appears 7 Enter a file name and choose a location for the new file s DRA _ A Tip Extracted tracks can be automatically named for you From the Options menu choose Preferences and on the General tab select the Autoname extracted CD tracks check box For more information see Using the General tab on page 227 pnn oe 8 Click Save to start extracting audio CD data extraction begins and a progress meter is displayed If the file is longer than 30 seconds the Beatmapper Wizard appears 9 Use the Beatmapper Wizard or choose to open the file as a one shot The extracted file is added to a track For more information see Using the Beatmapper on page 131 You can also double click a CDA file in the Explorer window or drag it to the track view to extract a CD track w
20. 93 Searching for media files by keyword 88 Media Manager 88 using tags 89 Selecting events 43 46 Shortcut keys 23 Show Me How 15 Signal flow Audio 29 30 MIDI 31 32 Sliding Events 75 Video events 204 Slipping Events 75 Video events 204 Slip trimming Events 75 Video events 204 Snapping 103 In the Chopper window 111 to scale 184 Soft synth controls 153 165 Adding 154 Assigning tracks to 159 Deleting 159 modifying properties 154 Routing to DLS sets 155 Routing to VST instruments 157 Soft Synth Properties window 22 Soft synths deleting 159 routing MIDI tracks to 159 Soloing Mixer controls 161 Tracks 19 50 Tracks in MIDI files 177 Splitting events 68 Start offset 75 Step recording MIDI 192 Streaming media commands 99 INDEX Stretching properties 133 137 Subtags 84 Summary properties tab 33 Surround 207 217 Automating panning 214 216 Hardware setup 208 Keyframes 214 216 LFE channel 207 210 Panning 210 Rendering 217 Surround Panner window 22 212 Sync preferences tab 232 Synchronizing audio and video 203 System requirements 13 Tagging media files 82 Tags applying to media file 83 arranging in the tag tree 84 creating 82 creating palettes 85 deleting from library 84 editing names or images 84 removing from library 84 removing from media file 83 saving to media files 86 subtags 84 viewing palettes 85 Takes rec
21. ACID windows lt lt lt lt 0c eee eee 219 Docking and floating ACID windows lt lt eee eee eens 220 Changing the time ruler format lt e e e ccc eee eens 221 Usina the ruler ONGC as sits us tdo da ada d eek ee eed ain aie ge et Sid pe 221 Using the project grid east ennan nannan anann 222 Setting the Grid TYDE a A A O da 222 USING Me todlIDah 34d rai db ad ica eas 223 Hiding and displaying the toolbar 2000 cee ees 223 Reordering tOOIDarDUtONS 2 S 5 N S E sad fae eat ew beet co ba ees 223 Adaing buttons t the TODIDAS 00 ARA AAA 224 Removing buttons from the toolbar 0 00 eee eee eens 224 Using the time display 022 ccc cece eee eee eens 225 Changing Cursor DOSMIONi 32 62 62 652652 E A A oi 225 Changing the time display 0c ccc eee eee eee eee 225 Monitoring MIDI timecode uuu ib bie bd oe PE ie a Weed as 226 Setting default track properties 0 cc ees 226 Setting ACID Prelere MCS A see sae sere Pasa gow rie wal ne H TE bl ica eta 227 Wsinig the General ta errer nenie iad adie andes ee Bad ar Sts Bees 227 Using INE Audio tab cocidas 229 Using the MIDEtab TTT 230 Using the VST ENGS a TTT 230 Using the VST Instruments taDav iii ica ii AA A AA Skee eee 231 Using the ReWire Devices tab 0 0 cc ccc eee eee 231 Usmo the video Td 2 Ra ad S Attias d 231 SING the Seleb e 25 2 8 5 363 ies bee o Sere Saleen Cae Se bee ae 232 WSING the SYNC NAD iii dani
22. Adding 149 Adjusting levels sent from tracks 124 130 150 Assigning tracks to 18 149 Deleting 150 Panning 211 Routing assignable effects to 152 Routing to hardware 150 Using effects 161 Using the control 160 CD Extracting media 38 Writing media 60 Changing the track color 47 Channelization in MIDI files 176 Chopper 22 111 117 Grid 111 Inserting selections from 116 Keyboard shortcuts 112 Markers and regions 113 Saving selections as new files 116 Selecting audio 113 Snapping options 111 Tips and tricks 243 Using with one shots 117 Window 111 Clipping 55 Cloning loops 116 243 244 Command markers 99 Constant power panning model 131 214 Copying Events 65 Tracks 48 Crossfade 77 245 Cursor 43 46 225 INDEX TR ia Cutting Events 67 In ripple mode 71 Tracks 48 D Deleting Assignable effects 152 Audio from a video 204 Busses 150 Events 42 68 In ripple mode 72 Soft synth controls 159 Tracks 47 Video 203 Detuning tracks 237 Display preferences 234 DLS sets Changing patches 156 Routing tracks to 159 196 Using 155 Docking windows 220 Downloading media from the Web 39 Drawing events 40 Duplicating tracks 47 DVD burning 218 Editing preferences tab 232 Effects Assignable 161 Automating 124 130 Bus 161 Managing effects 164 Preset Manager 164 Project 161 Saving plug in packages 123 164 Saving presets 121 162 Soft synt
23. An automated mixer control has a small fader icon on its letter or number in the Mixer window Bus with Bus without automation automation Modifying track envelopes You can modify a track envelope for a bus assignable effect or soft synth in the same way you do with any other track For more information see Using track envelopes on page 124 CHP 8 USING THE MIXER 166 A gt ans with ReWire This feature is available only in ACID Pro software Using ReWire you can stream audio between applications in real time synchronize playback and use either application s transport controls to control playback in the synchronized applications The cursor position and loop region will be shared in the synchronized applications ACID software can be used as a Re Wire mixer host or a ReWire device client When ACID software is used as a Re Wire mixer a soft synth bus in the ACID mixer connects the ReWire device application with the ACID audio engine During playback song position data is sent from the ACID window to the ReWire device application and the device will send its audio data back to the ACID soft synth bus control When ACID software is used as a Re Wire device the ReWire mixer sends song position data to the ACID project and ACID software sends its audio to the ReWire mixer Because ACID software supports ReWire 1 0 MIDI data is not sent MIDI tracks are output as audio data through soft synths Using ACID softwar
24. Browse button to choose a different folder New MIDI This box displays the path to the folder that will be used when you create new MIDI tracks Click the Browse button to choose a different folder Extract from CD This box displays the path to the folder that will be used for tracks that you extract from audio CDs Click the Browse button to choose a different folder Render project This box displays the path to the folder that will be used when you render your project Click the Browse button to choose a different folder Displays the folder where temporary files are stored Click Browse to specify a new folder When you add a media file to a project from a removable device a copy of the media file is stored in a temporary files folder This keeps the media file available for use even if the source of the media is no longer accessible Be aware that this folder is cleared when you close the software However the temporary files are not cleared if the software closes inappropriately This value displays the amount of space available in the folder specified in the Temporary files folder box CUSTOMIZING ACID SOFTWARE CUSTOMIZING ACID SOFTWARE APPENDIX A 237 ACID Tips and Tricks APPENDIX i F E M n C x Q Ea E 4 A j The following sections contain some time saving tips and creative suggestions for building ACIDO projects UNE Adding long media files quickly You can paint an enti
25. Chopping multiple files into a new loop Want to combine short segments of several loops into a new loop You can use the Chopper to chop segments from several files into new loops and then combine the new loops into a single loop Place a file in the Chopper For more information see Placing files in the Chopper on page 113 Select audio in the Chopper and press M to chop the audio to a new loop Repeat steps one and two for as many loop segments as you want Draw events on the new tracks to create a new melodic or rhythmic pattern oF OO N Select the new tracks and from the Tools menu choose Render to New Track to render the tracks to a single track The Render to New Track dialog appears 6 Complete the information in the Render to New Track dialog and click Save For more information see Mixing multiple tracks to a single track on page 147 The new composite loop is saved and adds it to your project as a new track Creating drum roll build ups 1 Place a file in the Chopper For more information see Placing files in the Chopper on page 113 N Create a one measure selection For more information see Creating selections of a specific musical length on page 114 Click the Insert Selection button Erns once The selection is pasted to the track view Click the Halve Selection button 2 This decreases the selected portion of the waveform by half Click Insert Selection button liner
26. File When discussing audio equalization each frequency band has a width associated with it that determines the range of frequencies that are affected by the EQ An EQ band with a wide bandwidth affects a wider range of frequencies than one with a narrow bandwidth When discussing network connections refers to the rate of signals transmitted the amount of data that can be transmitted in a fixed amount of time stated in bits second a 56 Kbps network connection is capable of receiving 56 000 bits of data per second A file that has tempo information added to it as a result of going through the Beatmapper Wizard The tempo of a piece of music can be written as a number of beats in one minute If the tempo is 60 BPM a single beat occurs once every second The most elementary unit in digital systems Its value can only be 1 or 0 corresponding to a voltage in an electronic circuit Bits are used to represent values in the binary numbering system As an example the 8 bit binary number 10011010 represents the unsigned value of 154 in the decimal system In digital sampling a binary number is used to store individual sound levels called samples The number of bits used to represent a single sample For example 8 or 16 bit are common sample sizes While 8 bit samples take up less memory and hard disk space they are inherently noisier than 16 bit samples Memory used as an intermediate repository in which data is temporarily held wh
27. For example you could route all your drum tracks to a bus so you can adjust their levels together without changing their relative levels However you can also route busses to hardware outputs so you can use busses for sending tracks to external effects processors or for mixing on an external mixer E Note During the ACID installation the application automatically identified all hardware available for output on your computer and listed these components as options on the Audio tab in the Preferences dialog For more information see Using the Audio tab on page 229 pne T To route busses to hardware you must first verify whether you are using a Windows Classic Wave Driver a DirectSound driver or an ASIO driver as your audio device Then you can choose the appropriate hardware device in the Mixer window 1 From the Options menu choose Preferences and click the Audio tab 2 From the Audio device type drop down list choose Windows Classic Wave Driver or an ASIO driver 3 Click OK to close the Preferences dialog Ne ee Note If you have chosen Microsoft Sound Mapper in the Audio device type drop down list on the Audio tab you cannot assign the bus to a different device _ __ 6_Ga 4 In the Mixer window click the Playback Device Selector button S on the bus you want to route 5 Choose a hardware device from the menu that appears Deleting busses Just as you can add busses to a project at any time
28. If KL 3 the user rearranged the tag tree so that the Snare tag did not appear below the Audio and Drum One Shots tags searching for Audio or Drum One Shots would not find your tagged media L HEN D 2 Drum Loops S L Drum One Shots 2 5 Audio If you add all three tags to your media file a search for Audio Drum One Shots or Snare would find your tagged media even if the tag tree had been rearranged though this behavior is not always desirable mj High Tom P Mid Tom ee R a Floor Tom TEE wie You remove tags from media by dragging a tag from the tag list to a media file in the Search Results pane or by dragging a media file to a tag when the Remove Tag Mode button is selected Removing a tag from a media file 1 Select media files in the Search Results pane e To select a single file click the file e To select multiple consecutive files click the first file hold the key and then click the last item e To select multiple files that are not consecutive hold the key and click each file CHP 4 USING THE MEDIA MANAGER BB jp 2 Click the Remove Tag Mode button in the Search pane 3 Drag a tag from the tag tree to the selected file s The tag is removed from the file s Deleting a tag from a library Deleting the selected tag s affects the current library only 1 In the Search pane select the tag s to be
29. Initiative SDMI is a consortium of recording industry and technology companies organized to develop standards for the secure distribution of digital music The SDMI specification was created to answer consumer demand for convenient accessibility to quality digital music enable copyright protection for artists work and enable technology and music companies to build successful businesses A context sensitive menu that appears when you right click certain areas of the screen The functions available in the shortcut menu depend on the object being right clicked as well as the state of the program As with any menu you can choose an item from the shortcut menu to perform an operation Shortcut menus are used frequently for quick access to many commands The signal to noise ratio SNR is a measurement of the difference between a recorded signal and noise levels A high SNR is always the goal The maximum signal to noise ratio of digital audio is determined by the number of bits per sample In 16 bit audio the signal to noise ratio is 96 dB while in 8 bit audio the ratio is 48 dB However in practice this SNR is never achieved especially when using low end electronics SMPTE timecode is used to synchronize time between devices The timecode is formatted as hours minutes second frames where frames are fractions of a second based on the frame rate Frame rates for SMPTE timecode are 24 25 29 97 and 30 frames per second A soft synth is a
30. Key Frequency G 2 32 51 913 D 6 75 622 25 A 9 118 7458 6 A2 33 55 000 E 6 76 659 26 B 9 119 7902 1 M2 34 58270 F6 77 469846 C10 120 83720 B2 35 61735 F 6 78 739 99 C 10 121 8869 8 C3 36 65 406 G 6 79 783 99 D 10 122 9397 3 C 3 37 69295 G 6 80 830 61 D 10 123 9956 1 D3 38 73 416 A 6 81 880 00 E 10 124 10548 1 D 3 39 77781 MG 82 932 32 F10 125 11175 3 E3 40 82406 B6 83 987 77 F 10 126 11839 8 F3 4 87 307 C7 84 1046 5 G 10 127 12543 9 F 3 42 92499 C 7 85 1108 7 Creating events In addition to editing existing events you can also create new events 1 Click the Insert Event button Y The Insert MIDI Event dialog appears 2 Choose a track from the Track drop down list 3 Choose an event type from the Event type drop down list 4 Enter a start time in the Start time box 5 Enter values for the remaining event parameters 6 Click Insert The new event is inserted at the designated start time Step recording events In step recording you can record MIDI without worrying about tempo or rhythm Simply record the MIDI note by note entering event parameter values as you go If you have a MIDI keyboard or other device connected to your system you can input notes using the device For more information see Adding external devices as MIDI inputs on page 198 1 Click the Step Recording button O on the transport bar at the bottom of the window The MIDI Step Recording dialog appears 2 Choose a track from the Track drop
31. MPEG 1 and MPEG 2 file creation is supported through the use of the MainConcept MPEG plug in Available only in ACID Pro and ACID Music Studio software Note This format requires a separate purchase of the MainConcept MPEG plug in MPEG 1 Layer 3 mp3 A highly compressed format used for portable digital players and Internet sharing of media 20 free MP3 encodes are provided After you have used the free encodes you must register the plug in to continue rendering MP3s Ogg Vorbis 099 A patent free audio encoding and streaming technology QuickTime MOV QuickTime for Microsoft Windows RealMedia rm The RealNetworks standard for streaming media via the Web This option renders both audio and video into one file Sony Perfect Clarity pca A Sony proprietary lossless audio compression format Audio Sony Wave64 w64 A Sony proprietary wave format that does not have a restricted file size unlike Windows standard WAV format which is limited to 20B Video for Windows avi The standard video file format used on Windows based computers Available only in ACID Pro and ACID Music Studio software Wave Wav The standard audio file format used on Windows based computers Windows Media Audio wma The Microsoft audio format used to create files for streaming or downloading via the Web Windows Media Video WmVv The Microsoft audio and video format used to create files for streaming or downloading via the Web Available only in ACID Pro and ACI
32. OK to close the Plug In Chooser dialog The Audio Plug In window opens and displays the plug in chain 5 Click a specific plug in and adjust the effect s parameters manually or choose one of the presets from the Preset drop down list For more information about effect parameters click the Plug In Help button in the Audio Plug In window 6 Click the Close button EJ to close the Audio Plug In window USING THE MIXER CHP 8 L 1 EZ Arranging plug ins on plug in chains The effect of plug ins placed on a chain is cumulative For example when a signal passes through a plug in it carries those settings through the next plug in and carries both settings through the next plug in and so on Because of this cumulative effect you may need to rearrange the plug ins on the chain so that one plug in s processing does not adversely affect the next one in the chain There is no right or wrong way to order plug ins and the chain s plug in order is strictly based on your preferences and desired output However certain plug ins function better at specific points in the chain For example the dither plug in typically works best as the last plug in on a chain 1 Click the FX button on the mixer control The Audio Plug In window appears AAA E 2 Bus A sb of gt Chain Untitled x oly Flange wWah wah Y Distortion to Plug in chain Preset MJ 2 Effect Y Flange Phaser C wah wah Inf 0 0d8 T
33. Pro software You can use the automatable Track EQ effect to create a custom wah wah effect on a track The example below provides sample values to use in the Track EQ plug in but you can adjust the settings to suit your taste 1 Click the Track FX button on the track to which you want to add the effect The Audio Plug In window appears 2 Adjust the settings for band 1 as follows e Frequency 20 000 e Gain 14 9 e Rolloff 24 3 Adjust the settings for band two as follows e Gain 15 e Bandwidth 0 9 4 Click the FX Automation button 8 The FX Automation Chooser dialog appears 5 Select the Band2 Frequency check box and click OK An effect automation envelope appears on the track 6 Add points to the envelope so that the Band2 Frequency parameter oscillates between about 100 Hz and 3000 Hz For more information see Adjusting envelopes on page 126 APPENDIX B ACID TIPS AND TRICKS 242 C___ gt Making automated changes more stark ACID envelopes allow you to change settings for a variety of features over time While you may often use envelopes to transition smoothly from one setting to another you can also create interesting effects by making stark changes between settings Abruptly changing volume or pan By holding its setting until the next envelope point the hold fade curve allows you to use volume and pan envelopes to make abrupt changes For more information see Changing envelope fade curves on page 127
34. Properties window 2 On the General tab enter a value in the Pitch shift box or use the spinner control to adjust the pitch of all events on the track Setting root notes for MIDI tracks Choose a root note from the Root note drop down list to set the base note for tracks that you want to conform to the project key Otherwise choose Don t transpose CHP 10 WORKING WITH MIDI 1765 gt Working with tracks in a MIDI file Within the MIDI file you can add new tracks or delete existing tracks You can also mute solo change settings and rename tracks If you want you can save the changes you make in ACID software to the original MIDI file For more information see Saving reloading or replacing MIDI files on page 196 Viewing track and channel information The General tab of the Track Properties window displays information about the tracks and channels in a MIDI file e In an SMF standard MIDI file type O file all MIDI data is saved to a single track Each channel within the single track displays as a separate track in the Track Properties window e An SMF type 1 file can save MIDI tracks separately and these tracks are displayed in the Track Properties window If a track sends data to more than one channel the Channel column for that track displays a dash You can use the list editor to locate and view channel messages For more information see Filtering the list on page 187 Adding and deleting tracks Cl
35. SS SS S SG T You can add move and delete beat anchors and markers on the Stretch tab Moving anchors You can drag beat anchors and stretch markers to map the sample data in the waveform to a specific beat e Moving a beat marker P changes the audio that will be played at a beat anchor location e Moving a beat anchor 21 changes the beat on which the audio represented by a stretch marker will be played Beat anchors snap to the current grid spacing Hold while dragging to bypass snapping Adding anchors Double click the marker bar above or above the beat ruler to create a new anchor and marker Deleting anchors You can remove a marker by right clicking and choosing Delete from the shortcut menu or by double clicking it Reset beat anchors Right click the beat marker bar and choose Reset All from the shortcut menu to reset the markers to their last saved positions Stretching properties for Beatmapped tracks The following table describes the settings on the Stretch tab for Beatmapped tracks Item Description Root note Choose a note from the drop down list to set the base note for tracks that you want to conform to the project key If you do not want a track transposed to the project key choose Don t transpose Original tempo Displays the original tempo of the track as determined by the Beatmapper Wizard Enter a value in the box or use the spin control to adjust the tempo Downbeat offset Displays the locatio
36. Signature change e Tempo Change changes the tempo of all tracks until another tempo key time signature change marker is encountered Beats per measure Beat Value e Time Signature Change changes the time signature of all tracks until another tempo key time signature change marker is encountered 4 Specify the desired change information and click OK to close the dialog A marker appears in the marker bar at the cursor position that displays the change information Editing tempo key time signature change markers There are several ways to edit the tempo key time signature change marker e Position the cursor on or after the marker and adjust the Project Tempo Project Time Signature or Project Key controls The marker s text reflects the change e Right click the marker choose Edit from the shortcut menu and enter the appropriate change in the Tempo Key Time Signature Change dialog e Double click the marker and enter the appropriate change in the Tempo Key Time Signature Change dialog Adjusting tempo to match cursor to marker Position the cursor right click the marker tab and choose Adjust Tempo to Match Cursor to Marker from the shortcut menu The project tempo changes so that the cursor position matches the selected marker Deleting tempo key time signature change markers To delete a marker right click the marker and choose Delete from the shortcut menu CHP 5 WORKING IN THE TRACK VIEW L 108 III C
37. Stopping the service can conserve system resources when you aren t using any applications that use the Media Manager tool However the application will take longer to start when the check box is selected ann 6 Set your options for adding media to a library a Select the Add tags and custom properties from files check box if you want to add tags and custom columns saved in the media files to your library For more information about tagging media see Tagging media files on page 82 For information about adding custom columns to the Search Results pane see Adding custom columns on page 94 b Select the Use file and folder names to apply tags automatically check box if you want to automatically tag files based on the file path For example when this check box is selected a loop saved in the d Noops drums hi hats folder would have the tags Drums and Hi Hats applied when it is added to the library Some synonyms and variant spellings will be resolved automatically If you need to modify the pattern matching you can edit the AutoTagPatterns xml file which is created in your My Documents Sony Media Libraries folder the first time the application starts 7 Click the OK button to close the dialog CHP 4 USING THE MEDIA MANAGER II gt USING THE MEDIA MANAGER CHP 4 97 CHAPTER na Working In the R72 Track View This chapter introduces you to several ACIDO features that increase your productivity such a
38. THe PO Le aseente nh A eA AA el 51 WSING the tTranSDOM Dal sx toe once wast a nae sti eva Bie tobe eee ae 51 Using playback ODUOMS rada li aaa 52 TABLE OF CONTENTS e 3 Using the VMIXerWINCOW isis ora ra ew T AR Meh he R R ea de did 53 Viewing the Mixer WINdOW lt lt lt 00 cee eee eee eee nee 53 Using GS MIO toolbar ss a a rt ad data ls e nad dy dere 53 RenaMIiNg Mier conto Sicilia bibi tele he ei eh eee 54 SING ARG Imbers le T S raiaks ea piedad dd cria 54 Saving rendering and delivering projects e nn 55 SAVNI Proe tS stas is A o a 56 Rendeng POE CiS aaron riadas dada aia 57 PUDIISHING to the Internet eviti a aida aoe ee aoe Ee 59 VA A PS OO TTT 60 ECN EVeniS sarna TASANNO NEPATRNE 65 COPYING VEIS A N A A A ee ai i es oe oe 65 Fasting TEDT So osu tee Veni senate NK bas Hae Sant ee oder ala R R diva 65 USING the Raste cCommand ascos Oe bbe arar tad tamed ii 66 Using Paste Repeal acacia ech id e rl 66 USINE Te EEE erica tote cat pete sota Dias 67 CULTIMG CV CNS yx wns wince sia ec ar do a Bee HS 67 D leting Vente iiss cereal A Oe eo a eed ee SE K ee 68 Reversing vensa Paton Seton ias 68 TRIMMING CV CNS rss nd Bane iw ae a ee ea ee ia ba ee bed 68 Tells se EVENS iy ia o Be ea ate ae et So ae ee oan eed ace ge ee a oe 68 Splitting at the cursor position imita AAA ee ede ee 69 SOMULIIAG Al event ess ls ridad ds nt ah Bo A dd dd 69 Splitting Multiple events cinatradadine ros doe ia A weeded da
39. TRACK VIEW CHP 5 L 09 Working with time markers This feature is available only in ACID Pro and ACID Music Studio software Unlike standard markers time markers are tied to absolute time within your project They are added differently than standard markers and appear on the time ruler at the bottom of the track view Otherwise time markers can be manipulated just like other markers Placing time markers Time markers are placed at the cursor position You may place a time marker in one of the following ways e From the Insert menu choose Time Marker e Press H You may use this method to place a time marker while the project is playing back 00 00 08 00 00 10 Time marker o _ ___ lt Note Time markers are not numbered AA OO Adjusting tempo to match marker to cursor Using this function with time markers is particularly useful when scoring video For more information see Scoring video on page 206 Position the cursor right click the marker tab and choose Adjust tempo to match marker to cursor from the shortcut menu The project tempo changes so the time marker matches the cursor position You can also align the marker and cursor by holding Alt while dragging the marker For example hold while dragging a time marker to a location on the beat ruler The project tempo adjusts so the time at the marker occurs on a specific beat For example if you place a time marker at 10
40. To select multiple consecutive files click the first file hold the key and then click the last item e To select multiple files that are not consecutive hold the key and click each file 2 Start playback e If the Auto Preview button 151 is selected playback will begin automatically e If the Auto Preview button is not selected click the Start Preview button to begin playback If you have multiple files selected they will be played back sequentially Each file s icon will change to a play icon during playback 3 Click the Stop Preview button 411 to stop the preview or turn off the preview feature by deselecting the Auto Preview button If the file is offline you ll be prompted to locate the file or choose a replacement a 4 Tip To preview a media file in its associated media player right click the file and choose Open with Player from the shortcut menu Ee TFs CHP 4 USING THE MEDIA MANAGER Tp Adding media to your project After you ve added media to your library tagged it and searched for specific files or related media you ve probably found just the right piece of media for your current project You can add media to your project from the Search Results pane by performing any of the following actions Dragging a file from the Search Results pane to the project timeline The file is added wherever you drop it aaae Tip You can also drag files from the Search Results pane to the Windows desktop a f
41. WITH MIDI CHP 10 L e 197 1 Click the Device Selection button J on the MIDI track in the Track List A menu displays available MIDI devices and soft synth controls e If a soft synth for a particular DLS set does not appear in the menu choose Insert Soft Synth to add a soft synth control to the project and route it to a DLS set e If a MIDI device does not appear in the menu choose External MIDI Device Preferences to make MIDI devices available on the MIDI tab of the Preferences dialog This feature is available only in ACID Pro and ACID Music Studio software e _ _ _ _ _ o es Note Devices selected for generating MIDI timecode on the Sync tab of the Preferences dialog are unavailable as MIDI output devices For more information see Using the Sync tab on page 232 ee ee 2 Choose a device or soft synth control from the menu to send the current track to that control The Device Selection button indicates whether the track is routed to a soft synth or MIDI device 1 Resetting MIDI ports When a MIDI port is stuck playing a sustaining sound a quick method to turn off MIDI ports is provided much like the panic button on MIDI hardware devices From the Tools menu choose Reset All MIDI Ports to send a global Note Off command to all MIDI ports aaas Tip Press Ctrl Alt to reset all MIDI ports S pp Oe Rendering projects with MIDI tracks This feature is available on
42. You can choose OPT plug ins to be included with every new MIDI track you create For more information see Setting default track properties on page 226 ae 1 Double click the MIDI icon E3 on the track header to open the Track Properties window 2 Click the MIDI Editors button mptesitors The OPT MIDI Editor Plug In Chooser dialog appears 3 Choose a MIDI editor plug in in the Available editor plug ins pane and click the Add button to add it to the Connected editor plug ins pane 4 Click OK The new plug in appears as a tab in the Track Properties window ee _ _ OOOO Note When you load an OPT plug in in the Track Properties window the plug in is loaded for that track alone To use the plug in in a different MIDI track you must load the plug in from the Track Properties window for that track Ee CHP 10 WORKING WITH MIDI 196 __ Saving reloading or replacing MIDI files When you alter a MIDI file using any of the tabs in the Track Properties window the changes are saved in the project file alone the original MIDI file is not altered To save your changes to the MIDI file click the Save File button in the Track Properties window _ _ _ a _ lt lt lt Tip To save MIDI to a different file click the Save File As button Al TY IN e rpM eelxnmdtldf T You also have the option of reloading the original unmodified MIDI file or repl
43. You can create folders for organizing your plug ins within the Plug In Chooser dialog You will notice that the Plug In Chooser dialog functions similarly to Windows Explorer However the Plug In Chooser dialog only allows you to work with plug ins installed on your system Automating effect parameters This feature is available only in ACID Pro software If a plug in supports automation you can add envelopes to a soft synth s bus track to automatically adjust effect parameters over time For more information see Using track envelopes on page 124 Using the Preset Manager Once you have created custom presets for effects or effect chains you can use the Preset Manager to back up transfer or delete custom presets from any of the plug ins you use in ACID software The Preset Manager is a standalone application that you can use to manage ACID Sound Forge and Vegas presets You can install the Preset Manager from the ACID CD After you install the application choose Contents and Index from the Help menu in the Preset Manager for instructions on how to manage your presets USING THE MIXER CHP 8 la 165 Working with multiple mixer controls When you select multiple busses assienable effect controls or soft synth controls in the mixer you can simultaneously perform functions on the controls These functions include the following Change bus or hardware routing Mute solo bus or control Delete bus or control Change fad
44. a track s type by looking at the track number type icon in the track header If you have ACID Pro software you can also use folder tracks to group tracks together Loops Loops are small chunks of audio that are designed to create a continuous beat or pattern when played repeatedly They are usually one to four measures long Loops are the type of file that you will use most frequently One shots One shots are chunks of audio that are not designed to loop and they are streamed from the hard disk rather than stored in RAM if they are longer than three seconds Things such as cymbal crashes and sound bites could be considered one shots Unlike loops one shots do not change pitch or tempo with the rest of a project Beatmapped When you add a file that is longer than thirty seconds to a project the Beatmapper Wizard starts allowing you to add tempo information to the file As a result these tracks respond to tempo and key changes just like loops For more information see Using the Beatmapper on page 131 Seg Ss Tip You can change the length of the file that starts the Beatmapper in the Audio tab of the Preferences dialog For more information see Using the Audio tab on page 229 See Se MIDI A MIDI track is automatically created when you open a MID SME or RMI file You can use MIDI tracks to record data from and play back through synthesizers and other MIDI compliant equipment For more information see Working with MIDI
45. about effect parameters click the Plug In Help button 21 in the Audio Plug In window 5 Click the Save Chain Preset button H The Save Plug In Package dialog appears 6 Enter a name for the package 7 Click OK to save the plug in chain as an effect package R Removing or bypassing all effects on tracks This feature is available only in ACID Pro and ACID Music Studio software You can clear a track of all effects by right clicking the Track FX button 4 and choosing Delete All from the shortcut menu You can bypass all of a track s effects without removing them by right clicking the Track FX button 4 and choosing Bypass All from the shortcut menu To apply them again right click the Track FX button and choose Enable All from the shortcut menu CHP 7 WORKING WITH TRACKS 124 _ gt Ka Using track envelopes This feature is available only in ACID Pro and ACID Music Studio software Track envelopes allow you to control volume panning assignable effect send levels bus send levels and effect parameters for effects that support automation for a specific track You can distinguish the various envelopes by their color Envelope type Envelope color Volume Blue Pan Red Bus send available only in ACID Pro Purple Assignable effect send available only in ACID Pro Green Effect automation available only in ACID Pro Wood tones various a 4 Tip You can customize ACID en
46. and choose Select in Chopper from the shortcut menu A Note If you choose Select in Chopper on an event that contains only a portion of a file the entire contents of the file are placed in the Chopper The part of the waveform selected however matches the contents of the selected event This allows you to see the event in the context of the entire media file vn Creating selections To create a selection drag the mouse or hold while pressing the arrow keys A shaded region appears in the Chopper to indicate the current selection and its start point end point and length display at the bottom right corner of the window in measures beats ticks format You can preview the selection at any time by clicking the Play button on the Chopper s transport bar or pressing Space Increment 1 1 3 1 E A A Start End Length CHP 6 USING THE CHOPPER 114 Note In addition an increment arrow appears on the track view above the selected block For more information see Inserting increments on page 114 As you make a selection in the Chopper a colored block appears in the track view This block indicates where the selection will be placed on the track view when you insert it from the Chopper NACIO PROS MEAN Yo 30d j Hz Creating selections of a specific musical length You may want to create a selection with a length corresponding to a musical value You can easily do this in the sof
47. available but out of the way while you are working with a project You can dock windows either in a single stack spanning the width of the screen or divide the window docking area into sections e g right middle and left and create several stacks You can also create floating docks by dragging several windows to the same area on your screen Windows that are not currently visible in a stack display a tab that you can click to display it You can also expand restore or close a window using the buttons in the window s upper left corner Docking windows are available only in ACID Pro software The windows in ACID Music Studio and ACID XMC software are displayed in fixed positions in the lower portion of the window Close window Expand restore window L Drag handle 953999 insert S 2 B sm Chopper NY DANCE 2 1 I dl 1 1 A ___ _1____1 buy Ad bani 00 00 00 Note When the last window in the docking area is closed or removed the docking area minimizes automatically When the docking area is minimized dragging a dockable window over the bottom of the ACID window causes the docking area to open again Ee Docking windows 1 If the window is floating on the workspace grab the window by its title bar and drag it to the window docking area anywhere below the track list or track view As you drag the window the window s outline appears 2 Position the window
48. box to burn the entire project e Select the Render temporary image before burning check box if you want to render your CD project to a temporary file before recording Prerendering can prevent buffer underruns if you have a complex project that cannot be rendered and burned in real time A Note The rendered temporary file will remain until you modify your project or exit If an image file exists when you Open the Burn Disc at Once Audio CD dialog the check box is displayed as Use existing rendered temporary image eee 5 From the Drive drop down list choose the drive for burning CDs 6 From the Speed drop down list choose the speed at which you want to burn Choosing Max uses your drive s fastest possible speed decrease the setting if you have difficulty burning because of buffer underruns 7 Click Start _ o sYk Important Once the CD writing begins cancelling the write operation renders the CD unusable A T Disc at once DAO CD burning The DAO burning process involves arranging your media on the timeline adding pauses between tracks as necessary inserting track markers and burning your CD CHP 2 GETTING STARTED 62 A Adding pauses This feature is available only in ACID Pro and ACID Music Studio software Each CD track in your project should have a two second pause following it This default setting is based on the Red Book specification for audio CDs The
49. button EJ in the title bar of the Search pane if you want to save space in the Media Manager window by automatically hiding the search pane e The push pin is displayed as a E when the Search pane is anchored in the Media Manager window e The push pin is displayed as a E when the Search pane is set to hide automatically When the Search pane is set to hide automatically you can hover over the Search tab on the left edge of the Media Manager window to show the pane When you move your mouse away from the Search pane it hides automatically Docking and undocking the Search pane You can undock the Search pane from its location in the Media Manager window to float it over the ACID window or you can change the docking position of the pane within the Media Manager window To undock and move the Search pane drag its title bar to the desired location Resizing columns You can resize the columns in the Search Results pane by dragging the splitter between columns to the desired size To resize a column automatically double click a splitter Mame d Rati lp ACID MUSIC 5 sPROMO 04 pca Moving columns To move a column in the Search Results pane to a different location drag the column header to the desired location A red indicator shows where the column will be dropped ACID Type Beat Count Tempo Roc pop 162 100 000 D3 oop 8 85 000 E3 CHP 4 USING THE MEDIA MANAGER gy Showing or hiding columns 1 Right click the column he
50. by choosing Explorer from the View menu or by pressing Alt 1 There are three ways to add media files from the Explorer window e Double click the desired file e Drag the file from the Explorer to the track view or track list Dragging a file from the Explorer to the track name of an existing track allows you to replace the original file with the new file while all events remain in place e Right click and drag a file to the track view or track list to specify the type of track to be created When you drop the file a shortcut menu appears that allows you to choose whether to treat the file as a loop one shot Beatmapped track or as an autodetected type Adding media files from the Media Manager window This feature is available only in ACID Pro software If you have ACID Pro software you can use the powerful Media Manager feature to locate catalog and add media files to your ACID projects Within the Media Manager window you can build media libraries of your media that include file attributes ACID metadata and tags that you can assign to classify your media You can also search for purchase and access reference libraries from outside sources to build your media file base Display the Media Manager if needed by choosing Media Manager from the View menu or by pressing Alt 5 For more information on the Media Manager feature see Using the Media Manager on page 79 Adding media files from the Open dialog The
51. clear the following check boxes as A ETE an needed igi e Select the Save project as path reference in rendered o gn ora media check box if you want to save the project D path information with the rendered file to easily e return to your source proj ect if you use your Stretch video to fill output frame do not letterbox oe Y Fast video reaa rendered file in another project Soe mnn Note If you modify the project file after rendering the project data will no longer match the rendered file To edit a project using a path reference the project file and all media must be available on your computer anne e Select the Render loop region only check box if you want to save only the portion of the project that is contained within the loop region The loop region does not need to be active for this option to work o If the selected file type supports it you can select the Save project markers with media file check box to include markers and regions in the rendered media file T Render loop region only e Select the Save each track as a separate file check box to save each track in your project to a separate file All of the volume adjustments panning FX and events are saved with the track You can also use this feature to create tracks that you can use in multitrack recording software or Macromedia Flash This check box is only available in ACID Pro software e If your project contains video you can select the Stretch video t
52. data stored in the column is removed from the library 6 Click the OK button The column is added to the media library and the Search Results pane is scrolled to the right to display your new column Setting Media Manager options Use the Media Manager Options dialog to set options for working with the Media Manager tool 1 Click the Media Library Actions button ai and choose Options from the menu The Media Manager Options dialog is displayed 2 From the Reference library drop down list choose the library you want to load when you click the Switch to Media Reference Library button in the upper left corner of the Search Results pane For more information about using reference libraries see Opening a Reference Library on page 87 3 In the Search results limit box type the maximum number of media files you d like to have returned in the results of your searches _ 4 Note Increasing the Search Results Limit setting increases the amount of time required to search a library and can significantly decrease performance if set excessively high e o 4 Select the Double click in Search Results pane adds media to project check box if you want to add files to the current project by double clicking a file in the Search Results pane USING THE MEDIA MANAGER CHP 4 A 95 5 Select the Shut down database service on exit check box if you want to stop the database service when you close ACID software I A Note
53. directly to modify your templates R WORKING IN THE TRACK VIEW CHP 5 L 101 Defining streaming media commands In a streaming media file command markers can be used to display headlines show captions link to Web sites or any other function you define Several command types are included that you may add to a streaming media file Some command types are exclusive to either the Windows Media or the RealMedia file types Command URL TEXT WMClosedCaption WMTextBodyText WMTextHeadline Title Author Copyright HotSpotPlay HotSpotBrowse HotSpotSeek CHP 5 Player Type Windows Media and RealMedia Windows Media Windows Media Windows Media Windows Media RealMedia RealMedia RealMedia RealMedia RealMedia RealMedia Description Indicates when an instruction is sent to the user s Internet browser to change the content being displayed With this command you enter the URL that displays at a specific time during the rendered project s playback Displays text in the captioning area of the Windows Media Player located below the video display area You enter the text that displays during playback Note To view captions during playback in Windows Media Player 9 choose Captions and Subtitles from the Windows Media Player Play menu and then choose On if Available from the submenu Displays the entered text in the captioning window defined by an HTML layout file Displays the entered text in th
54. e Breathe new life into your collection of loops and MIDI files by creatively applying grooves to change the rhythmic feel Adjust the timing of a track to add or remove a human feel Quantize and map multiple tracks or loops to a common groove Extract the groove from an existing audio file Create new grooves from scratch Different grooves can be applied to an entire track or portions of a track so you can easily match loops with incompatible feels and tighten loosen grooves nondestructively rr _ a _ B ao oooooccccooooo sR Note Grooves cannot be applied to Beatmapped tracks SS lt gt TT T lt gt E KK 2 KK KK K lt AX A_AX2A2AAA Applying or removing grooves CHP 7 From the View menu choose Groove Pool to toggle the display of the Groove Pool window With the Groove Pool and Groove tool you can use groove maps to adjust the timing of entire tracks or portions of tracks __ _ __ _ gt gt ______ z _ _ lt a Tips If you want to get really creative try setting a track s stretching method to Pitch shift segments on the Stretch tab of the Track Properties window When a groove adjusts a beat so it plays early the pitch will be raised When a beat is played late its pitch will be lowered If a groove map does not seem to work correctly on a loop the beats in the file may not be properly detected Click the Redetect Beats button on the Stretch tab of the Track Pro
55. e In the Off velocity box specify the speed of the note s release 0 127 Low values produce a soft release high values produce a staccato release e In the Duration box specify the length of the note s sustain in measures beats ticks e Click Insert to record the note 7 Repeat step six as needed to record each note 8 Click Add to add the notes to the MIDI and continue step recording or click OK to close the MIDI Step Recording dialog and add the notes to the MIDI in the list editor CHP 10 WORKING WITH MIDI 194 T Quantizing events You can use the MIDI Quantize dialog to force events to align with musical beats based on the parameters you specify 1 To quantize only specific events select the events you want to quantize in the list editor a _ _ _ gt SKS lt Tip Hold or while clicking event rows to select multiple events A 2 Click the Quantize button The MIDI Quantize dialog appears 3 From the Quantize resolution drop down list choose the beat to which you want the selected events to be quantized 4 Choose the appropriate options for quantizing e Select the Start times check box to snap event start times to the beat selected in the Quantize resolution drop down list e Select the Note durations check box to snap note durations to the beat selected in the Quantize resolution drop down list e Select the Notes only check box to quantize note events alone When you
56. editable event parameters for different event types Event type After Touch Control Change Meta Note Packed NRPN Packed RPN CHP 10 Editable parameter Start Time Channel Pressure Start Time Channel Controller Change Number Controller Change Value Start Time Meta Event Type Meta Event Parameter Start Time Channel Note On Velocity Off Velocity Duration Start Time Channel NRP MSB NRP LSB Data MSB Data LSB Start Time Channel NRP MSB NRP LSB Data MSB Data LSB Description Time in measures beats ticks where you want the event to begin MIDI channel 1 16 where you want to send the event Amount of vibrato 0 127 you want to apply to each voice on the channel Time in measures beats ticks where you want the event to begin MIDI channel 1 16 where you want to send the event Displays the number of the current controller change type Choose a controller change type from the drop down list to the right of the Event type drop down Controller value Time in measures beats ticks where you want the event to begin Type of meta event that you want to add Choose a meta event type from the drop down list to the right of the Event type drop down Value that you want to send for the meta event The parameter type varies depending on the selected meta event type For example when you choose Text Event from the Meta Event Type drop down list a Meta text box displays for you to e
57. fj on the track header to open the Track Properties window 2 Click the List Editor tab The list editor appears ha Track Properties MIDI Bass 01 00 00 00 00 1 1 000 00 00 00 00 1 1 000 00 00 00 00 1 1 000 00 00 00 00 1 1 000 00 00 00 00 1 1 000 00 00 00 00 1 1 000 00 00 00 00 1 1 000 00 00 00 00 1 1 007 00 00 00 03 1 1 1952 00 00 00 03 1 1 1922 00 00 00 07 1 1 384 00 00 00 07 1 1 384 nannan 113854 gt gt uN a H M Track Properties Chopper ACIDFX Explorer J Transport bar Previewing MIDI Piano Roll Editor List Editor General NAT MIDI List Editor Track an Tracks l d k Ll Ll k Ll d l E Sequence Mame Tempo Time Signature Keu Signature Pitch Bend Controller 9 MSD 23 B1 Fitch Bend Controller 9 MSB 35 B2 Fitch Bend Cantraller 9 MC D Loop EJ Reload Replace EJ About 7 11 000 Y X IF Yl 2 del HH EIT TIE ET I E HD 0 120 000 BPM 4 4 C Major MSB 1 LSR 0 38 1315 3 51 B1 Dn Velocity 1 OFF 1317 J FO B2 Dn Velocity T OFF 2634 q Aan m K Loop boxes Toolbar Events You can preview individual events or the MIDI file as a whole within the list editor mnn Tip To control volume during playback in the list editor drag the Preview fader in the Mixer window e L WORKING WITH MIDI CHP 10 187 Previewing the MIDI file Use the transpo
58. folder To add a topic to your favorites click on the Favorites tab What s This help What sThis help allows you to view pop up window descriptions for ACID menus buttons and dialog boxes Choose What s This from the Help menu press F1 or click the What sThis help button on the toolbar and then click any ACID item To use What sThis help in a dialog box click the question mark button H in the upper right corner of the dialog box and then click an item in the dialog box Help on the Web Additional ACID information is available on the Sony Media Software Web site From the Help menu choose Sony on the Web and choose the desired location from the submenu The software starts your system s Web browser and attempts to connect to the appropriate page on the Sony Web site Show Me How tutorials CHP 1 You can learn more about many of the features in ACID Music Studio and ACID XMC by using the interactive Show Me How tutorials installed with the software By default Show Me How tutorials display upon startup of the application However you can access them at any time from the Help menu by choosing Show Me How _ 4 Tip To disable automatic display of the Show Me How tutorials clear the Show at Startup check box at the bottom of the tutorial window ppp T INTRODUCING ACID SOFTWARE n S Overview of ACID software ACID music creation software is designed to be powerful and flexible yet easy to use
59. in the track view you can use this technique on the time rulers in the Chopper and Track Properties windows The following table describes the available time formats Time format Description Samples Displays the time ruler in samples Time Displays the time ruler in hours minutes seconds milliseconds Seconds Displays the time ruler in seconds Time amp Frames Displays the time ruler in hours minutes seconds frames with a frame rate equal to that of your video Absolute Frames Displays the time ruler in total frames from the beginning of the project Feet amp Frames 16 mm Displays the time ruler in feet frames at a rate of 40 frames per foot Feet amp Frames 35 mm Displays the time ruler in feet frames at a rate of 16 frames per foot SMPTE Film Sync Displays the time ruler in hours minutes seconds frames with a frame rate of 24 frames per second 24 fps for synchronizing with film SMPTE EBU 25 fps Displays the time ruler in hours minutes seconds frames with a frame rate of 25 frames per second for European Broadcasting Union SMPTE Non Drop Displays the time ruler in hours minutes seconds frames with a frame rate of 29 97 frames per 29 97 fps second SMPTE Drop Displays the time ruler in hours minutes seconds frames with a frame rate of 29 97 frames per 29 97 fps second using dropped frame numbers SMPTE 30 30 fps Displays the time ruler in hours minutes seconds frames with a frame rate of 30 frames per second Au
60. insert the selection in the track view After the event is pasted the cursor advances to the end of the pasted event _ 4 Note When you paste a selection from the Chopper to the track view the increment setting is ignored ee Dragging selections You can drag a Chopper selection from the Chopper to the track view Release the mouse at the location where you want to insert the selection Moving the insert position in the track view Click the Move Track View Cursor Left button 9111 and the Move Track View Cursor Right button to move the current insert position in the track view left right by the increment length Saving Chopper selections as new files You can quickly create a new loop by making a selection in the Chopper and saving the selection as a new file The file is added to your project as a new track 1 Make a selection in the Chopper 2 Right click the selection and choose Chop to New Track from the shortcut menu Alternately press M The Chop to New Track dialog appears e oo a JJJJJJ uuu A Tip You can also drag a selection from the Chopper to the track list eee 3 In the File name box enter a name for the new file 4 From the Save as type box choose a file format for the new file USING THE CHOPPER CHP 6 L 117 5 From the Template drop down list choose a template for rendering the file or click Custom to create custom rendering settings For more
61. is no CD im the CD R CD RW drive only the Cancel button is available in this dialog LEE SS GETTING STARTED CHP 2 L B 1 3 Choose a setting from the Action drop down list e Choose Burn audio to begin recording audio to your CD when you click Start You must close the disc before it can be played in an audio CD player e Choose Test then burn audio to test whether your files can be written to the CD without encountering buffer underruns Recording begins after the test if it is successful e Choose Test only to test whether your files can be written to the CD without encountering buffer underruns No audio is recorded to the CD e Choose Close disc to close your disc without adding any audio when you click Start Closing a disc allows your files to be played on an audio CD player You cannot add tracks to a CD once it has been closed e Choose Erase RW disc to erase a rewritable CD when you click Start 4 Select your burning options e Select the Erase RW disc before burning check box to erase a rewritable CD before you begin burning e Select the Close disc when done burning check box to close the CD after burning Closing a disc allows your files to be played on an audio CD player You cannot add tracks to a CD once it has been closed e Select the Eject disc when done check box to eject the CD automatically when burning is complete e Select the Burn selection only check box to burn only the selected region Clear the check
62. it was in prior to the selected undone edit _ _ ______ K Tip Clicking the desktop outside the drop down list cancels the redo operation AA _ e ae Clearing the undo history You can clear the undo and redo histories without closing the project or exiting the application After the histories are cleared new ones are created as you continue building the project 1 From the Edit menu choose Clear Undo History A confirmation dialog appears alerting you that this action permanently deletes the current edit histories 2 Click Yes to clear the edit histories or No to retain the current edit histories Playing the project You have several methods for playing your projects Using the transport bar All buttons required to play your project are located on the transport bar The transport bar should look somewhat familiar to you as it contains buttons found on most home CD and cassette players For more information see Transport bar on page 20 CHP 2 GETTING STARTED BQ Ap Using playback options As you build a project you will likely have different playback needs For example you may want to hear the project in its entirety when checking the final mix but not when you are working on the ending Because of this you have three playback options e Playing the entire project e Playing from the cursor position e Playing in looped playback Playing the entire project To begin
63. its placement so it coincides exactly with the desired video frame __ _ 4 Tip Holding Att while pressing the right or left arrow keys allows you to step the cursor through your video by individual frames You may need to drag your time marker to the cursor to get it on the desired frame SSS EEE 7 Place the cursor at the point to which you want to synchronize your time marker For example you might want the frame that you marked in step six to coincide with a downbeat 8 Right click the time marker and select Adjust Tempo to Match Marker to Cursor from the shortcut menu The new tempo appears in the track list 9 Press T to insert a tempo change marker The adjusted tempo is detected and inserted into the tempo marker s box The tempo change marker preserves synchronization between the time marker and location on the beat ruler as you perform editing further down the timeline For more information see Adding tempo key time signature change markers on page 107 10 Repeat steps six through nine to synchronize the rest of your video WORKING WITH VIDEO CHP 11 207 sg Working with 5 1 Surround You can create 5 1 channel mixes to wrap a listener in your remixes or prepare audio for cinema DVD Video DVD Audio or DTS 5 1 Music projects This feature is available only in ACIDO Pro software e o V Note ACID software plays and mixes uncompressed 5 1 channel audio Authoring software such as
64. loop track s groove to the Groove Pool pms Duplicating a groove Existing grooves can serve as templates for creating your own grooves 1 Select the grooves you want to duplicate Hold or to select multiple grooves 2 Click the Duplicate Selected Grooves button 8 1 The duplicated grooves are added to the Groove Pool 3 To change the name of a duplicated groove right click a groove and choose Rename from the shortcut menu 4 You can then edit the duplicated grooves as needed Importing a groove You can use the Import Grooves button to add grooves from groove files or other media files to the Groove Pool of your project 1 Click the Import Grooves button E in the Groove Pool window The Import Groove dialog is displayed 2 Select the groove or media file you want to add Information about the file is displayed at the bottom of the dialog 3 Click the Open button to add the new groove to the Groove Pool a _ oaoaJ Tip You can extract a groove quickly by dragging a file from the Explorer window or Media Manager window to the Groove Pool S WORKING WITH TRACKS 144 r Exporting a groove Grooves are stored with your ACID project Exporting a groove allows you to save a groove in a file that you can use in other projects or share with other ACID users 1 Select a groove in the Groove Pool window 2 Click the Export Selected Grooves button The Export Groove to File d
65. name of an existing track eSxEE _ _ 00_ 5 lt _ Saving file properties When you make changes in the Track Properties window the changes you have made are saved in the project file but does not alter the original media file To save track property changes in the media file click the Save File button H You can also click the Save File As button to save the changes to a new file The media is saved with the modified track properties to a new file and renames the track in the track list to reflect the change All the information in the Track Properties window is saved to your file except for any pitch shifting you have applied and for MIDI tracks any volume or panning settings you have adjusted Any regions or markers you have created in the Chopper are also saved For more information see Inserting markers and regions in the Chopper on page 113 WORKING WITH TRACKS CHP 7 L 1 39 Tyne with grooves This feature is available only in ACID Pro software From the View menu choose Groove Pool to toggle the display of the Groove Pool window The top portion of the Groove Pool window displays the available groove maps in your project The bottom portion shows the selected groove map so you can edit it A groove refers to the rhythmic pattern of a piece of music Groove maps in ACID software expand on the software s ability to match the rhythm and timing of files nondestructively and in real time
66. navigational points for the cursor and events When you place markers they are automatically numbered up to 99 in the order that you place them Placing markers Markers are placed at the cursor position You may place a marker in one of the following ways e From the Insert menu choose Marker e Right click the marker bar choose Markers Regions from the shortcut menu and choose Insert Marker from the submenu e Press M You may use this method to place a marker while the project is playing Marker Marker bar A CHP 5 WORKING IN THE TRACK VIEW gy Moving markers 1 Place the mouse pointer on the marker to be moved The hand cursor dy appears 2 Drag the marker to the desired position Naming markers You can name markers in your project You may want to name markers based on parts of the project For example you may want to identify choruses refrains bridges or instrument solos as reference points along the timeline 1 Place the mouse pointer on the marker to be named The hand cursor dy appears 2 Right click the marker and choose Rename from the shortcut menu A box appears next to the marker 3 Type a marker name in the box and press to save the name aaae Tip You can use the same steps to rename a marker Alternately you can double click the marker and enter a new name nn H Navigating to markers While you are working on your project you may have scrolled to a portion of the project wh
67. number of times and at what interval the clipboard s contents are pasted on the track view This is a useful way of quickly building a project that uses a repetitive riff or structure For example you can build the backing tracks for a twelve bar blues copy them and use Paste Repeat to paste several copies of it in the project 1 Click the Time Selection Tool button 4 2 Drag the mouse in the track view to create a time selection spanning several events and copy it to the clipboard 3 Click the Go To End button gt on the transport bar or press to send the cursor to the end of the project 4 From the Edit menu choose Paste Repeat or press B The Paste Repeat dialog appears 5 Enter a number in the Number of times to paste box 6 Select the End to end radio button and click OK The events are pasted end to end the number of times specified in step five starting at the cursor position EDITING EVENTS CHP 3 L 7 Using Paste Insert This feature is available only in ACID Pro and ACID Music Studio software To insert the contents of the ACID clipboard at the current cursor position and force existing events to move in time to accommodate the pasted events choose Paste Insert from the Edit menu If the cursor is in the middle of an event the event splits at the cursor position where the new events are pasted For more information see Splitting events on page 68 Pasting events at the play cursor This feature
68. of the following methods e Choose Properties from the File menu e Press Alt Enter 2 Click the Audio tab 3 Enter a value in the Number of stereo busses box and click OK The busses are added to the Mixer window Routing tracks to busses If your project contains multiple busses you can assign tracks to specific bus outputs To assign a track to a bus click the Bus Assignment button El on the track header and choose the desired bus from the menu Assigning tracks to busses allows you to apply settings to a series of tracks and to route tracks to a particular hardware output a 4 Note The Bus Assignment button only appears if you have more than one bus in the project ann CHP 8 USING THE MIXER 1 r Adjusting the bus send level You can adjust the level of a track sent to a bus with the multipurpose slider in the track list aa Tip Bus sends are pre volume by default To change to post volume click the multipurpose slider label in the track list choose the appropriate bus from the menu and choose Post Volume from the submenu ppp Routing busses to system hardware You can route individual busses to specific system hardware for output This allows you to configure busses to route output projects or individual tracks to sound cards recording devices mixing boards etc By default all busses are assigned to the Master bus In this configuration you can use busses for creating subgroups of tracks
69. on page 149 1 Select the track to which you want to add the bus envelope You may select multiple tracks 2 Add the envelope to the selected track s in one of the following ways e From the Insert menu choose Envelopes and choose the bus for which you want to add an envelope from the submenu e Right click the track header in the track list choose Insert Remove Envelope from the shortcut menu and choose the appropriate bus from the submenu A purple line representing the envelope appears across the track s R Adding assignable effect envelopes This feature is available only in ACID Pro software An assignable effect envelope controls the level of a track sent to a particular assignable effect chain Before you can add an assignable effect envelope you must add an assignable effect chain to the project For more information see Adding assignable effect controls on page 151 1 Select the track to which you want to add the assignable effect envelope You may select multiple tracks 2 Add the envelope to the selected track s in one of following ways e From the Insert menu choose Envelopes and choose the assignable effect chain for which you want to add an envelope from the submenu e Right click the track header in the track list choose Insert Remove Envelope from the shortcut menu and choose the appropriate assignable effect chain from the submenu A green line representing the envelope appears across the track
70. on page 173 CHP 2 GETTING STARTED 4oy Folder tracks This feature is available only in ACID Pro software Folder tracks can contain any combination of loop one shot Beatmapped and MIDI tracks Use folder tracks to group related tracks or sections of a project so they can be easily expanded or minimized For example if you have many drum tracks in your project you can add a folder track to consolidate drum tracks and minimize their vertical space in the track list When the folder track is minimized you can also perform edit operations on clustered events in the group but you cannot create events with the Draw or Paint tools or perform edge trimming Expand the folder track to edit individual events For more information see Using folder tracks on page 146 Adding and editing events You have added media to the project and tracks have been created for the media files Now you can add events to the track view The following sections describe three basic techniques used when working with audio events painting deleting and moving Painting events After you add a media file to your project you must paint it on the timeline in order to hear it When you paint on the media file s track you create an event that displays the file s waveform You can paint events on the timeline using either the Draw tool or the Paint tool aaas Note Media files must be added to the project before either of these tools can be used to p
71. only a number that contains the amplitude value of a waveform measured over time e A sound that has been recorded in a digital format used by musicians who make short recordings of musical instruments to be used for composition and performance of music or sound effects These recordings are called samples In this manual we try to use sound file instead of sample whenever referring to a digital recording e The act of recording sound digitally i e to sample an instrument means to digitize and store it The sample rate also referred to as the sampling rate or sampling frequency is the number of samples per second used to store a sound High sample rates such as 44 100 Hz provide higher fidelity than lower sample rates such as 11 025 Hz However more storage space is required when using higher sample rates APPENDIX C Sample Size Sample Value Secure Digital Music Initiative SDMI Shortcut Menu Signal to Noise Ratio Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers SMPTE Soft Synth Streaming Tempo Threshold Time Format Track Track List Track View APPENDIX C 253 See Bit Depth The sample value also referred to as sample amplitude is the number stored by a single sample In 16 bit audio these values range from 32768 to 32767 In 8 bit audio they range from 128 to 127 The maximum allowed sample value is often referred to as 100 or O dB The Secure Digital Music
72. or MIDI device For more information see Routing MIDI tracks to MIDI devices or soft synth controls on page 196 INTRODUCING ACID SOFTWARE CHP 1 L 1 9 Track FX button This feature is available only in ACID Pro and ACID Music Studio software The Track FX button accesses the Audio Plug In window from which you can add edit and apply effects to the track For more information see Using track effects on page 119 Mute button Clicking the Mute button temporarily suspends playback of the corresponding track allowing you to focus on the project s remaining tracks A muted track appears grayed out in the track view For more information see Muting tracks on page 49 Solo button Clicking the Solo button T isolates the track during playback by muting the project s remaining tracks For more information see Soloing tracks on page 50 Surround panner This feature is available only in ACID Pro software In 5 1 surround projects the surround panner allows you to view and edit surround panning settings for a track Double click a surround panner to view the Surround Panner window and make fine panning adjustments Multipurpose slider This multipurpose slider allows you to control the following A track s volume relative to the project s other tracks A track s placement in the stereo spectrum panning The level of the track s signal being routed to each of the project s busses The level of the track s signal bei
73. other media with a beat count of 16 You can also drag a column heading from the Search Results pane to the Advanced section of the Search pane Se _ _ _ ___ _ _ __ Search Results Obra 2 Clear Bit Depth 24 ACID Type Beat Count Tempo 267 Loop 16 115 000 D 268 Loop gt 1658 115 000 A 269 Loop gt 6 115 000 D 270 Loop gt oe 115 002 Ez 271 Innn gt 15 115 000 Pa 2 Set parameters for each of your search criteria If the item displays an edit box type the parameter you want to search for If the item is displayed as a hyperlink click the value to display a control you can use to set the value USING THE MEDIA MANAGER CHP 4 L 91 3 Choose whether you want to display files that match any or all of your search criteria e Choose Match Any from the Match Any Match All drop down list if you want to display all media that matches any of your keyword tag or advanced search criteria e Choose Match All from the Match Any Match All drop down list if you want to display only media that matches all of your search criteria 4 Select the check boxes for the advanced search criteria you want to include in your search or clear a check box to exclude that item Previewing media You can use the transport controls in the Media Manager window to preview media files 1 Select files in the Search Results pane to choose the files you want to preview e To select a single file click the file e
74. playback from the beginning of the project click the transport bar s Play From Start button gt or press Space To stop playback click the transport bar s Stop button E or press Space Playing from the cursor position To begin playback from the current cursor position click the transport bar s Play button B or press Space To stop playback click the transport bar s Stop button or press Space Playing in looped playback You can also limit playback to a specific loop region on the track view This playback method uses the transport bar s Loop Playback button and allows you to fine tune mixes and effects while continually listening to the selected area For more information see Transport bar on page 20 1 Drag the handles of the loop bar to create the desired loop region Handle Loop bar 2 Click the Loop Playback button to turn on looped playback 3 Click the transport bar s Play button B or press Space Playback of the selected area begins To stop playback click the transport bar s Stop button or press Space Bypassing audio effects during playback This feature is available only in ACID Pro software If you want to hear your project without your applied audio effects track bus and assignable effects you can quickly bypass these effects during playback From the Options menu choose Bypass All Audio FX This option can also conserve processing power to avoid playback
75. plug ins you may set the processing sequence that the track s events go through when the project is played back Moreover the plug ins that you add to the chain may be added more than once For example a plug in chain could look something like this Track EQ Track Compressor Track EQ and Track Noise Gate After you create a plug in chain the track s events are processed by each plug in in its respective order on the chain The events effects processing is cumulative so in some cases you may want to rearrange the order of plug ins to achieve the desired sound For more information see Arranging plug in chain order on page 122 1 Click the Track FX button 84 The Audio Plug In window appears 2 Click the Edit Chain button to display the Plug In Chooser dialog WORKING WITH TRACKS CHP 7 L J 21 7 Chain area Plug In hooser Landscape 03 Track EQ Acoustic Mirror Amplitude Modulation PS chorus Hi Distortion Dither ExpressFPx Amplitude Modulation ExpressFx Chorus ExpressFx Delay ExpressFA Distortion ExpressFx Dynamics ExpressFx Equalization ExpressPx Flange Wah Wah ExpressFs Graphic EQ ExpressPA Noise Gate ExpressFx Reverb ExpressFx Stutter ExpressFx Time Stretch ExpressFs Vinyl Restoration Flange vwah wah Gapper Snipper e Double click the plug in e Drag the plug in to the chain area Hi Graphic Dynamics e Graphic EQ CBS Multi Band Dynamics Hy Multi Tap Delay His Moi
76. r Changing keyframe interpolation curves To control how the pan is interpolated between keyframes right click a keyframe and choose an interpolation curve type from the shortcut menu Keyframe interpolation curves control how the pan occurs over time Keyframe Interpolation curve Description Hold No interpolation takes place The keyframe s settings are maintained until the next keyframe Linear Panning is interpolated in a linear path Fast Panning is interpolated in a fast logarithmic path Slow Panning is interpolated in a slow logarithmic path Smooth Panning is interpolated along a smooth natural curve Adjusting the Smoothness slider The Smoothness slider controls the perceived motion of sound within the sound field among three or more keyframes When you drag the Smoothness slider to 0 the changes are interpolated between keyframes along a linear path As you increase the smoothness value the path between keyframes grows more curved and smooth 1 Double click a keyframe The Surround Panner window appears 2 Drag the Smoothness slider to adjust the smoothness of the spatial interpolation path leading up to this keyframe Locking keyframes to events If you want keyframes to move with an event when it is moved along the timeline choose Lock Envelopes to Events from the Options menu Hiding keyframes 1 Select the track for which you want to hide keyframes 2 From the View menu choose Show Envelopes and choose Su
77. s Adding effect automation envelopes This feature is available only in ACID Pro software If a plug in supports automation you can use envelopes to adjust effect parameters over time The appearance of the plug in in the Plug In Chooser window indicates whether the plug in supports automation Plug ins with this icon 4 support automation while plug ins with this icon do not In addition you can quickly locate plug ins that support automation in the Automatable subfolder For creative ways to use effect automation envelopes see Creating wah wah effects with automated Track EQ on page 241 and Turning automated effects on and off on page 242 1 Click the Track FX button 44 on a track to open the Audio Plug In window If no track effects exist clicking the Track FX button displays the Plug In Chooser Use the Plug In Chooser to create an effect chain including an automatable plug in For more information see Creating or adding to track plug in chains on page 120 2 Click the Configure FX Automation button to display the FX Automation Chooser 3 Click a plug in at the top of the FX Automation Chooser A list of the effect s automatable parameters appears CHP 7 WORKING WITH TRACKS 126 r 4 Select the check box for each parameter that you want to control with an envelope You can use the Select All and Select None buttons to quickly change your selections to all or none of the parameters FX Automatio
78. s outline in the docking area where you want it and release the mouse Floating windows You may float a window so that it does not appear in the docking area 1 Grab the window by its handle the border along the left side and drag the window to the workspace As you drag the window the window s outline appears 2 Position the window anywhere in the workspace and release the mouse You can move the floating window by dragging it to a new position or docking it again If desired you can create a floating dock with multiple windows by repeating steps 1 and 2 CUSTOMIZING ACID SOFTWARE APPENDIX A e 22 Preventing windows from docking Press while dragging a window to prevent it from docking in the workspace Resizing the window docking area You can resize the track list track view and docking area sections of the ACID workspace by dragging the dividers between them a __ _ _ _ 0 x_s Tip You can quickly hide or show the window docking area by pressing F11 Lo Changing the time ruler format You may specify a time format for the ACID time ruler to display The ruler located below the track view displays real time in several formats You may change the ruler format in one of the following ways e From the View menu choose Time Ruler and choose the desired format from the submenu e Right click the time ruler and choose the desired format from the shortcut menu In addition to right clicking the time ruler
79. see Setting ACID recording properties on page 170 CHP 9 RECORDING IN ACID SOFTWARE 120 7 6 Set the recording level For more information see Setting recording levels on page 171 7 To use the metronome feature during recording click the Metronome check box 8 Click Record to begin recording A new track is created in the project and begins to record the incoming audio signal into it 9 Click Stop to end recording The recorded audio is placed on its track as a Beatmapped file and can now be manipulated at the track or event level like any other file in the project Regions are added to mark each measure in the recording You can view the regions in the Track Properties window These regions can be useful when creating loops from your ACID or Sound Forge recordings Setting ACID recording properties Prior to recording in ACID software you must configure the application s recording properties in the Record dialog This ensures that you are recording through the appropriate device with the desired attributes and that you are storing the recorded file in the appropriate folder Record type Use these radio buttons to specify the type of recording you are about to make MIDI recording is available only in ACID Pro and ACID Music Studio software File name This box allows you to name the recorded file prior to actually recording it If you do not specify a name the default name Record Take is provided and a uniqu
80. select this check box the list editor does not quantize after touch control change meta NRPN RPN pitch bend poly pressure and program change events e Select the Apply to current selection only check box to quantize only the selected events Clear the check box to quantize all events within the list 5 Click Apply Deleting events Click an event row and click the Delete button X Undoing and redoing You can easily undo and redo actions in the list editor by using keyboard shortcuts Press Z to undo an action and press n Z to redo an action Saving MIDI When you create or edit MIDI in the list editor the MIDI information is saved in the project but the information is not saved to a MIDI file You can save the MIDI information to a MIDI file by clicking the Save File button For more information see Saving reloading or replacing MIDI files on page 196 WORKING WITH MIDI CHP 10 As Ka Loading third party OPT plug ins This feature is available only in ACID Pro software With the ACID OPT Open Plug In Technology from Yamaha support you can load third party OPT MIDI plug ins on your system in the Track Properties window Ifan external MIDI device has an OPT software component the OPT plug in is made available to you in the Track Properties window when you select the MIDI device in the MIDI tab of the Preferences dialog For more information see Using the MIDI tab on page 230 mnn Note
81. selected the Media Manager will save information about media usage so you can perform searches for media relationships You can search for projects that use a media file projects where a media file was previewed media that was rendered with a media file and so on When this check box is selected the Media Manager will start when you start ACID software Clear the check box to turn off the Media Manager and prevent it from starting with the application If you re not using the Media Manager you may want to turn it off to conserve processing power or memory When this check box is selected groove markers h in the Groove Editor will snap to the current grid spacing if snapping is enabled Hold while dragging to bypass snapping Clear the check box if you do not want groove markers to snap to the grid When this check box is selected ACID automatically checks whether acd acd bak and acd zip are associated with ACID and prompts you to restore the file association if necessary Select the check box and enter a number in the box if you want to list your most recently used projects at the bottom of the File menu Restores all general preferences to the default settings APPENDIX A 229 Using the Audio tab Setting audio preferences Item Audio device type Default Stereo and Front playback device Default Rear playback device Default Center and LFE playback device Playback buffering seconds Automatica
82. selection comma Shifts the selection left by the increment length period Shifts the selection right by the increment length semicolon Doubles the length of the increment arrow apostrophe Halves the length of the increment arrow R Inserts a region Inserts a marker 1 Marks the start point of a loop region o Marks the end point of a loop region Once the endpoint is established the loop region becomes highlighted USING THE CHOPPER CHP 6 nnn E Inserting markers and regions in the Chopper When working with events in the Chopper you can drop markers and create regions just like in the track view For more information see Using project markers and regions on page 97 These markers and regions are saved with the project when it is saved They can also be saved back to the original media file by clicking the Save File button H in the Track Properties window For more information see Saving file properties on page 138 Creating selections in the Chopper After you place a file in the Chopper you can use the toolbar transport bar and mouse or their keyboard equivalents to create and preview selections within the file When have made the selection you want you can insert the selection into the track view Placing files in the Chopper To place a file in the Chopper do any of the following e Select a track in the track list e Select an event e Right click an event
83. software based synthesizer Downloadable Sounds DLS and Virtual Studio Technology Instruments VSTi are two types of soft synths You add a soft synth control in the Mixer window for each software synthesizer you want to use in a project A method of data transfer in which a file is played while it is downloading Streaming technologies allow Internet users to receive data as a steady continuous stream after a brief buffering period Without streaming users must download files completely before playback Tempo is the rhythmic rate of a musical composition usually specified in beats per minute BPM A threshold determines the level at which the signal processor begins acting on the signal During normalization levels above this threshold are attenuated cut The format by which the time ruler and selection times are displayed These can include time seconds frames and all standard SMPTE frame rates A discrete timeline for audio data Audio events sit on tracks and determine when a sound starts and stops Multiple audio tracks are played together to give you a composite sound that you hear through your speakers The track list contains the master controls for each track From here you can adjust the mix select playback devices and reorder tracks The majority of the track view is made up of the space where you draw events on each track GLOSSARY U Law Undo Redo Virtual MIDI Router VMR VST Instrument VST
84. sync preferences Generate MIDI Timecode settings Output device Choose a MIDI device from the drop down list MIDI timecode is sent to this device The MTC slave should also be set to this device This device will not be available for MIDI playback Frame rate Choose a frame rate from the drop down list This frame rate is used to generate the MIDI timecode The MTC slave must be set to the same frame rate Generate MIDI Clock settings Output device Choose a MIDI device from the drop down list MIDI clock is sent to this device The MIDI clock slave should also be set to this device Trigger from MIDI Timecode settings Input device Choose a MIDI device from the drop down list MIDI timecode is received from this device The MTC master should also be set to this device Frame rate Choose a frame rate from the drop down list This value specifies the frame rate at which the MTC master sends timecode to ACID software Advanced Click to open the Advanced Sync Preferences dialog Default All Restores all sync preferences to the default settings CUSTOMIZING ACID SOFTWARE APPENDIX A 233 Setting advanced sync preferences MTC Input Free wheel for timecode loss Free wheel slack time Free wheel playback time Synchronization delay time Offset adjust MTC Output Full frame message generation MIDI Clock Output Send Start instead of Continue when beginning playback Song Position Pointer generation APPENDIX
85. synchronize the input and output for record input monitoring Choose a setting from the drop down list to indicate the buffer size you want to use Choose a setting from the drop down list to set the priority that is assigned to your audio buffers Increasing the buffers priority can help you attain smoother playback but it can also adversely affect other processes Description In the Port column select the MIDI devices that you want to be available for track playback pg 196 and generating MIDI clock pg 201 In the MIDI Thru From column right click an entry and choose a MIDI device from which the device selected in the Port column will accept incoming MIDI In the Port column select the MIDI devices from which you will accept incoming MIDI data for MIDI recording pg 174 step recording in the list editor pg 192 or controlling a soft synth pg 198 In the MIDI Thru column right click an entry and choose a MIDI device to which the device selected in the Port column will send MIDI output You can choose more than one device to accept MIDI output Select the check box if you want to automatically route MIDI input devices to the soft synth that was viewed last in the Soft Synth Properties window The Solo Listen to MIDI Input button in the Soft Synth Properties window is unavailable when this check box is selected Restores all MIDI preferences to the default settings Using the VST Effects tab VST effects are
86. synchronize with audio a rate of 30 fps frames per second is typically used To synchronize with video 29 97 fps drop is usually used The frequency spectrum of a signal refers to its range of frequencies In audio the frequency range is basically 20 Hz to 20 000 Hz The frequency spectrum sometimes refers to the distribution of these frequencies For example bass heavy sounds have a large frequency content in the low end 20 Hz 200 Hz of the spectrum A groove refers to the rhythmic pattern of a piece of music By deviating from a machine quantized beat individual beats may be played early or late to change the feel of the music Applying a groove can simulate the timing patterns of human musicians lending a human feel to MIDI generated music or quantizing several distinct pieces of music to a common timing The unit of measurement for frequency or cycles per second CPS An in place plug in processes audio data so that the output length always matches the input length A non in place plug in s output length need not match a given input length at any time for example Time Stretch Gapper Snipper Pitch Shift without preserving duration and some Vibrato settings can create an output that is longer or shorter than the input Plug ins that generate tails when there is no more input but otherwise operate in place such as reverb and delay are considered in place plug ins Sections of silence between selections that you can crea
87. synths are available only in ACID Pro software Item Description Select ReWire devices to be Select the ReWire client s that you want available for use as ACID soft synths available as soft synths Using the Video tab This tab is available only in ACID Pro software Item Description Device Choose a DV output device from the drop down list This is the interface to which your video device is connected Details Displays information about the device selected in the External monitor device drop down list If project format is invalid for DV If your source media does not conform to DV standards choose a setting from the output conform to the following drop down list The video is adjusted to display properly on your external monitor Sync offset frames If your audio is not synchronized with your external monitor you can configure an offset for your hardware Drag the slider to synchronize audio and video This setting affects synchronization for previewing on an external monitor Audio and video synchronization in your ACID project is unaffected Record engage delay frames Drag the slider to specify the number of frames it takes your camcorder or deck to switch from Record Pause to Record mode If you re missing frames from the beginning of your file after printing to tape increase the setting If you see duplicated frames at the beginning of your video decrease the setting Default All Restores all video preferences to th
88. test if it is successful e Test only do not burn CDs performs a test to determine whether your files can be written to the CD recorder without encountering buffer underruns No audio is recorded to the CD Select the Render temporary image before burning check box if you want to render your CD project to a temporary file before recording Prerendering can prevent buffer underruns if you have a complex project that cannot be rendered and burned in real time _ _ _ _ __ _ ooooooaom Y Note The rendered temporary file will remain until you modify your project or exit If an image file exists when you Open the Burn Disc at Once Audio CD dialog the check box is displayed as Use existing rendered temporary image mnn T Select the Automatically erase rewritable discs check box if you re burning to rewritable media and want to erase the disc before burning Select the Eject when done check box if you want the CD to eject automatically when burning has completed 10 Click OK to start burning GETTING STARTED 64 7 GETTING STARTED CHP 2 65 CHAPTER a Editing Events A A In this chapter you ll learn about basic event editing techniques such as cutting copying pasting trimming splitting and joining events You ll also learn how to use ripple editing to expand the possibilities of timeline editing Finally you ll take a look at advanced editing techniques such as slipping a
89. the File name box and click Save The take is saved to a new file and creates a new track for it 7 Delete the track containing the original takes RECORDING IN ACID SOFTWARE CHP 9 173 per Working with 10 MIDI ACIDO software allows you to record MIDI tracks and through support for the Open Plug in Technology OPT from Yamaha edit MIDI in your projects The software provides two native OPT plug ins the piano roll editor and the list editor You can also render projects with MIDI tracks play MIDI from an external device and synchronize to MIDI timecode MTC Adding MIDI tracks You can add MIDI files to your project or create new MIDI files from scratch MIDI tracks display with the MIDI icon 3 in the track list You can use MIDI tracks to record and play back data from synthesizers and other MIDI compliant equipment MIDI tracks can use MID SME and RMI files Adding MIDI files You can add existing MIDI files to your project just as you would add other files Simply add the file to the project and use the Draw 4 tool or Paint 4 tool to add events to the track that is created for you Creating new MIDI files This feature is available only in ACID Pro and ACID Music Studio software You can insert a new blank MIDI track into your project by choosing MIDI Track from the Insert menu Once you ve added the track you can use one of the provided OPT plug ins such as the piano roll editor or l
90. the Sony 5 1 Surround Plug In Pack is required to encode 5 1 channel audio for compressed delivery formats What is 5 1 surround 5 1 surround isa standard format consistin of three S eakers across the front and two S eakers in the rear 5 p p KK gt gt I he 1 isa sixth channel called low frequency effects LFE that enhances the bass levels In the mix 5 1 surround includes five main channels and a sixth channel for low frequency effects Center Right LFE A Left Right Surround Surround The LFE channel is commonly used in motion pictures to enhance low audio frequencies for effects such as explosions or crashes Audio in this channel is commonly limited to a range from about 25 Hz to 120 Hz Unlike the five primary channels the LFE channel adds no directional information Depending on the speaker setup and audio levels the sound assigned to the LFE channel may be routed among the five main speakers or to an additional subwoofer CHP 12 WORKING WITH 5 1 SURROUND 208 O_O Setting up surround hardware Before you create surround projects in the software you should set up your system to provide 5 1 surround playback To play a 5 1 surround project you must have an appropriate speaker setup such as e Six powered speakers e Six passive speakers with a six channel amplifier Your system must also have an appropriate sound card setup such as e 5 1 compatible sound card e Sound card with three stere
91. the Web Clears the selected items from the track view and places them on the ACID clipboard You can then paste them to a new location Creates a copy of the selected items from the track view on the ACID clipboard You can then paste them to a new location Inserts the contents of the ACID clipboard at the current cursor position The pasted items cover any existing events To make room for pasted events choose Paste Insert from the Edit menu Reverses the last action performed ACID supports unlimited undos allowing you to restore the project to any state since the last save Reverses an undo Turns the snapping feature on or off With snapping enabled you can decide whether to snap to the grid or to all elements markers regions etc Locks envelope points so they move with an event when it is moved along the timeline Activates the Metronome to keep time during recording and playback Z Activates the Draw tool to add and edit events Activates the Selection tool to select multiple events Activates the Paint tool to insert events across multiple tracks When used in conjunction with the Ctrl key the Paint tool can paint an entire one shot MIDI or Beatmapped media file to an event with one click Activates the Erase tool to erase events or parts of events When used in conjunction with the Ctrl key the Erase tool can erase an entire one shot MIDI track or Beatmapped track event with one click Ac
92. the track list to set the focus track Qn W N Press Y to add an event at the play cursor during playback the edit cursor remains fixed and the play cursor follows playback If snapping is enabled events are created at the next snap point You can use snapping to quantize your events Repeat step 5 as needed You can press the 4 and Y keys to change the focus track Click the Stop button E when you re finished creating events O 0 N QO Edit event positions as necessary PP 2234 Tip If you re using this feature to tap rhythms with one shot tracks try applying a groove to adjust the timing of your rhythm For more information see Working with grooves on page 139 Eee eR GETTING STARTED 42 Changing the length of events After an event is painted on the track view you may discover that it is too long or not long enough however it is easy to change the length of an event You may find it helpful to turn snapping options on by choosing Snapping from the Options menu and choosing Enable from the submenu To alter an event s length click the Draw Tool button 41 and drag either end of the event When you drag the event past the end of the file looped files repeat but one shot and Beatmapped tracks draw silence M z Original event Drag the end to increase its length of the event Erasing sections of events Occasionally you may need to delete only specific sections of an eve
93. the wet dry balance using the volume and assignable effect settings on the multipurpose slider The volume fader adjusts the dry signal and the assignable effect fader controls the effect signals Routing assignable effect controls to busses By default assignable effect controls are routed to the Master bus for output The bus then mixes the assignable effect plug ins with all tracks routed to the same bus and outputs the mixed signal to the appropriate output device For more information see Routing busses to system hardware on page 150 To route an assignable effect control to a different bus click the Playback Device Selector button E on the assignable effect control and choose the desired bus from the drop down list The drop down list displays all current busses in the project For more information see Adding busses to the project on page 149 Deleting assignable effect controls In the Mixer window right click the assignable effect control you want to delete and choose Delete from the shortcut menu or select the control and press Delete The assignable effect control is removed from the Mixer window USING THE MIXER CHP 8 L 1 53 Usi CHP 8 ng soft synth controls You can add soft synth bus controls in the mixer to control the routing of your MIDI tracks to software synthesizers Soft synth controls allow you to control volume and voice mappings for your MIDI tracks and add effects to a software synthesizer In t
94. the window 4 Tip If you want to audition your edits in real time apply the groove to an event and start looped playback before you start editing the groove nnn T The bottom half of the Groove Pool window displays your groove as a timeline with beat anchors and groove markers to represent how beats will be adjusted WORKING WITH TRACKS CHP 7 L 1145 CHP 7 You ll notice that this view is similar to the Stretch tab in the Track Properties window Both windows contain beat anchors Y however the markers on these windows perform opposite functions the beat markers on the Stretch tab are used to remove an existing groove from a file and the groove markers d on the Groove Editor window represent a new groove that can be applied with the Groove Pool window and Groove tool e In the Groove Editor window a beat anchor represents the beat that will be adjusted or the source of your groove adjustment e A groove marker 4 represents the point in time when a beat will be played This is the destination of your groove adjustment A groove marker can occur before or after the beat anchor A line connects a eroove marker to its associated beat anchor Use the Length spinner control to adjust the length of the groove Decreasing the setting will remove beat anchors and groove markers from the file increasing the setting will add anchors and markers Add or remove markers as needed e If you want to add a m
95. this check box if you want to reopen the project that was open the last time the software was closed When you clear this check box the software starts with a blank project Select this box if you want the ACID logo splash screen to display upon startup When you select this check box information is periodically displayed from Sony at startup Clear the check box to bypass the Net Notify dialog Select this check box if you want waveforms to be drawn in events Clearing the check box can improve performance on some systems Select this check box if you want Undos to be created when you change a plug in parameter When you select this check box a message box appears asking if you want to delete a media file that is currently in use by the project When you select this check box you can edit files in external editors while the files are contained in events in ACID software Select this check box if you want to close ACID audio and MIDI ports when you switch to another application Clear the check box if you want to leave ports open For example if you have a MIDI keyboard routed to an ACID soft synth clearing the check box allows you to continue to hear the soft synth while you work with a sequencer When you select this check box you can use a multimedia keyboard to control playback of a project The WAV format is limited by a maximum file size of 2GB When you select this check box you can render larger files as Sony Wave64
96. time Create or extend loop region time selection Double loop region selection length Halve loop region selection length Shift loop region selection left Shift loop region selection right Description Join selected events Create fades Reverse event Trim events to selection length This command has no effect if there is no selected data Trimming does not copy data onto the clipboard Available only when the Time Selection tool is active Slip Trim moves the media with the edge as it is trimmed Slip move media within event without moving the event Slide move event while leaving the underlying media in place Pitch down one semitone Pitch up one semitone Pitch down 4 semitones Pitch up 4 semitones Pitch down one octave Pitch up one octave Reset pitch SS I Keys Number keys not Keypad Left Right Arrow Ctrl Left Right Arrow Ctrl Alt Left Right Arrow Alt Left or Right Arrow Shift Left or Right Arrow apostrophe semicolon Comma period Keys F U Ctrl T Alt drag edge of event Alt drag inside the event Ctrl Alt drag event Numeric keypad Numeric keypad Shift Numeric Keypad Shift Shift Numeric keypad Shift Ctrl Numeric keypad Ctrl Numeric keypad Ctrl Shift Numeric keypad or 4 Ctrl Shift INTRODUCING ACID SOFTWARE Description Delete selection Move selected event s right one pixel Move selected event s left one pixel Temporari
97. to create a new groove event to fill the space between the events Hold while clicking the space between two groove events to create a new groove event to fill the space between the events Right click and drag with the Groove tool to erase a groove event Hold and right click a groove event with the Groove tool to erase the entire event Hold and click a groove event with the Groove Erase tool to erase the entire event Zoom in to see groove markers in the groove events The markers represent the amount and direction of offset applied to beats A es WORKING WITH TRACKS 142 gt z Erasing groove events 1 Select the Groove Erase tool S 2 Click and drag the Groove Erase tool to erase a groove or hold while clicking a groove event to erase the entire event SS sss a Tips Right click and drag with the Groove tool to erase a groove event Hold and right click a groove event with the Groove tool to erase the entire event Hold and click a groove event with the Groove Erase tool to erase the entire event Zoom in to see groove markers in the groove events The markers provide a visual cue to the mapped groove You can also right click a track header and choose Remove Groove from Track from the shortcut menu to remove all groove events from a track S Removing unused grooves from your project Click the Remove All Unused Grooves from Project button 4 to remove any groov
98. track and restore any other soloed tracks If the selected track is already soloed press and click the Solo button to restore all tracks AA A lt gt a Working with groups of tracks Select a group of tracks by holding the key while you click the track header of the desired tracks Now you can adjust the volume panning track color and other track attributes simultaneously Using undo and redo You have unlimited undo and redo capabilities in ACID software Each edit you perform in the project is added to an undo history which allows you to quickly restore the project to any of its previous states In addition undoing an edit automatically places it in the project s redo history where it can be quickly re performed However any new edit performed on the project overwrites the redo history _ _ 4 Note The undo and redo histories are cleared when you close the project or exit the application O Using undo To undo an edit click the Undo button on the toolbar or press Z Edits are undone in the reverse order they were performed a Tip You can also undo the most recent edit by choosing Undo from the Edit menu EE Undoing a series of edits Clicking the down arrow next to the Undo button displays the project s undo history The history displays as a drop down list with the most recent edit located at the top Undoing an edit in the list requires all subsequent edits to be undone as
99. twice Continue to double the number of inserts after each halving of the selection until you achieve the desired drum roll effect Click the Halve Selection button N O 0 bb OQ Creating drum fills 1 Place a file in the Chopper 2 Create an eighth note or other length selection of a drum track in the Chopper 3 Click the Insert Selection button Emser 4 Use the Shift Selection Left J and Shift Selection Right 77 buttons to move the selection randomly through the drum track clicking the Insert Selection button Erst to insert drum hits ACID TIPS AND TRICKS APPENDIX B 245 Creating one track remixes 1 2 3 4 Place a Beatmapped track in the Chopper For more information see Using the Beatmapper on page 131 Create a selection in the Chopper Click the Insert Selection button Ens twice Use the Shift Selection Right button insert as desired to insert events to move through the track clicking the Insert Selection button Creating DJ style crossfades You can use the Chopper and the crossfade keyboard shortcut to crossfade between two tracks much like a DJ crossfades between two records 1 O ON O Q bb OU N Insert two Beatmapped tracks into your project For more information see Using the Beatmapper on page 131 Place the file from track one in the Chopper Turn off the Link Arrow to Selection button 24 Create a three beat selection in the Choppe
100. used to display the tag right click it and choose Edit from the shortcut menu to display the Tag Editor dialog 5 If you want to change the tag s location drag it to a new location in the tag tree USING THE MEDIA MANAGER CHP 4 L 823 Applying a tag to a media file You tag media by dragging a tag from the tag tree to a media file in the Search Results pane or by dragging a media file to a tag when the Add Tag Mode button 4 is selected 1 Select media files to tag in the Search Results pane e To select a single file click the file e To select multiple consecutive files click the first file hold the key and then click the last item e To select multiple files that are not consecutive hold the key and click each file 2 Click the Add Tag Mode button 41 in the Search pane 3 Drag a tag from the tag tree to the selected file s E 3 4 Bass 04 waw E 3 4 Bass 05 wav ey Tip You can also right click a selection in the Search Results pane and choose Add Tag from the shortcut menu to add a tag to all selected media The Tag Chooser dialog will be displayed Select the tag you want to add and then click the OK button a T When you add a subtag to a media file the tag s hierarchical position in the tag pme tree is applied implicitly Matchal 9 In this example adding the Snare tag to a media file would mean that a search for Audio Drum One Shots or Snare would find your tagged media
101. well 1 Click the arrow to the right of the Undo button The undo history appears 2 Locate the edit to be undone Notice that all subsequent edits are automatically selected and the total number of edits to be undone is indicated at the bottom of the drop down list 3 Click the edit to be undone The project is restored to the state it was in prior to the selected edit GETTING STARTED CHP 2 L 5 1 Undoing all edits Choosing Undo All from the Edit menu undoes all project edits and automatically adds them to the redo history Using redo To redo an edit click the Redo button on the toolbar or press Z Edits are re performed in the reverse order they were undone 4 Tip You can also redo the most recent undone edit by choosing Redo from the Edit menu A a IIA Redoing a series of edits Clicking the down arrow next to the Redo button displays the project s redo history The history displays as a drop down list with the most recently undone edit located at the top Redoing an edit in the list requires all subsequently undone edits to be re performed as well 1 Click the arrow to the right of the Redo button The redo history appears 2 Locate the edit to be redone Notice that all subsequently undone edits are automatically selected and the total number of edits to be redone is indicated at the bottom of the drop down list 3 Click the edit to be redone The project is restored to the state
102. window 2 Click the Piano Roll Editor tab The piano roll editor appears FP Track Properties MIDI Bass 01 TA St Reload EJReplace d Piano Roll Editor List Editor General MIDI Piano Roll Editor About Pitch and length Velocity Gle 01091 s Track Propelties_ Chopper ACIDA Explorer j Middle C Transport bar Previewing MIDI You can preview the entire MIDI file a loop selection or single notes using the piano roll editor e _ _ a _ a Tip To control volume during playback in the piano roll editor drag the Preview fader in the Mixer window SSS T Previewing the MIDI file Use the transport bar buttons at the bottom of the piano roll editor to play your MIDI o _ ___ gt zz lt lt Tip You can use the Solo button 1 to solo a particular MIDI track during preview playback egg AAA T CHP 10 WORKING WITH MIDI 190 r Previewing a selection in looped playback You can preview a selection in looped playback just as you would in the main ACID window 1 Drag the handles of the loop bar in the piano roll editor to create the desired loop region 2 Click the Loop Playback button 91 to turn on looped playback 3 Click the transport bar s Play button or press Space The piano roll editor loops the playback of the selected area To stop playback click the transport bar s St
103. with a video file can cause it to become out of sync with the video To resynchronize the audio and video right click the audio file and choose Synchronize with Video from the shortcut menu 4 Note This does not work if you have changed the audio track to a loop TE ae CHP 11 WORKING WITH VIDEO 204 r Removing the videos audio Right click the audio track in the track list and choose Delete Track from the shortcut menu The audio track is removed but the video remains y Changing frame numbering ae This feature is available only in ACID Pro software Each frame is numbered in the video track You can change the numbering format or turn off frame numbering altogether 1 From the Options menu choose Preferences The Preferences dialog appears 2 Click the Video tab 3 Choose a setting from the Show source frame numbers on video thumbnails as drop down list Editing video events You have several video editing options to help you score your video Moving video events Drag the event to a new location along the video track Trimming video events Drag either end of the video event The video event stays in place but the beginning or end of the video moves You cannot trim the beginning or end of the event past the event s original end You cannot trim an event earlier than its starting point unless the event has been trimmed previously Slipping and sliding video events To help you picture what happ
104. within the Chopper and use the mouse wheel e Quickly magnify a selection by right clicking and choosing Zoom to Loop Region from the shortcut menu Previewing in the Chopper The Chopper contains a dedicated transport bar that can be used to preview selections prior to inserting them into the project Using Chopper toolbar and keyboard commands In addition to the transport bar the Chopper contains a toolbar that is designed to make creating selections quick and easy The following table briefly describes the toolbar buttons and the associated keyboard commands Button Keyboard Function insert or Inserts the Chopper selection in the track view at the current cursor position comma Shifts the track view s cursor position to the left by the length of the increment arrow C period Shifts the track view s cursor position to the right by the length of the increment arrow E Links the length of the increment arrow with the length of the selection When toggled on the length of the increment remains equal to the length of the selection When toggled off you can configure the increment independently of the Chopper selection semicolon Halves the length of the Chopper selection gt apostrophe Doubles the length of the Chopper selection or comma Shifts the Chopper selection to the left by the length of the selection or period Shifts the Chopper selection to the right by the length of the
105. you can also delete superfluous busses When you delete a bus from a project tracks assigned to it are reassigned to the Master bus Deleting a bus Right click the bus in the mixer and choose Delete from the shortcut menu USING THE MIXER CHP 8 L 15 1 Deleting multiple busses 1 Display the Project Properties dialog using one of the following methods e Choose Properties from the File menu e Press Enter 2 Click the Audio tab 3 Enter a value in the Number of stereo busses box and click OK The busses are removed from the Mixer window Ra Using assignable effects This feature is available only in ACID Pro software You can use assignable effect controls to send various levels of multiple tracks to a single effect chain Like busses these controls reside in the Mixer window and support plug in chains In addition assignable effect outputs can be routed to project busses You can add up to 32 assignable effect controls to a project and each control supports as many as 32 DirectX or VST plug ins on its chain For creative ways to use assignable effects see Adding depth with assignable effects on page 239 Adding assignable effect controls CHP 8 1 From the Insert menu choose Assignable FX or click the Insert Assignable FX button etnsert Fx in the Mixer window The Plug In Chooser dialog displays a list of the available plug ins and the assignable effect control is added to the Mixer wind
106. your project 1 From the View menu choose Groove Pool to display the Groove Pool window if it isn t already visible 2 Choose a setting from the Default groove for new tracks drop down list When you add a new loop one shot or MIDI track to your project the selected groove will be applied to the entire track Existing tracks are not affected WORKING WITH TRACKS CHP 7 L E CHP 7 Applying multiple groove events to a track Groove events allow you to apply grooves to portions of tracks or apply different grooves to various portions of a track The groove is applied where the groove event overlaps the media event The edges of groove events are boundaries for grooves and audio cannot be grooved beyond the event edges 1 Select the Groove tool 2 Click the down arrow lt next to the Groove toolbar button and choose a groove from the menu or double click a groove in the Groove Pool 3 Click and drag over a track to paint groove events in the same way you create other events on the timeline Groove events are displayed at the bottom of the track to indicate where a groove will be applied 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to paint groove events as needed To toggle the height of the groove strips choose Show Full Size Groove Strips from the View menu a Tips Drag a groove from the Groove Pool to an existing groove event to change the event s groove Drag a groove from the Groove Pool to a space between two groove events
107. 138 Saving Mle Tele nr di A add 138 TABLE OF CONTENTS r 7 Working with grooveS 0 o ooococococn eee eee eee eee eeenenees 139 Applying Or re MOVING GrOOVeS 1 eee eee eens 139 Creating grooves sa sues hore wane teas eee e aed a gute aot as ios eae 142 Editing GrOOVCS AAA heb ARAN A ee eee 144 SING TOI Wacko caricia ap eee ea eed Cates adhe eee ae bate A 146 Creating a TOldenr Wack wash ot A Ole Ae ee wets ee aed ae aed iad in 146 Adding existing tracks to a folder track 0002 e eee eee eee eens 146 Removing tracks from a folder track 0000 cece eee eee eee eee teen eens 146 MUtInG Rre der tratamientos 146 SOlOmGra Older e usina sano ae mene ees soa AO es ao 146 Editing events in a folder track sexies e se ev eee tetas a ews 147 Mixing multiple tracks to a single track ccc ee eens 147 EXDORING eee virione edie eed a eee ioe ed E Ar E oe ae ee ee 148 USNO MEME a ocd aes ara E 149 SING DUSSC Scar rones 149 Adding busses to the project ASAE A A AAA A 149 Riel liek tracks to DUSSES vaticano 149 Routing busses to system hardware 000 c cece cece cece cette eect nnana nann 150 Delen DU SSES sai aa ac eee eke re tee SORE ete eee EOS eee ee eae ate 150 Using assignable effects 000 cee eee eee eens 151 Adding assignable effect controls ccc cece eee eee eee ee eee ene 151 Working with assignable effects Chains 0 0c cece eee eee eee cence eee neaee 152 Routing t
108. 19 Using ACID FX as track effects in ACID Music Studio 2 2 0c ces 119 Usina track ettects in ACID PIG acc eicie tere A Ga ee awe a wed RN Dea See eae Oe 120 Creating or adding to track plug in Chains 0 00 ccc eee ees 120 Arranging plug in Chall Order carpiano ee he a eh ae eee 122 Bypassing plug ins in a chain lt lt dad iii 122 Bypassing effect automation n ssaa e 00 nennen 122 Removing plug ins from chains ssp AAA eeeewanwers 122 Saving plug in chains as packages nannu ee eee eee eee eens 123 Removing or bypassing all effects on tracks e 123 UsINO Tack envelODes vacias rra aa A 124 Adding tracKenvelopes rc arar ii 124 Adjusting envelopes mA da dese 126 Using the Envelope tonada atadas d didas a 128 Hiding track envelopes sustraer 129 Removing track envelopes lt e e A A id 129 Choosing stereo pan typeS lt ccc eee eee ees 131 Using the BeatMapper occcccccccc eee eee eens 131 Understanding stretching propertieS xe e e ee eee ees 133 Configuring track propertie S 0 ee eee ees 133 Adjusting general track properties e e e cece eens 133 Adjusting stretching properties for loop or Beatmapped tracks o oooooooooooo 134 Adjusting track properties for MIDI tracks 0 0 eens 138 Reloading b ic tena emanada order lada adoa dadas dese 138 Replacing lOs boi ta dad ceed mane te E satis es ods Gre ai bio tp
109. 2 USINO MMe CUI SOP casinos wath ew a oa eae ewe al een bane R ee ed 43 Positioning the cursor with the MOUSE cc eee ees 43 Positioning the cursor with the keyboard 0 000 ees 43 Positioning the cursor with the Go To command lt lt eee eee eee eeeeeeees 43 Making SCICCIIONS surtir a wee eee 43 Selecting anh even ii beh Sek angen sewer aah A AAA eee ewes 43 Selecting multiple events 0 0 cc eee eee eee eee eens 44 Creating time Selections msi Dis ties ein da 45 Creating event selections within time selections e e 0c eee cece eee ee eens 46 Working with tracks cid E E ia 46 Neoraerina ae e ds Aa OSE cs ti a e adn do 46 MESIZING ThACKS velit wid A ee eae A A A a ia ole Sa 47 Changing mack Color taa oa asa dias 47 Renaming Tracks seis ia a ad 47 BE oeae bs e sere ses EE EE E ai Ed o da ee 47 Deleting TACKS vacios ra 47 Copying cutting and pasting tracks iii A A A A eae A A A 48 oo A eee eee R R he a TAR ARTA eae ea NR RA eae 48 MCTD TICKS ce Ca a o de de ls is o a de cis 49 SOIOING Mack eoniasispiidasra darla ba aio bes 50 Working with groups of trackS ooocococccccnc eee eee eee eee eens 50 USING UNGO and TCC 4s 6s ives aac eidine a brews Da 50 USING UNC ere E ian bow eave eased ar aia e bees 50 Uncdoma Ele see 529 2 8 sche Sic dde A ad ae gis Gaeta 51 WISING FCO neta bo create ee e e bbe bbs a Set a ias Pee ed eh 51 Clearing the undo history lt cid sidad dada daran eee 51 FlaVING
110. 232 Using the Keyboard tab siii asadas dada id 234 Using the Depay td visera dada dicas ban aia awa ee 234 Usina he OtihertabDi csyis vidad a RS e ETRE TE EEE 235 TABLE OF CONTENTS r 11 SINO thefFolders tab tirada aad bah a deka ea NA ARA 235 ACID Te and b se soriana ener 237 Adding long media files Quick o 237 Playing with duplicate trackS 00ooooooooonnnrrrarnaaa eee eee 237 STUNG paired tracks lt td ce 237 Duplicating With CHSGE ecuador hora ees 238 Creating ping pong pan effectS 0c cece eee eee teens 238 Adding depth with assignable effectS 00 cece ee eee eee 239 Playing double time half time 0 00 cc eens 239 Constructing the wall of SOUNGwsssicdsse dive dtawie feet Gceeae denen 1eeeu 240 Adding through subtraction e AAA oe oe Ea eee 240 Tweaking the AYNSAMIES uscar dada ida de 240 Fading inand ebd Of MIXES 2 ui o arar cvs arias 240 Adding Duld UNS is a A ts e ie Ate e Zk 241 Creating wah wah effects with automated TrackE0O oooooooooo 241 Making automated changes more stark o 242 Abruptly changing volume or pan occ 242 Turning automated effects on and Off occcccccc eee eee eee eens 242 Making automated frequency changes more natural 243 Overriding compress expand 0 cece eee ee eee ee eee e eens 243 Slicing and dicing in the Chopper 0000 cece cece 243 Chopping new loops for alternate time signat
111. 4 4 BPM a WA Project Key control This feature makes it possible to use media that are in different keys in the same project each loop that has a specified root note is transposed to the key indicated by the Project Key control For example if three loops have root notes of A B and C and your Project Key control is set to D the loops are pitch shifted by five three and two semitones respectively ee Note If the root note for a track is set to Don t Transpose in the Track Properties window the track does not pitch shift with the rest of the project pnn a sSGSGS S aS T Working with tempo key time signature change markers Tempo key time signature change markers allow you to make changes to the tempo key and or time signature at specified points in your project ee ee a Note Time signature changes must occur on the first beat of a measure a Oe WORKING IN THE TRACK VIEW CHP 5 a 1107 Adding tempo key time signature change markers 1 Position the cursor where you want the change to occur 2 From the Insert menu choose Tempo Key Time Signature Change The Tempo Key Time Signature Change dialog appears 3 Select the check boxes for the types of changes you want to Tempo 7 Key TEN r occur at the cursor position aaa e Key Change changes the key of all tracks until another tempo M Tempo change BPM 120 000 Cancel key time signature change marker is encountered Time
112. 7 Q Generate MIDI Clock Shift F7 BS Trigger From MIDI Timecode Ctrl F Triggering from MIDI timecode You can trigger ACID playback using MTC This means that the software initiates playback by receiving timecode from another device 1 Connect a word clock signal between your computer and triggering device to lock synchronization Note If the MIDI trigger device can output MIDI timecode a timecode converter is not necessary you can connect the trigger device directly to your computer Aire e _ __ E 2 Configure your triggering device to send MTC to your computer 3 From the Options menu choose Preferences and select the Sync tab to configure the application to receive MTC e From the Input device drop down list choose the port through which you receive MTC e From the Frame rate drop down list choose the frame rate that your trigger device uses to send MTC to ACID software From the Options menu choose Timecode and choose Trigger from MIDI Timecode from the submenu When an incoming MTC signal is received playback begins from the position indicated by the timecode If MTC is not being received you can play and edit normally WORKING WITH MIDI CHP 10 2001 Viewing incoming timecode You can view the incoming timecode in the time display located directly above the track list Right click the time display and choose MIDI Timecode In from the shortcut menu to show the incoming MTC t
113. 70 Splitting a time selection lt a e 060 sce hae ri 70 Splitting events within a time selection lt eee eee ees 70 JOINING Ta cada AAA te baa AEREAS 71 PID DIG COMING PEA L R L ant NE A E R R A 71 Cutting events in ripple editing mode 0 eee eee eens 71 Deleting events in ripple editing mode 2 eee ee 72 Pasting events in ripple editing mode 0 00 cc eee eee 73 Slipping and sliding eventS 0 eee eee eee eens 74 Shifting the contents of slipping events e ccc ee eee eee eens 75 SID RTM events vara rra o Guns ee a aOR Ea aaa 75 SIGING EVENS is AAA O A 75 Changing event properties sip ira naaa 75 TABLE OF CONTENTS d T Using event Lele 76 Setting an event s volume envelope 22 ccc cece eeaes 76 Setting an event s fade in and out envelope Curve 22202 e eee ees 76 Creating crossfades between eventS 22000cc cece eee cece eee e eee e eee ee eee aeaes 77 Using the Media Manager 0020c cece eee o 79 Creating a new media library 0 cee ees 79 Openinga media Dra a id 79 Adding media files to a library e e eens 80 Removing media files from a library lt naaa 82 tagging veea 82 Creating a tag tres diia A aa a a ss asias 82 Applving atagto a media file ius EAS A See Peis 83 Removing a tag from a media file ooooooooconornnna eee eee eens 83 Deleting atag froma Day pasacalle ATR coeds 84 Mergmg SU
114. A Select this check box if you want to continue to play if timecode is lost Enabling this option can compensate for infrequent losses in timecode If you frequently lose timecode you should perform troubleshooting to determine the cause of the problem Use the up and down arrows or enter a value in the box to specify the amount of time that timecode can be lost before the free wheel playback time starts A longer time is more tolerant of breaks in the incoming timecode Use the up and down arrows or enter a value in the box to specify the amount of time that playback continues after the free wheel slack time has been exceeded Use the up and down arrows or enter a value in the box to specify the amount of time it takes for the software to synchronize itself to incoming timecode On slower computers this time should be set to approximately two seconds On faster computers it may be set lower Setting this value too low can sometimes result in audible pitch shifting at the start of playback If ACID software is consistently behind or ahead of your MTC generator enter a value in the box to adjust a synchronization offset with quarter frame accuracy If the software is behind set this value to a negative number A setting of 4 is a common offset If the software is ahead set this value to a positive number A setting of 4 is a common offset although it is rare that the application will sync ahead Select a radio button to det
115. ACID After the ACID software is installed and you start it for the first time the registration wizard appears This wizard offers easy steps that allow you to register the software online with Sony Media Software Alternatively you may register online at http www sony com mediasoftware at any time Registering your product will provide you with access to a variety of technical support options notification of product updates and special promotions exclusive to registered ACID users Registration assistance If you do not have access to the Internet registration assistance is available during normal weekday business hours Please contact our Customer Service department by dialing one of the following numbers Telephone Fax Country 1 800 577 6642 toll free US Canada and Virgin Islands 608 204 7703 for all other countries 1 608 250 1745 Fax All countries Customer service sales For a detailed list of customer service options we encourage you to visit http mediasoftware sonypictures com support custserv asp Use the following numbers for telephone support during normal weekday business hours Telephone Fax Country 1 800 577 6642 toll free US Canada and Virgin Islands 608 204 7703 for all other countries 1 608 250 1745 Fax All countries Technical support For a detailed list of technical support options we encourage you to visit http mediasoftware sonypictures com support default asp To listen to your support optio
116. ACID software e ccc eee eee eens 16 Main WINCIOW vrai aa ea oak ARAS AA a wlan Oo sO ae ee 16 TOODA cesta ete ia ne nea ohne ee eto ia ee AAA 17 WAKS Se ica eg hia ase ah cic a saat satan ata sae ac sar sds evs avd cnt na deca Bane ele ici eeu atte nce ee 18 WEACK VICVY Sorrir aa TTT 19 VVINGOW GOCKING ared oi iia id at te hh he eda eae eed 21 Keyboard command reference o occccc eee ee eee eee EA 23 Audio signal TOW 20 i0cceccawtus teed A ee ee eee he ehh ee AAN A 29 WIDESIQNAITIOW tose ets touddion dae da nee esl 6 ea 31 Saulo neu ceed ot net eee 33 Starting DIOlCCIS susek enri Teeth AAA dee ASS Pee 33 Setting project propertles siria sii iia dicen daa E a ch Se antes 33 Opening existing projects sit a das 34 Getting Media ile mini BA Cau oa ee eee ead 35 Previewing media from the Explorer WINdOW annon nannan annn eee cette eee eens 35 Adding media tothe project iia arrancada rado dea 36 TABLE OF CONTENTS 2 y Understanding track eT 39 LOOPS a dai ida ida daa ia See ta 39 B sie e neurosis a li ia wee eee 39 Bestia pueda A dea do 39 MiD uz sas a A A a ee a 39 e AA A a O eee asa a de ee ee a 40 Adding and editing events 0 00 cece cee eee eee eee eee 40 Fainting events ls eee ieee eet Ge eee eee inde ete te edad 40 Changing the length of events e eee eee eee eens 42 Erasing sections O events c56 Gio A ob a i a he eee ee eh be baat 42 MOVING CVENI stag dar peda e En cee eee eee eee DE NEO 4
117. ACID software and close the application to clear the log file eee 1 In the Media Manager window click the Media Library Actions button ai and choose Open Media Library from the menu The Open Media Library dialog is displayed CHP 4 USING THE MEDIA MANAGER 80 r 2 Choose the folder where the library you want to open is stored e Choose a drive and folder from the Look in drop down list e Use the bar on the left side of the window to browse to a folder 3 Select a library from the list 4 Click the Open button to open the selected library The name of the current library is displayed in the upper right corner of the Search Results pane o e mg Mame 3 NY Dance Pro Pro 30 NY Dance Pro Pro 31 E NY Dance Dro Pro 32 E NY DANCE sPROM 35 lea ru DANCE sPROM a l oa ee ee Adding media files to a library Before you can search or organize your media files you ll need to add them to a media library Loop Loop Loop Loop Loop When the Sony Sound Series Loops amp Samples reference library is installed and set as the active reference library in the Media Manager Options dialog tags and custom properties from the reference library will be applied to media from existing Sony Sound Series Loops amp Samples or Loops for ACID collections when you add media to your library For more information on Media Manager options see Setting Media Manager options on page 94
118. ARE Setting advanced audio preferences Item Audio devices Interpolate position Position bias Do not pre roll buffers before starting playback Audio buffers Buffer size Samples Priority Using the MIDI tab Item Make these devices available for MIDI track playback and Generate MIDI Clock Make these devices available for MIDI input Auto MIDI input routing Default All Description This list displays all of the audio devices that are installed in your computer Selecting a device allows you to set the options for that device When you select this check box the software attempts to compensate for inaccurate devices by interpolating the playback or recording position If you notice that your playback cursor is offset from what you are hearing select this option for the playback device If the position of playback or record does not match what you hear after you enable Interpolate position you can attempt to compensate using the Position bias slider Moving this slider offsets the position forward or backward to compensate for the inaccuracies of the device When you select this check box buffers are not created prior to starting playback Some devices do not behave properly if you clear this check box If your audio stutters when you start playback try selecting this option Drag the slider to set the number of audio buffers that will be used Adjusting this setting can decrease gapping or help you
119. CID Pro software This window displays the Media Manager which you can use to search for manage and tag your media files Display the Media Manager window by choosing Media Manager from the View menu or pressing 5 For more information see Using the Media Manager on page 79 Track Properties This window allows you to change track attributes and edit MIDI tracks using OPT plug ins Display the Track Properties window by double clicking a track s icon or by pressing Att 6 For more information see Configuring track properties on page 133 and Working with MIDI on page 173 Surround Panner This feature is available only in ACID Pro software This window allows you to control panning in a 5 1 surround project Display the Surround Panner window by double clicking the surround panner on a track or mixer control or by pressing Alt 7 For more information see Working with 5 1 Surround on page 207 Soft Synth Properties This window allows you to change the attributes of soft synth controls in the Mixer window Display the Soft Synth Properties window by double clicking a soft synth control s icon or by pressing Alt 8 For more information see Using soft synth controls on page 153 Rewire soft synths are available only in ACID Pro software VSTi soft synths are available only in ACID Pro and ACID Music Studio software INTRODUCING ACID SOFTWARE CHP 1 e 23 Audio Plug In This feature is available only in ACID Pr
120. CID song or a different song e To publish your current ACID song choose a streaming format and bit rate e To publish a different song enter the path to the song or click Browse to locate the file This song must already be in a streaming format 4 Click Next If you are publishing the current ACID song it is rendered in the format and bit rate you specified A window appears from the publish provider with directions for completing the publishing process CHP 2 GETTING STARTED pj 5 Follow the instructions provided by the publish provider The file begins uploading to the provider A progress dialog informs you when the upload is finished 6 Click OK The publish provider provides a link to the song on their Web site however this may vary depending on provider Writing to CD You can burn your projects to CD using supported CD R CD RW drives You can burn CDs for multiple or single track projects and build audio CD layouts automatically or manually You can also create video CDs that can be played in many home DVD players and on computers with a CD ROM drive and VCD player software and multimedia CDs that can be played in any computer with the appropriate player Understanding track at once and disc at once ACID software provides two ways to record audio to a CD R disc track at once and disc at once Track at once Track at once writing records individual tracks to the disc and results in a partially recorded disc However
121. Click any selected point and drag it to the new position all selected points will follow To deselect the points click anywhere outside the selection Cutting copying and pasting envelope points 1 Select the Envelope tool using one of the following methods e From the Edit menu choose Editing Tool and choose Envelope from the submenu e Click the Envelope Too button 41 on the toolbar Click within a track to select it Drag along the timeline to select envelope points From the Edit menu choose Cut or Copy Position the cursor where you want to paste envelope points across a track Oo oO W N From the Edit menu choose Paste Copying envelopes to another track 1 Select the Envelope tool using one of the following methods e From the Edit menu choose Editing Tool and choose Envelope from the submenu e Click the Envelope Too button 41 on the toolbar Click within a track to select it From the Edit menu choose Select All From the Edit menu choose Cut or Copy Click within a track to select it Oo oO W N Click the Go to Start button Ml if you want the envelope to appear exactly as it was in the original track or click to position the cursor where you want the envelope to start 7 From the Edit menu choose Paste WORKING WITH TRACKS CHP 7 1 29 Hiding track envelopes This feature is available only in ACID Pro and ACID Music Studio software After you have creat
122. D Music Studio software _ 4 Note Some plug ins such as MP3 may require registration eee RE Creating custom rendering settings The Custom Settings dialog appears when you click Custom in the Save As dialog You can use the Custom Settings dialog to create custom encoding templates for many of the file formats available in the software 1 From the File menu choose Render As The Render As dialog appears 2 Choose your preferred file format from the Save as type drop down list If the format allows you to create custom settings the Custom button becomes active 3 Click Custom The Custom Template dialog appears GETTING STARTED CHP 2 9 4 Make the appropriate setting changes for the chosen file format For help on individual settings click the What sThis Help button ZT and click a setting aa Tip To save the custom settings for future use enter a name for the template in the Template box and click the Save Template button H ee 5 Click OK The Custom Template dialog closes Publishing to the Internet When your project is finished you have the option of publishing it to the Internet The most common place to publish your project is ACIDplanet com a virtual community of ACID users ACIDplanet com allows you to do the following Share your music Listen to projects built by other ACID enthusiasts Download free loops Enter remix contests co sponsored by Sony and major record labels Publis
123. DLAGS stes sia ica a addition ew eee ee eee eee eu da 84 Arranging tags in the tag tree matar cias dr ess 84 Editing tag names or imageS incaico rrn da iS 84 Viewing or creating palettes 00d rnrn A ee a i 85 Saving tags and properties to media files ooooooooooorrnnn o 86 Backing up your media librarles ooooocccorocannna o 86 Opening a Reference Library venian at Bee eee eae 87 Using the Sony Sound Series Loops amp Samples reference library oooomoo 87 Searching for media hies o 88 Searching bae a Keyword y isis dd AAA A 88 Searching usnog tags weimadaiindcha oe ba NR TRN bos brad aaa ARR R S 89 SONING Seal Chi results is Sad ai coda 89 VIEWING previous searches miii ad 89 Using advanced search Options 000 ccc cece cece eee ee eee ee eee ee eee eee eee 90 Previewing Mela civic ria Sa ee ee eee ewe new ees 91 Adding media to your project 000 cece eee eee ees 92 Resolving offline media Thies 0000s 92 TABLE OF CONTENTS B Customizing the Media Manager window e c eee eee ees 93 Automatically hiding the Search pane ccococccccccc eens 93 Docking and undocking the Search pane 0 0 eee eee eens 93 RESIZING COMAS oon cet ted Ge hoe heehee ctw ead arti he pie eee 93 MOVIGO COMMAS 2d ii ana o unico 93 Showing or Hiding COIUMINS 242242 45 ise bee bei eee Lotte teas i debated haeteteeds 94 Adding CUSTOM COMUNAS aaa Un dae 94 Setting M
124. E 4 Click Close to save the toolbar settings and exit the dialog Using the time display The time display above the track list reflects the cursor s position on the timeline Changing cursor position You can edit the cursor position using time as it is displayed on either the beat ruler or time ruler e To set the cursor s position based on the beat ruler right click the time display and choose Edit Cursor Position Beats from the shortcut menu e To set the cursor s position based on the time ruler right click the time display and choose Edit Cursor Position Time from the shortcut menu Once you make your selection from the shortcut menu a box appears for the appropriate time display Enter the cursor s new position and press Enter a Tip You can also edit the cursor position directly by double clicking the desired time display value and entering the new cursor position pp Changing the time display The time display window always reflects the format of the time ruler You may change the ruler settings for the time ruler via the time display window 1 Right click the time display window to display a shortcut menu 2 Choose Time at Cursor Format to display a submenu 3 Choose the desired time format Both the time window and time ruler display the chosen time format APPENDIX A CUSTOMIZING ACID SOFTWARE A Monitoring MIDI timecode This feature is available only in ACID Pro software
125. Editor tab drag the top of a velocity bar up or down to change the velocity value You can also drag across multiple bars to change their values at the same time Velocity 127 w gt ll HW o 64 WORKING WITH MIDI CHP 10 L 183 Setting pitch bend 1 In the lower left corner of the Piano Roll Editor tab click the drop down arrow and choose Pitch Bend from the menu 2 In the area at the bottom of the Piano Roll Editor tab drag to draw your pitch bend curve To erase a curve right click and drag Pitch Bend 8 191 4 096 l gt gt ll m e 292 Changing continuous controller information 1 In the lower left corner of the Piano Roll Editor tab click the drop down arrow choose All Continuous Controllers from the menu and choose a controller from the submenu 2 In the area at the bottom of the Piano Roll Editor tab drag to draw your controller information 9 Controller 127 J gt il g p m Selecting note events With the Draw tool selected you can select individual note events by clicking them You can also use one of several methods to select multiple events e With the Draw tool selected press or while clicking note events Pressing allows you to select the first and last note events of a range in order to select all notes in between while pressing allows you to select non contiguous note events e Click the Selection Tool button and drag across note events you w
126. From the File menu choose Open The Open dialog appears 2 Choose a drive and folder from the Look in drop down list 3 Select a file in the browse window or type a name in the File name box Detailed information about the selected file appears at the bottom of the dialog box 4 Choose a file type from the Files of type drop down list to limit the files displayed in the dialog box 5 Click Open II A 7 Note If one of the media files cannot be located when you open an ACID project you can choose to leave the media offline and continue to edit events on the track The events point to the location of the source media file If you restore the source media file at a later time the project opens normally ES eee GETTING STARTED CHP 2 l 38 Opening ACID projects with embedded media When you open an acd zip project the project file and all media files are copied to the temporary files folder _ __ _ _ _ o e Note You can customize the location of the temporary files folder For more information see Using the General tab on page 227 ann Any changes you make to the project are saved to the files in this temporary folder until you save the acd zip file again For more information see Saving projects on page 56 Getting media files Now that you ve created a new project or opened an existing project the next step is to add media to the project You can use the Ex
127. I from 198 Routing busses to 150 Routing MIDI tracks to 196 Routing surround to 209 Routing video to 206 Setting up for surround 208 Help 14 Hiding showing Bus tracks 165 Toolbar 223 Track envelopes 129 Video tracks 203 Windows 219 Icons color intensity preferences 234 tinting preferences 234 Inserting time 108 Installation 14 Joining events 71 K Key changes Event 75 108 Marker 106 Project 106 Track 108 Keyboard preferences 234 Keyboard shortcuts Chopper window 112 General 23 Keyframes 214 216 LFE channel 207 210 List editor 186 194 Creating MIDI events 192 Deleting MIDI events 194 Editing MIDI events 188 Filtering MIDI events 187 MIDI event parameters 189 MIDI notes and frequencies 191 Previewing MIDI events 186 Quantizing note events 194 Step recording MIDI 192 Undoing and redoing 194 Looped playback 52 Loops Creating in the Chopper 116 Exporting from projects 148 Stretching properties 134 135 Tracks 39 Main window 16 Markers 97 102 Command markers 99 In the Chopper 113 Marker bar 20 Tempo key time signature markers 106 Time markers 99 Media files adding from Media Manager 92 Adding to projects 36 Downloading from the Web 39 Exporting loops from projects 148 Extracting from CD 38 Previewing in Chopper 112 Previewing in Explorer 35 Reloading 138 Replacing 138 resolving offline 92 Saving track prope
128. INDEX One shots Selecting in the Chopper 117 Tracks 39 Online help 14 Opening Media files 36 Projects 34 OPT plug ins 195 Other preferences tab 235 Packages Saving 123 164 Painting events 40 41 Palettes 85 assigning buttons 85 clearing buttons 85 creating 85 Panic button 197 Panning Pan types 131 214 Surround 210 Tracks 19 48 124 130 Tracks in MIDI files 177 Pasting Events 65 In ripple mode 73 Tracks 48 Piano roll editor 178 185 Adding note events 180 continuous controller information 183 Deleting note events 185 Editing note events 181 Previewing MIDI 179 Quantizing note events 184 Selecting MIDI tracks 180 Selecting note events 183 snap to scale 184 Undoing and redoing 185 Pitch shifting Events 75 108 MIDI tracks 175 Projects 106 Tracks 108 Playing projects 51 Plug In Manager window 23 Plug Ins See Effects HAN Preferences Audio 229 Display 234 Editing 232 envelope colors 234 General 227 keyboard 234 MIDI 230 Other 235 Sync 232 track colors 234 Video 231 VST effects 230 VST Instruments 231 Preset Manager 164 Presets Managing 164 Saving 162 Previewing media Adjusting preview volume 54 Chopper window 112 Explorer window 35 Projects Adding media 36 Key 106 Opening 34 Playing 51 Properties 33 Publishing to the Internet 59 Rendering 57 Saving 56 Starting 33 Tempo 105 Time signature 106 P
129. LAA Note The Sony Sound Series Loops amp Samples reference library is not installed by default but you can install it from the ACID CD or download it from the Sony Media Software Web site http mediasoftware sonypictures com reference After installing the library go to the Media Manager Options dialog and choose the reference library from the Reference library drop down list __ OOO Tip If the Save media usage relationships in active media library check box is selected on the General tab of the ACID Preferences dialog you can add individual files to a library by previewing the files in the ACID Explorer window S N 1 Click the Add Files to Media Library button The Add Files to Media Library dialog is displayed 2 Choose the folders that will be searched for media a If it isn t displayed automatically click the Add Folder button 231 to display the Browse for Folder dialog b Select the folder you want to search c Click OK USING THE MEDIA MANAGER CHP 4 L 81 aaae Tips If you want to change an item in the folder list select it and click the Browse button in the Folders column If you want to remove a folder from the list select it and click the Remove Folder button X ee 3 Repeat step 2 for each folder you want to search 4 Select the Include subfolders check box if you want to search folders within the selected folders 5 Select the Audio Video Image
130. M E ls DRNA display all media that contains any keyword tag or advanced search criteria S audio In the example to the right the Search Results pane would display all files LP Vocals that contain the tag High Tom OR the tag Floor Tom I amp Keyboards Choose Match All from the Match Any Match All drop down list if you want to display only media that includes all keyword tag and advanced search criteria In the preceding example the Search Results pane would display only files with tags High Tom AND Floor Tom ee Note If you have check boxes selected for parent and child tags those tags will be treated as an OR relationship regardless of whether Match Any or Match All is selected LS Advanced Media Manager Explorer Groove Po Click a column heading to sort the results in ascending or descending order based on that column ewing previous searches Click the Previous Search button 3711 in the top left corner of the Search Results pane to navigate through your recent searches and update the contents of the Search Results pane After viewing previous searches click the Next Search button in the top left corner of the Search Results pane to navigate back to your current search USING THE MEDIA MANAGER 90 r Using advanced search options If your media library contains many files and you re searching for a very specific media file the Advanced section of the Search p
131. Many of the ACID Operations menu items and shortcut keys are common to other Sony Media Software applications The following sections provide a tour of the ACID work area Main window The ACID workspace includes three main areas the track list the track view or timeline and the window docking area The other parts of the interface are tools and features used while creating and working with your project You can resize the track list track view and window docking area by dragging the dividers between them Track list Window docking area INTRODUCING ACID SOFTWARE Divider File Edit View Insert Tools Options Help 2BN BI LY P ml A 1 1 000 Timeline 110 a 00 00 00 000 5 132 NY DANCE sPROM offe ba O 1 Alhol rd BID EID D B I eet tr br hd La IE et tt br T Lt da ol wot tte ble fa Itoh TATU TADO OLA v Yol 20 0 dB T ule EAM lity ba batted ett ulen ebay gt A ASS AOOO O O IES IES OE OA OE E O VO OE OE O OE IES E O O O A OE O O VOE AE OA O OE O E O O E O OE O OE OE A OE OE O A O A E Fe NY DANCE sPROM de I a Vol 8508 11 KAA AAA AAA AA AAA AAA AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA AAA AA res Track view EXE NY DANCE sPROM e I Vol 12 098 1 GF sus ELECTRICPIA de O 1 Vol FN AR d HI L 125000 4 LU apu g Y TETERA E Fingered Riffs OS UA gt le Fingered Bass Riff 4 OS O1 wav Media_Files K 210 audio Fingered Bass Riff A
132. OS 02 wav Na e Loops and Samples E Fingered Bass Riff A OS 03 wav Finge Y L Sonic Excursions For E Fingered Bass Riff A OS 04 wav Finge q Baia and Low Bass 1 lel pinaered Bass Riff A OS 05 wav Finge 3 Q Fingered Z Fingered Bass Riff A OS O6 wav G3 Finge E J Odd Time E Fingered Bass Riff A OS 07 wav 3 Finge E a exe Shots Fingered Bass Riff A OS 08 waw Finge L 3 Fingered Nol 6 Fingered Bass Riff A OS 09 way 3 Finge a Fingered Bass Riff 4 OS 10 wav Finge ES bg di de insert Soft Synth i SynthBass 4 Synth Pad HOT O 1 Inf S Mixer 44 100 Hz 16 Bit B Master O 1 E Preview L y Fingered Rifl oof J Slap Notes C Y Slap Riffs OS a Z aoar A 5 Complete 00 00 44 Audio One Shot 00 00 01 456 44 100 Hz 16 Bil Explorer 27 255MB CHP 1 L 17 Toolbar CHP 1 The toolbar allows you to quickly access the most commonly used functions and features in ACID software a es Opens a new project You will be prompted to save any changes to the current project Displays the Open File dialog From this window you can browse all of the available drives to select an ACID project or audio file to open Saves any changes to the current project The first time you save a project the Save As dialog appears Opens the Publish wizard so you can share your ACID creation on
133. Project Properties dialog You can also choose to apply a low pass filter for the LFE channel Applying a low pass filter approximates the bass management system in a 5 1 decoder and ensures that you re sending only low frequency audio to the LFE channel 1 From the File menu choose Properties 2 Click the Audio tab 3 From the Master bus mode drop down list choose 5 1 surround 4 To limit the audio sent to the LFE channel do the following e Select the Enable low pass filter on LEE check box and enter a value in the Cutoff frequency for low pass filter box The low pass filter isolates the audio sent to the LFE channel by limiting it to frequencies lower than the value entered in the Cutoff frequency for low pass filter box e Choose a setting from the Low pass filter quality drop down list to determine the sharpness of the filter s rolloff curve Best produces the sharpest curve en _ HH Note Before rendering your surround project check your surround authoring application s documentation to determine its required audio format Some encoders require a specific cutoff frequency and rolloff while other encoders require that no filter be applied before encoding A AAA 5 Click OK WORKING WITH 5 1 SURROUND CHP 12 e 209 The track list and Mixer window switch to 5 1 surround mode The Master bus becomes the Surround Master bus which contains faders for each of the six surround channels Surround panners appear on tracks a
134. RKING WITH TRACKS CHP 7 L 1 23 Ra Saving plug in chains as packages This feature is available only in ACID Pro and ACID Music Studio software You can save plug in chains as packages so that you may use them again with other projects If you use a combination of plug ins often saving them as a package saves you time Effect packages retain their chain order and individual plug in settings You may save plug in chains as packages from existing chains on tracks or when you are creating a plug in chain The plug in chains that you save as packages appear in the Plug In Chooser dialog in the Packaged Chains folder You can apply an effect package to a track the same way you assign a plug in to a track Once you have created custom presets for effects or effect chains you can use the Preset Manager to back up transfer or delete custom presets from any of the plug ins you use in ACID software For more information see Using the Preset Manager on page 164 1 Click the Track FX button H The Audio Plug In window appears MMM Note If the track has no plug in chain clicking the Track FX button displays the Plug In Chooser dialog eee 2 Click the Edit Chain button to display the Plug In Chooser dialog 3 Add and arrange plug ins to create a plug in chain and click OK 4 Click a specific plug in and adjust the effect s parameters manually or choose one of the presets from the Preset drop down list For more information
135. Using busses on page 149 Available only in ACID Pro software Choose a sample rate from the drop down list or enter your own rate The sample rate Sample rate range is 2 000 Hz to 192 000 Hz Higher sample rates result in better quality sound but also mean larger audio files Choose a bit depth from the drop down list A higher bit depth results in better quality Bit depth sound but also means larger audio files Select this check box to limit the audio sent to the LFE channel in a 5 1 surround project Enable low pass filter on LFE For more information see Working with 5 1 Surround on page 207 Available only in ACID Pro software Enter a low pass cutoff frequency value for 5 1 surround projects Audio sent to the LFE Cutoff frequency for low pass filter channel is limited to frequencies lower than the value you enter Applying a low pass filter approximates the bass management system in a 5 1 decoder and ensures that you re sending only low frequency audio to the LFE channel Available only in ACID Pro software Choose a setting from the drop down list to determine the sharpness of the low pass Low pass filter quality filter s rolloff curve Best produces the sharpest curve Available only in ACID Pro software Select this check box if your project requirements do not change or you want consistent Start all new projects with these settings settings for future projects Opening existing projects 1
136. WORKING WITH TRACKS lu 1 gt Using track effects in ACID Pro The Sony Track EQ plug in effect is assigned to all tracks by default however it does not use CPU power or affect the sound until you adjust its settings You can remove the EQ plug in if desired For more information see Removing plug ins from chains on page 122 In addition you can use effect plug ins in the Mixer window by applying effect chains to busses or soft synths or by creating assignable effect chains and routing tracks to them For more information see Using the Mixer on page 149 e Important Be aware that using non in place plug ins such as Time Stretch Pitch Shift without preserving duration and some Vibrato settings will cause audio to play out of synchronization with the waveform display in the timeline and with other tracks If an effects chain includes non in place plug ins the effects chain icon will be displayed as a 7 When using ACID software as a ReWire device any effects chain that includes non in place plug ins will be automatically bypassed to prevent synchronization problems with the ReWire mixer application The effects chain icon will be displayed as a Apply the plug ins within the ReWire mixer application T Creating or adding to track plug in chains This feature is available only in ACID Pro and ACID Music Studio software A plug in chain can contain one or more plug ins When you add multiple
137. Windows Windows Installer is installed and then you are asked to restart your system AAA Using online help You can access two varieties of help within ACID software e Online help e What sThis help also referred to as context sensitive help Online help To access online help choose Contents and Index from the Help menu or press Fi I o 7 Note To view online help Internet Explorer 5 1 or later must be installed on your system If you purchased the ACID Pro or ACID Music Studio boxed version Internet Explorer version 5 1 is included on your CD ROM R INTRODUCING ACID SOFTWARE CHP 1 E ACID Pro Music Studio XMC and XPress Online Help Toobar gt amp amp ll Hide Back Print Options Glossary Shortcuts Tabs Contents Index Search Favorites 0 Introduction Py What s New AC D Using Help Technical Support Loop Based Music Creation and Mixing Legal Notices i ae f The ACID Window Copyright 2005 Sony Pictures Digital Media Software and Services All Rights Reserved Using ACID Software IO Customizing ACID Software Keyboard Shortcuts You can use ACID software to create songs remix tracks develop music Information Signal Flow Diagrams beds score videos and develop music for Web sites and Flash animations Troubleshooting With ACID software music creation has never been easier pane Glossary l l l l T ACID software is an amazing tool for producing ar
138. You can use the time display to monitor incoming or outgoing MIDI timecode MIDI can be monitored in the following ways e Display MIDI timecode generated from external sources e Display MIDI timecode and MIDI clock information that is generated The time display settings work in conjunction with your project s properties and MIDI setup options 1 Right click the time display window to display a shortcut menu 2 From the shortcut menu choose the type of MIDI monitoring to be displayed Once you have made your selection the time display window displays both the MIDI code being input or output and a status message Setting default track properties Each new track has certain default properties including height volume pan type and track effects MIDI tracks also have a default set of MIDI editors that appear in the Track Properties window You can modify these track properties and then use the modified track as a standard for all new tracks you create 1 Modify a track s volume pg 48 pan type pg 131 height Set Default Track Properties x pg 47 track effects pg 119 and or MIDI editors pg 195 Select the properties to use as future defaults for new tracks These properties will default to the values of the current track 2 Right click the track header and choose Set Default Track 7 Volume Properties from the shortcut menu MW Pan Type M Height 3 Select the check boxes for properties you wish to set Clear the P Trac
139. acing the MIDI file with another file Volume and pan changes made in the General tab of the Track Properties window are not saved to the file when you click the Save File button The MIDI file retains its original volume and pan settings however the volume and pan changes made in the General tab are retained in the ACID project file This means that when you reload a MIDI file the volume and pan changes are not reset but are retained For more information see Changing track volume and pan on page 177 Routing MIDI tracks to MIDI devices or soft synth controls You can assign a soft synth control in the Mixer window to any DLS set VST instrument or ReWire mixer application on your computer You can then route a MIDI track to the soft synth control For more information see Using soft synth controls on page 153 Alternately you can route a track directly to an external MIDI device through a MIDI port Because ACID software supports ReWire 1 0 MIDI data is not sent to the mixer MIDI tracks are output as audio data through soft synths A _ _ _ _ ___ Note ReWire soft synths are available only in ACID Pro software VSTi soft synths are available only in ACID Pro and ACID Music Studio software e T rr _ _ _ _ lt lt Tip You can use or to select multiple MIDI tracks and change their soft synth routing all at once EA J _ ___ WORKING
140. ack CHP 6 view on page 116 Repeat steps six through eight to insert all desired selections in the track view USING THE CHOPPER USING THE CHOPPER CHP 6 119 CHAPTER Yo ea Working with Tracks s x gt a pe L E E This chapter covers advanced track features including track effect chains track envelopes groove mapping and stereo panning modes You ll also learn more about track types track properties track folders and rendering tracks to new files Using track effects ACIDO Pro software allows you to use DirectX and VST plug ins at the track level and ACID Music Studio provides built in Sony ACID FX on your tracks Track level plug ins process everything on the selected track You can create plug in chains adjust the order of plug ins on a chain bypass plug ins remove plug ins and save frequently used chains as presets Using ACID FX as track effects in ACID Music Studio Use ACID FX to apply distortion EQ low frequency oscillator chorus flanger phaser or wah wah delay and reverb to your tracks 1 Select a track 2 From the View menu choose Audio Plug In or click the Track FX button The Audio Plug In window is displayed for the selected track 3 Use the Audio Plug In window to edit each effect s settings For detailed information about using ACID FX access the ACID FX online help by clicking the Plug In Help button 21 on the Audio Plug In window CHP 7
141. acks to help them cut through the mix For more information see Changing a track s key on page 108 e Further differentiate specific tracks using pan and volume envelopes to color the project and simulate live performance For more information see Using track envelopes on page 124 e Make the effects even more pronounced by setting a start offset within specific individual events For more information see Changing event properties on page 75 Adding through subtraction You can create dynamics by removing sections of events You can erase sections of events from a project by using the Erase tool To demonstrate using subtractive arranging add three or four similar drum loops to a project Use the Erase tool to delete specific sections of each event For example erase all snares from one track all basses from another high hats from the third and so on This results in a tighter more realistic drum sound for your project Experiment with taking this technique a step further and randomly remove sections from each track When doing this remember to keep at least one of the drum tracks playing at all times unless you want the drums to completely drop out of the mix Randomly removing sections of events adds realism to your projects by approximating how a drummer plays with slight variations throughout a song Tweaking the dynamics You can use several techniques to adjust the dynamics of your mix Fading in and out of mixes
142. adings and choose Column Chooser from the shortcut menu 2 Drag the columns you want to see from the Column Chooser dialog to the Search Results pane 3 To hide a column right click a column heading and choose Remove this Column from the shortcut menu Adding custom columns You can add custom columns to the Search Results pane to store additional information about media files When you add custom columns they are added to the current library only For example if you wanted to keep track of which removable hard drive contained a media file you could create a custom Drive Number column to assign any numeric rating to a media file You could then use the Advanced section of the Search pane to search using the Drive Number value When adding media to a library you can choose to add this information by selecting the Add tags and custom columns from files check box in the Add Files to Media Library dialog 1 Right click the column headings and choose Custom Columns from the shortcut menu 2 Click the Add New Column button to add a custom column A new entry is added to the list 3 In the Name box type the name you d like to display as a column heading 4 Select the Type box and choose Text or Integer from the drop down list to indicate whether you ll store text or numeric data in the column 5 If you want to remove a custom column select an entry in the list and click the Delete Selected Columns button XI The column and all
143. age 111 2 Use the pitch shifting to transpose some of the new events For more information see Changing an event s key on page 108 3 Apply volume envelopes to simulate the varying attacks associated with live soloing For more information see Adding volume or pan envelopes on page 124 4 Use tempo key time signature change markers to create passages with tempos that deviate from the project tempo For more information see Working with tempo key time signature change markers on page 106 Building scales Though it is well outside the intended scope of the application you can build unique scales from audio loops To do this you must first isolate a note and determine what pitch it is You can easily do this using the Spectrum Analysis tool in Sound Forge Once you isolate and identify the note choose Save As from the File menu in Sound Forge to save the note as a new WAV file with a unique name Finally add the file to the ACID project and use pitch shifting to create all remaining notes in the scale ACID TIPS AND TRICKS APPENDIX B TE n z b aN ee The glossary contains terms and their definitions that you may come across in the manual This glossary not only includes terms associated with ACIDO software but also includes relevant industry terms acd zip Activation Code Adaptive Delta Pulse Code Modulation ADPCM Advanced Streaming Format ASF Aliasing ASIO ASX File Attack Attenuation
144. aint events eR Placing events with the Draw tool The Draw tool is the most common method of placing events on the timeline This tool allows you to add track specific events one at a time In addition you can use the Draw tool to select edit and move events For more information see Adding and editing events on page 40 1 Click the Draw Tool button 4 or choose Editing Tool from the Edit menu and choose Draw from the submenu The pointer displays as a pencil icon 2 Place the Draw tool at the left edge of any track containing a media file 3 Click and hold the mouse button while dragging the Draw tool to the right A waveform representing the event appears on the timeline as you drag the mouse Notice that if you are placing a loop file on the timeline small indentations appear along the top and bottom edges of the event indicating the start and end points of each individual loop mnn Tip Events can be also be drawn from right end to left beginning es 4 Release the mouse button to end the event 5 Click the Play from Start button 5 on the transport bar The event plays back GETTING STARTED CHP 2 L M CHP 2 Painting events with the Paint tool Unlike the Draw tool the Paint tool allows you to quickly paint multiple events across several tracks This can be useful when you need to quickly add several seemingly random events to a project The Paint tool is also best used for painting multiple on
145. and audition patches To display the Soft Synth Properties dialog double click the soft synth icon on a control Soft Synth Properties E X L DLS Soft Synth f Ed Soft Synth Yoice set us sound set 16 bit E Ex Channel 2 9 Available voices Patch name Patch H Bank MSR Bank LSB J Voice Piano 1 J Voice Piano 1 Note Audio driver latency can limit your ability to preview DLS voices in real time Using low latency drivers will produce the best results 0 eS A USING THE MIXER CHP 8 la AAA 22222 1 5 7 CHP 8 Changing VST instruments for soft synth controls This feature is available only in ACID Pro and ACID Music Studio software You can choose a VST instrument from anywhere on your system for output from a soft synth control 1 Double click the soft synth icon on a control The Soft Synth Properties window appears 2 Click the Edit Soft Synth button Edt soft synth The Soft Synth Chooser dialog appears 3 Choose a VST instrument from the list and click OK If the VST instrument you want to use does not appear in the list you may need to locate the files for use in the ACID application For more information see Locating VST instruments on page 158 4 Select the Enable button D to enable playback of the VST instrument 5 Modify the VST instrument settings as needed using the buttons in the Soft Synth Properties window Opens an effect preset Choose a
146. ane can help you zero in on exactly the file you want If you want to perform an advanced search to refine the results of a previous search start by creating a quick search or tag based search and then perform the following steps _ _ _z E gt _ lt _ _ lt _ gt 2 LE Tips You can use the Search Results Limit box in the Media Manager Options dialog to determine the maximum number of media files you d like to have returned in the results of your searches Increasing the Search Results Limit setting increases the amount of time required to search a library and can significantly decrease performance if set excessively high When performing complex searches consider creating temporary tags to classify the results If you apply a tag to the files found by a complex search you can return to those files easily by searching on the tag The Media Manager tool can search for tags more quickly than it can perform keyword or advanced searches EE 1 Add your search criteria a Click the Add New Search Criteria button in the Search pane The Search Criteria Chooser is displayed b Double click an item in the Search Criteria Chooser or drag it to the Advanced section of the Search pane r 4 Tips If an item in the Search Results pane displays a button you can click it to find related media For example clicking the button in the following example adds an item to the Advanced section to help you find
147. aps at all try increasing this slider in small increments until the gapping stops If you simply cannot get playback to be free of gapping you need to either decrease the number of tracks you are trying to play simultaneously install more RAM in your computer so you can increase buffering buy a faster access hard drive or minimize the number of DirectX plug ins you are trying to use simultaneously Select this check box to automatically compensate for offset between the time you initiate recording and when your sound card starts recording Drag this slider to specify an offset value Enter a lower and upper limit to specify which files are opened as loops if stretching properties are not saved in the file Files that are shorter than the lower limit are opened as one shot tracks files longer than the upper limit start the Beatmapper Wizard When you select this check box a rapid fade is placed on the edges of audio events 10 ms by default to soften potentially harsh transitions When you clear this check box edges of new events are not faded fades that were applied before the check box is cleared are not removed Right click an event and select or clear the Quick Fade Edges command to override the default event fade behavior for individual events Enter a time in milliseconds to specify the duration of fades applied to the edges of events Restores all audio preferences to the default settings CUSTOMIZING ACID SOFTW
148. arker press M or double click the beat ruler A beat anchor and groove marker are added to the nearest division on the beat ruler e If you want to delete a marker right click it and choose Delete from the shortcut menu _ a _ Yk k Tip Use a single beat anchor groove marker to adjust all beats forward or back equally This produces an effect similar to slipping an event EE SS __ SGV s 4 aaa a T Adjust beat anchors and groove markers as necessary Adjusting anchors and markers during looped playback helps you hear the results of your edits a Drag a beat anchor 9 or insert a new one to indicate which beat you want to adjust If snapping is enabled beat anchors snap to the current grid spacing Hold while dragging to bypass snapping b Drag a groove marker jj to adjust when the beat will be played Drag to the left if you want a beat to be played early or drag left if you want it to be played late You cannot drag groove markers past each other but multiple markers can exist at the same point in time When the Allow snapping for Post Groove Markers check box is selected on the General tab of the Preferences dialog groove markers will snap to the current grid spacing if snapping is enabled Hold while dragging to bypass snapping c Double click a beat anchor or groove marker to reset the marker to the beat anchor position 4 Tip Hover over a beat anchor or groove marker to display a
149. ars for each track as it is rendered to a file Tempo information is included in the file name of each loop file created e g bass 120 000 BPM wav WORKING WITH TRACKS CHP 7 149 CHAPTER una Using the Mixer me E Fx 8 Ad B R gt a I b a ma In the Mixer window you ll manage the projects busses assignable effects and soft synth controls In this chapter you ll learn how to add each of these controls to the mixer and route individual tracks to them You ll also learn about working with the mixer controls including adjusting levels muting soloing and adding effects This chapter also describes how to automate mixer controls by viewing them in the track view and adding envelopes Ka Using busses This feature is available only in ACID Pro software Think of busses as virtual pathways where signals from multiple tracks or effects can be mixed You can add as many as 26 busses to the Mixer window which provides you with a great deal of flexibility and mixing power Busses are the last stage of the ACIDO signal flow and as such can be used to output audio signals to specific hardware For more information see Routing busses to system hardware on page 150 Adding busses to the project Add a bus to a project by clicking the Insert Bus button inserteus in the Mixer window or by choosing Bus from the Insert menu Adding multiple busses 1 Display the Project Properties dialog using one
150. ast significant byte value for the bank Most significant byte value for the bank Number of the patch you want to play Time in measures beats ticks where you want the event to begin Number of cents by which you want to bend the pitch Time in measures beats ticks where you want the event to begin MIDI channel 1 16 where you want to send the event Note to which you want to apply pressure Pressure 0 127 you want to apply to the note Most devices will apply more vibrato to a note as the pressure increases Time in measures beats ticks where you want the event to begin MIDI channel 1 16 where you want to send the event Number of the new patch you want to play Packed nonregistered parameter numbers NRPN are used to adjust settings such as vibrato and filtering but are not part of the General MIDI specification Refer to your MIDI device s documentation for more information about the required parameters Packed registered parameter numbers RPN are used to adjust common settings such as pitch wheel range WORKING WITH MIDI CHP 10 t 191 MIDI notes and frequencies The following table shows the musical pitch and frequency associated with each MIDI note A5 is 440 Hz and middle C is C5 at 261 63 Hz These values can differ often by one octave from values used by other manufacturers The following frequencies are based on equal temperament tuning Pitch MIDI Key Frequency Pitch MIDI Key Frequency Pitc
151. available only in ACID Pro and ACID Music Studio software Item Default VST search folder Alternate VST search folder X audio plug ins Description Displays the location where the software looks for VST effects Click Browse to choose an alternate location where VST effects can be found Select VST effects to be available as Select the VST effects that you want available for use as ACID audio plug ins Only the VST effects located in the default or alternate search folders appear in this box 230 pS CUSTOMIZING ACID SOFTWARE APPENDIX A 281 Using the VST Instruments tab R VSTi soft synths are available only in ACID Pro and ACID Music Studio software Item Description Default VSTi search folder Displays the location where the software looks for VST instrument files Alternate VSTi search folder X Click Browse to choose an alternate location where VST instrument files can be found Select VST instruments to be Select the VST plug ins that you want available for use as ACID soft synths Only the available as soft synths VST instruments located in the default or alternate search folders appear in this box After you add a VSTi soft synth to a project the VST instrument stays locked until you close the software When a VST instrument is locked the lock icon for that VSTi displays as locked and you cannot clear the VSTi s check box to make it unavailable in the software Using the ReWire Devices tab ReWire soft
152. ay the Surround Panner window 3 Adjust the panning settings For more information see Using the Surround Panner window on page 212 r 4 Note You cannot automate muting including channels or the gain applied to the center channel using the Center fader eee 4 Close the Surround Panner window A keyframe with the pan settings you created appears below the track at the cursor position e O V Tip You can also add keyframes by double clicking the keyframe row or by right clicking the row and choosing Add Keyframe from the shortcut menu Once yow ve added the keyframe double click it to adjust panning settings in the Surround Panner window S N As you add keyframes to a track or bus track the Surround Panner window shows the path of the panning keyframes The Smoothness slider controls the smoothness of the interpolation path between the keyframes For more information see Adjusting the Smoothness slider on page 216 Working with keyframes After you add keyframes you can work with them in much the same way as envelope points For more information see Using track envelopes on page 124 Moving keyframes Drag a keyframe to a new position below its track Duplicating keyframes Hold and drag a keyframe to a new position below its track Editing keyframes 1 Double click a keyframe to open the Surround Panner window 2 Adjust the panning settings as desired and close the window CHP 12 WORKING WITH 5 1 SURROUND 216
153. both channels simultaneously by doing either of the following e Drag in the middle of the fader while making your adjustment e Click the Unlock Fader Channels button before adjusting the fader You can also change the fader level by double clicking e Double click the fader to reset it to 0 0 dB e If you have set each channel differently double click either channel to match the remaining channel to its level Changing meter resolution You can select the meter resolution This is useful when building a project from several media source pools that have varying volume levels To change the resolution right click a meter and choose the desired resolution from the shortcut menu mm a _ Note Changing the meter resolution of one fader automatically changes all other meters in the mixer to match the selected resolution eee E GETTING STARTED CHP 2 L BB Adjusting for clipping The volume of certain media files may cause a meter to clip Clipping results in a distorted audio signal and displays in a red indicator at the top of the meter If the meter clips lower the volume and click the red clip indicator to reset the meter Continue adjusting the fader and resetting the meter until you eliminate the clipping cee Tip You can also reset a meter by right clicking it and choosing Reset Clip from the shortcut menu EEE SS S_ _ a ak Saving rendering and deliv
154. by panning a dry signal no effects to one side and a wet signal with effects such as chorus or reverb to the other You can pan the dry and wet signals by adding an assignable effects chain to your project 1 Add an assignable effects chain containing an effect such as chorus or reverb to your project For more information see Adding assignable effect controls on page 151 2 Press U to view bus tracks For more information see Automating mixer controls in track view on page 165 3 Right click the bus track for the assignable effect control choose Insert Remove Envelope from the shortcut menu and choose Pan from the submenu A pan envelope appears on the bus track 4 Drag the envelope down to 100 right 5 Use the multipurpose slider on the track to which you want to apply the effect to make three changes e Pan the track 100 left e Set the assignable effect send to approximately the same volume as the track e Set the assignable effect send to Pre Volume Preview the effect The dry signal is panned to the left and the wet signal with the chorus or reverb effect is panned to the right Pan the track hard left match the assignable effect and set the assignable effect send to send level to the track volume Pre Volume e 34Bas02 Ele OT e 3 4Bass03 AFO O EE hy EJ Par 100 L fs FRI 7 5 08 S HI H Wok 7 5 dB Par 100 Z L e Post Volume Playing double time half time You can also pro
155. ckground I i A e Default Background s Black Background ee white Background External Monitor Display Square Pixels Display at Media Size Show Toolbar Show Status Bar Status bar ideo 320x240 15 00 fps Display Copying a frame to the clipboard The Copy Frame toolbar button in the Video window allows you to copy the current frame to the Windows clipboard Using toolbar buttons The toolbar allows you to access two commonly used functions of the Video window Button Description E Copy Frame Copies the current frame to the Windows clipboard ext Monitor Sends the preview to an external monitor This feature is available only in ACID Pro software Using the shortcut menu Right click anywhere in the Video window to display a shortcut menu with Video window options Item Description Copy Frame Copies the current frame to the Windows clipboard Default Background Sets the background color of the Video window to the default color Black Background Sets the background color of the Video window to black White Background Sets the background color of the Video window to white External Monitor Sends the preview to an external monitor Display Square Pixels Compensates for any spatial distortions due to non square pixel aspect ratios Display at Media Size Displays video at the native resolution clipping if necessary Show Toolbar Toggles the display of the Video window toolbar Sho
156. clude the center channel and drag the Center fader to apply a gain to the center channel Applying a gain to the center channel may make dialogue more present in the mix SEEN 4 Note When automating panning using keyframes you cannot automate the gain applied using the Center fader For more information see Automating panning on page 214 Ee Drag the Smoothness slider to adjust the smoothness of the interpolation path between panning keyframes The smoothness setting appears only when you are automating panning using keyframes For more information see Adjusting the Smoothness slider on page 216 Moving the pan point You have a variety of methods to help you position the pan point in the Surround Panner window Method Description Click to toggle through three options for constraining pan point motion as you drag Move Freely Move Left Right Only 5j and Move Front Back Only 7 Double click Double clicking the pan point resets it to the center front of the surround panner Double clicking in the Surround Panner window moves the pan point to the double click location Ctrl drag Makes fine adjustments Shift drag Constrains motion to vertical horizontal or diagonal motion at 45 degree increments Alt drag Constrains motion to a constant radius from the center of the surround panner Shift Alt drag Constrains motion to the maximally inscribed circle a constant radius at the greatest possible di
157. cting individual instruments from a particular section of a song For example you may want to copy all percussion events from a song s bridge and re use them in the coda 1 Click the Time Selection Tool button 4E or choose Editing Tool from the Edit menu and choose Time Selection from the submenu The pointer displays with an adjacent cursor ST 2 Drag the mouse in the track view The selection area is highlighted on the track view 3 Release the mouse button A selection is created and all events within it are selected 4 Hold and click any event that extends beyond the time selection The entire event appears highlighted however only the section of the event contained within the time selection is actually selected a A Tip You can select additional events within the time selection by continuing to hold while clicking events In addition holding allows you to select the events of multiple adjacent tracks within a selection a Working with tracks A new track is automatically created for each media file added to a project and all events placed on the track derive from that file Because of this you can use track level functions to affect every event on the track The following sections explain several basic track functions and features Reordering tracks When building an ACID project you may want to reorder the tracks to place similar instruments in proximity to one another For example placing all drum loops together
158. ction inserted with specified increment three times USING THE CHOPPER CHP 6 115 When the increment length is less than the length of the selection the selections are overlapped as you insert them in the track view Increment less than selection Selection overlaps when inserted three times Creating increments 1 Verify that the Link Arrow to Selection button 4 is toggled off and the increment arrow is displayed in black 2 Drag the point of the arrow to configure an increment of the desired length mnn Tip While dragging the increment arrow the Chopper s middle status value temporarily displays the length of the increment eS T Creating increments of a specific musical length The increment shortcut menu like the selection shortcut menu allows you to create increments that correspond to the specified musical length 1 Verify that the Link Arrow to Selection button 4 is toggled off and the increment arrow is displayed in black 2 Right click the increment arrow and choose the desired musical value from the shortcut menu The increment length is automatically configured to the selected value in both the Chopper and the track view Creating increments of a custom musical length 1 Verify that the Link Arrow to Selection button Bl is toggled off and the increment arrow is displayed in black 2 Right click the increment arrow and choose Custom from the shortcut menu The Custom Leng
159. d Right clicking an event in the track view and choosing Select Events to End from the shortcut menu selects every event on the track after the selected event You use this command across multiple tracks by holding to click events on several tracks and then right clicking and choosing Select Events to End from the shortcut menu Selecting events using the Select All command Choosing Select All from the Edit menu selects all events in a project GETTING STARTED CHP 2 a dB Selecting multiple events using the Selection tool You can drag the Selection tool across the track view to select events across multiple tracks This tool allows you to select events using three methods vertical horizontal and free selection Method Description Displays as Vertical Allows you to select all events on all Parallel dashed line spanning the vertical tracks within an interval of time length of the project Horizontal Allows you to select all events on a track Parallel dashed line spanning the or several adjacent tracks horizontal length of the project Free selection Allows you to select a group of adjacent Dashed line box Click the Selection Tool button events on adjacent tracks This is the default selection method or choose Editing Tool from the Edit menu and choose Selection from the submenu 2 Place the pointer on the track view The pointer displays as an arrow with an adjacent dotted box ad Drag the mouse o
160. d for a very long time tone controls distortion boxes wah wah pedals in the analog electrical domain Digital Signal Processors alter the data after it has been digitized by using a combination of programming and mathematical techniques DSP techniques are used to perform many effects such as equalization and reverb simulation Since most DSP is performed with simple arithmetic operations additions and multiplications both your computer s processor and specialized DSP chips can be used to perform any DSP operation The difference is that DSP chips are optimized specifically for mathematical functions while your computer s microprocessor is not This results in a difference in processing speed A set of Application Program Interfaces designed by Microsoft for multimedia development A DirectX plug in such as the Sony Noise Reduction DirectX Plug In uses the DirectX Media Streaming Services DMSS API Because DMSS is a standard API a DirectX plug in can be used in any application that supports DMSS This term is used in the Beatmapper to refer to the first beat of the first measure A DLS file stores a custom sound set that you can load into your soft synth giving you another set of voices for MIDI playback GLOSSARY Drag and Drop Dynamic Range Envelopes Equalization EO Event File Format Frame Rate Frequency Spectrum Groove Hertz Hz In place plug in Insert Increment Insertion Point Loo
161. dB Because the input is 3 dB louder than the threshold and the compression ratio is 3 1 the resulting signal is 1 dB louder than the threshold APPENDIX C e 249 Compression Ratio file size Computer ID Crossfade DC Offset Decibel dB Device Driver Digital Rights Management DRM Digital Signal Processing DSP DirectX Downbeat Downloadable Sound DLS APPENDIX C The ratio of the size of the original noncompressed file to the compressed contents For example a 3 1 compression ratio means that the compressed file is one third the size of the original Each computer has a unique number similar to a license plate Sony creates an activation number based on that number Since the activation number is based on the Computer ID it is important that you have the ACID application installed on the computer where you will be using it The Computer ID is automatically detected and provided to you when you complete the installation process The Computer ID is used for registration purposes only It doesn t give Sony access to any personal information and can t be used for any purpose other than for generating a unique activation number for you to use the software Mixing two pieces of audio by fading one out as the other fades in DC offset occurs when hardware such as a sound card adds DC current to a recorded audio signal This current results in a recorded wave that is not centered around the zero baseli
162. dio CD Time Displays the time ruler in tt mm ss ff track number minutes seconds frames with a frame rate of 75 fps Using the ruler offset The ruler offset allows you to change the project ruler to start at a specific time Typically this feature is used in conjunction with SMPTE and MIDI projects when their timelines are the main reference Basically the ruler offset allows you to set the ACID time ruler based on another project s timeline for reference purposes i e the SMPTE or MIDI timelines When you enter a new value along the timeline the ruler s time units are adjusted at the cursor position and at the start of the timeline For example if the cursor is positioned at the 2 00 minute mark and you enter 15 00 minutes the start of the project will begin at 13 00 minutes The ruler offset feature works the same for all time formats APPENDIX A CUSTOMIZING ACID SOFTWARE 33 E _ __ gt 1 Position the cursor anywhere along the timeline 2 Right click the time ruler to display a shortcut menu 3 From the shortcut menu choose Set Time at Cursor A box opens at the cursor position ar TTT A 00 00 45 4 Enter a time value 5 Press to set the cursor position s time value The value that you enter at the cursor position affects all time values that precede and follow it Using the project grid The project grid appears on the track view and is mainly used to align the events in your project The grid di
163. down list WORKING WITH MIDI CHP 10 e 193 3 If you will input MIDI from an external device choose a device from the Input drop down list _ 4 Note You must make a MIDI port available as an input device in the Preferences dialog in order to use it for step recording o Y 4 Choose the total duration from the start of one note to the start of the next from the Step size drop down list 5 Choose the length of an individual note from the Duration drop down list e JJ AA Note When you choose a duration longer than the step size the note is overlapped with the note in the next step NE 6 Input the MIDI using an external device or specify settings for each note you want to record e In the Start time box enter the point at which you want to start recording e Select the Auto advance on insert and record check box if you want to automatically increase the Start time setting by the current step size each time you click Insert or play a note on a MIDI input device Clear the check box to adjust the Start time manually when creating chords for example e In the Channel box enter the MIDI channel you want to play the note e In the Note box enter the note you want to play You can enter the note as a numeric value 69 or as a pitch A5 e In the On velocity box specify the speed of the note s attack 0 127 Low values produce a soft attack high values produce a strong attack
164. duce interesting effects by misinforming ACID software regarding the number of beats in a file Configuring a file with half its actual number of beats results in double time playback This is an easy way to add speed metal drum tracks to your project This technique is also useful for adding a kick drum on every beat to producing a heavy dance foundation Conversely configuring a file with twice its actual number of beats results in half time playback 1 Right click the desired track in the track list and choose Properties from the shortcut menu The Track Properties window appears 2 Click the Stretch tab 3 Change the value in the Number of beats box APPENDIX B ACID TIPS AND TRICKS 240 7 Constructing the wall of sound As mentioned previously it is sometimes preferable to color and thicken mixes without resorting to effects and other digital processing Working without the benefit of multitrack recording music producer Phil Spector colored his songs by having several instruments play slightly different parts For example he might have an acoustic bass an electric bass and a piano play slight variations on the same basic riffs These variations along with the different timbre of the actual instruments produced a dense sonic mass that became known as The Wall of Sound e To add this aural density to your projects experiment with using two three or even four tracks of similar instrumentation e Alter the pitch of specific tr
165. e but the event moves in the direction you drag EDITING EVENTS Original loop event Slipping the event two measures to the right Slip trimming the event two measures to the right Sliding the event two measures to the right CHP 3 l 7 B Shifting the contents of slipping events Hold Att while dragging an event The slip cursor appears As you drag the event the contents of the event shift but the event does not move You can use this technique when you want to maintain an event s length and position but want the to event play a different section of the source media file For creative ways to use event slipping see Duplicating with offset on page 238 Slip trimming events Hold Alt while dragging the right or left edge of an event The slip trim cursor appears As you drag the event edge the media moves with the event edge Sliding events Hold while dragging an event The slide cursor appears As you drag the relative position of the media remains fixed on the track and the event position changes You can use this technique when you want to maintain an event s length but want the event to play a different section of the source media file at a different point in your project Changing event properties To access event properties right click the event and choose Properties from the shortcut menu or simply double click the event These properties are saved in the project but are not saved int
166. e Copy from the Edit menu e Right click the track header and choose Copy Track from the shortcut menu e Press C Cutting a track removes it from the track view and places it on the clipboard To cut a track select it and do one of the following e Click the Cut button 4 on the toolbar e Choose Cut from the Edit menu e Right click the track header and choose Cut Track from the shortcut menu o Press X Tracks that are copied or cut to the clipboard can be pasted back into the current project or into a different project an unlimited number of times This is a useful way to share tracks between different compositions You can paste a track in one of the following ways e Click the Paste button B on the toolbar e Choose Paste from the Edit menu e Right click the track view and choose Paste Track from the shortcut menu o Press V Adjusting the mix Use the multipurpose slider to adjust the mix of a specific track ZERO GRAMIT El ae CT e Vat 13 0 8 ES Vol 13 0 de Pan Center Fx 1 Inf Bus 4 InF Bus B Inf Click the slider label to choose what you want to adjust Function Volume Pan E Bus GETTING STARTED Description Controls how loud a track is in the mix A value of O dB means that the track plays with no boost or cut from the software Dragging the fader to the left cuts the volume dragging to the right boosts the volume Controls the position of a trac
167. e Default Center and LFE playback device drop down list choose the appropriate device for the center and LFE surround channels 5 Click OK Overriding the default device routing By setting up the device routing in the Audio tab of the Preferences dialog you have set the defaults for surround routing However you can override the default device routing at any time using the Surround Master bus in the Mixer window 1 In the Mixer window click the Audio Device Selector button on the Surround Master control A menu of surround channels Front L R Rear L R and Center LFE appears 2 In the submenu match a surround pair with the appropriate output 3 Repeat steps one and two to match each surround pair to the appropriate output CHP 12 WORKING WITH 5 1 SURROUND 210 r Assigning audio to the LFE channel Once the project is in 5 1 surround mode you must decide whether a track will provide the 5 surround panning or the 1 LFE channel in 5 1 surround Initially all tracks in a surround project are set to provide surround panning but you can assign a track to the LFE channel instead You can assign an individual track to the LFE channel or you can route the track to a mixer control bus soft synth or assignable effect chain and assign the mixer control to the LEE channel To assign audio to the LFE channel right click the surround panner on the track header or mixer control and choose LFE Only from the shor
168. e as a ReWire mixer ACID software can act as a Re Wire mixer application After you enable a ReWire panel application to work within the software you can insert it as a soft synth control in the mixer and the soft synth bus connects ACID software and the ReWire device and carries the data back and forth between them The applications share timeline and cursor position data ACID software can mix or apply effects to your panel application s audio data output and then record the data S_ cs Note The ReWire panel application data will not be included in playback or rendering if the panel application is not open eee Locating ReWire panel applications for use in ACID software If you have ReWire panel applications installed on your PC you can select them for use as soft synth controls 1 From the Options menu choose Preferences The Preferences dialog appears 2 Click the ReWire Devices tab All installed ReWire panel applications appear in the Select ReWire Device to be available as soft synths box at the bottom of the dialog To choose the ReWire panel application you want to use select its check box 3 Click the OK button Inserting a ReWire panel application as a soft synth 1 Insert a ReWire panel application as a soft synth on the mixer just as you would a DLS or VSTi soft synth For more information see Adding soft synth controls to projects on page 154 2 The soft synth bus control is added to the Mixer window us
169. e default settings APPENDIX A CUSTOMIZING ACID SOFTWARE 23 E j Using the Editing tab This tab is available only in ACID Pro software Item Description Project tempo range Use the up and down arrows or enter a value in the boxes to specify the minimum and maximum tempo available in the ACID project Changing this option affects the resolution of the Project Tempo slider Editing Application X Enter the name of each editor you want to display in the track list shortcut menu Right click a track in the track list and choose Edit in editor name to edit the media file associated with a track You can specify any editing tool you want to use however this feature was designed for use with destructive audio MIDI editors Browse Click Browse and select the exe file for each editor you want to have available in the track list shortcut menu Name Enter the name that you want to use to identify each editor The name is displayed in the track list shortcut menu and the Tools menu Clear Removes the specified editor from the Editing tab Check for latest versions of Sony When you select this check box the software automatically searches for the latest editors available Sony editors on your computer If one is located it appears as an available editor in the Editing Application X box Default All Restores all editing preferences to the default settings Using the Sync tab This tab is available only in ACID Pro software Setting
170. e number is appended to identify it Recorded audio is saved as a WAV file and saves MIDI as a MID file Record folder This box displays the path to the folder where recorded files are stored If you want to specify an alternate location click Browse and specify the new folder Free space This value indicates the amount of available free space in the current record folder Time recorded This value provides you with a running summary of the length and size in megabytes of the audio currently being recorded Record from By default recording begins at the cursor position when you click the Record button However you can use the Record from radio buttons to specify an alternate starting point for recording e Selecting the Start of project radio button configures recording to start at the beginning of the current project e Selecting the Position radio button allows you to enter the recording start position in measures and beats format Metronome Select the Metronome check box if you want to record using the metronome Drag the Metronome fader to set the volume of the metronome adjusting the Metronome fader also adjusts the Preview fader in the Mixer RECORDING IN ACID SOFTWARE CHP 9 L 171 Make new track follow project tempo Selecting this check box configures the software to use its stretching features to expand contract your recording in relation to the project tempo However if you are recording your audio
171. e results If you apply a tag to the files found by a complex search you can return to those files easily by searching on the tag The Media Manager tool can search for tags more quickly than it can perform keyword or advanced searches EN Searching using a keyword 1 Select the Quick text search check box in the Search pane and type a keyword or keywords in the edit box o Tip You can separate search terms using quotation marks and other operators If quotes or wildcard characters are not applied an is automatically added before and after each search term R 2 Press Enter The Media Manager tool searches your media files and displays the results in the Search Results pane on the right side of the window Any file that contains your keywords in the file name or attributes is displayed tags are not searched as keywords Your search terms are displayed in the yellow bar below the Search Results toolbar E ETT e Match al 9 OoO r a Guitar tag and E B oaa Mame Clear a Search terms Rating Keyword ef EBow cy pb p A Ebow Vibration 01 wav E Ebow Vibration 02 way Guitar TL O Audio E Ebow Vibration 03 waw Guitar 1 E Ebow Vibration 04 wav Guitar E Ebow Vibration UR wav Guitar E Ebow Vibration 06 waw Guitar i A Ebow vibration OF waw Guitar Search results ve R iy Drum Loops E Ebow Vibration 08 wav Guitar Y P 7 Drum One Shots A Ebow vibration 09 wav Gu
172. e shot events that will be evenly spaced on the grid lines 1 Click the Paint Tool button or choose Editing Tool from the Edit menu and choose Paint from the submenu The mouse pointer displays as a brush icon 2 Click and hold the mouse button while dragging the Paint tool randomly across the several tracks Notice that events are painted in every grid space the Paint tool contacts 3 Release the mouse button to stop adding events 4 Click the Play from Start button gt on the transport bar All new events play back E _ _ _ _ ___ K K lt Tip With the Paint tool selected you can use Ctrl click to paint an entire event for one shot Beatmapped and MIDI tracks ES S _jVQ nVQaaaaaaaoaa _7 Inserting events at the play cursor This feature is available only in ACID Pro and ACID Music Studio software You can also insert events at the cursor during playback You can use this feature to create rhythms on one shot tracks while listening to the track you re editing in the context of the rest of your project When you re done creating events you can use the Render to New Track command on the Edit menu to save the rhythm to a new track or you can copy and paste your new events across the timeline Create a time selection in the portion of the project you want to edit Select the Loop Playback button 6 Click the Play button to start playback Click a track header in
173. e text window defined by an HTML layout page Displays the entered text in the headline window defined by an HTML layout file Displays the entered text on the player s title bar Note When rendering Windows Media files title information is based on the settings on the Summary tab of the ACID Project Properties dialog or the Index Summary tab of the Custom Template dialog The summary information from the Project Properties dialog will be used if information has been specified in both places To view this information during playback choose Now Playing Options from the Windows Media Player View menu and select the items you want to display Displays the entered text author s name when a user selects About this Presentation from the RealPlayer shortcut menu or Properties from the Windows Media shortcut menu Note When rendering Windows Media files author information is based on the settings on the Summary tab of the ACID Project Properties dialog or the Index Summary tab of the Custom Template dialog The summary information from the Project Properties dialog will be used if information has been specified in both places To view this information during playback choose Now Playing Options from the Windows Media Player View menu and select the items you want to display Displays the entered copyright information when a user selects About this Presentation from the RealPlayer shortcut menu or Properties from the Windows Media shortcut me
174. e that can be placed into tracks as events Available only in ACID Pro and ACID Music Studio software Allows you to work with busses assignable effect chains and soft synth controls Displays a project s video output at the current cursor position in the timeline Available only in ACID Pro and ACID Music Studio software Displays the Media Manager M which you can use to search for manage and tag your media files Available only in ACID Pro software Displays the ACID FX chain for the selected track Available only in ACID Music Studio software Allows you to view and edit track attributes For MIDI tracks allows you to edit MIDI using the piano roll editor list editor or other OPT plug ins Third party OPT plug in support is available only in ACID Pro software Allows you to control panning in a 5 1 surround project Available only in ACID Pro software Allows you to change the attributes of soft synth controls in the Mixer window Allows you to view and edit settings for assignable bus soft synth and track effect chains Available only in ACID Pro software Allows you to view and choose effects plug ins to be added to a track bus or assignable effects chain Available only in ACID Pro software Allows you to view and edit grooves in your project Available only in ACID Pro software CUSTOMIZING ACID SOFTWARE 220 n Docking and floating ACID windows The window docking area allows you to keep frequently used windows
175. ected file and a link you can use to purchase the media Using the Sony Sound Series Loops amp Samples reference library If you have the Sony Sound Series Loops amp Samples reference library loaded when you search your computer for media media from existing Sony Loops and Samples or Loops for ACID collections will inherit tags and custom properties from the reference library The Sony Sound Series Loops amp Samples reference library is not installed by default but you can install it from the ACID CD or download it from the Sony Media Software Web site http mediasoftware sonypictures com reference After installing the library go to the Media Manager Options dialog click the Media Library Actions button 7 and choose Options from the menu and choose the reference library from the Reference library drop down list CHP 4 USING THE MEDIA MANAGER 88y Searching for media files You can use the Media Manager tool to search the current media library for media files using keywords or tags r I I Tips You can use the Search Results Limit box in the Media Manager Options dialog to determine the maximum number of media files you d like to have returned in the results of your searches Increasing the Search Results Limit setting increases the amount of time required to search a library and can significantly decrease performance if set excessively high When performing complex searches consider creating temporary tags to classify th
176. ed above the selected button on the Current toolbar buttons pane Available toolbar buttons Move Up _Move Up Move Down gt Play P Paste 4 Tip You may also double click a button in the Available toolbar buttons pane to add it to the toolbar 5 Click Close to save the toolbar settings and close the dialog Removing buttons from the toolbar You may remove buttons and separators from the toolbar If you have added buttons to the toolbar removing unused or unwanted buttons allows you to maximize the toolbar s space You may remove toolbar buttons either directly on the workspace or via the Customize Toolbar dialog Removing buttons on the ACID workspace 1 Hold and drag the button that you want to remove off the toolbar A hand icon mi within an outline of the button indicates that you are removing the button 2 Release the mouse to remove the button CUSTOMIZING ACID SOFTWARE APPENDIX A n MMMM Removing buttons in the Customize Toolbar dialog You may return the toolbar to its default settings by clicking the Reset button on this dialog 1 From the Options menu choose Customize Toolbar The Customize Toolbar dialog appears 2 On the Current toolbar buttons pane select the button that you want to remove 3 Click Remove The button is removed from the Current toolbar buttons pane and will not appear on the toolbar mnn Tip You may also double click a button to remove it E
177. ed your envelope and set your envelope points you may hide the envelope Hiding an envelope does not affect the envelope point settings or track playback Hiding volume pan bus or assignable effect envelopes This feature is available only in ACID Pro software 1 Select the track s whose envelope s you want to hide 2 From the View menu choose Show Envelopes A submenu appears A check mark next to an envelope type indicates that it is visible in the track view 3 From the submenu choose the type of envelope you want to hide The specified envelope type no longer appears in the track view for the selected track You can use the same steps to display the envelope again 4 Tip Select a track and press V to hide a volume envelope or P to hide a panning envelope Press the key again to display the envelope SS eee Hiding effect automation envelopes on a track To hide effect parameter envelopes click the arrow adjacent to the Track FX button and choose Hide All FX Automation Envelopes from the menu To display envelopes again click the arrow adjacent to the Track FX button and choose Show All FX Automation Envelopes from the menu mnn Tip Press E to toggle through the display of all effect parameter automation envelopes Te Ra Removing track envelopes This feature is available only in ACID Pro and ACID Music Studio software You can remove envelopes from tracks quickly and easily _
178. edia Manager Options e e eee eee eee ees 94 Working in the Track View e e 0c eect eee 97 Using project markers and regions e e e eee eee eee eee ees 97 Working with standard markers 0 00 eee eee eee 97 Working with tme Manners 3 222 sate A AA A ehawsanden 99 Working with command markers 0000 cee ee eee eee eee eee 99 VVOFKING VITA TEINS steric teat a qe e TTT 102 LISING SHAD DING cier ii ia ii 103 Choosing snapping OPtIONS occoccccc eee e eens 104 Changing tempo time signature and key 022 ccc eee eee 104 Changing project lele uniera ae hanes 105 Changing project time Signature lt lt ccc eee eee eens 106 Changina Projectkey 6325056250 ri AAA 106 Working with tempo key time signature change markers lt lt e lt a nanunua 106 Changing a racks eV cie daros bla e 108 Changing an events Key asirio dida 108 AG IUSUNG UME rr DNA eR Se See is 108 SSO A ehh eet ehhh eee eee hae eee eee eet eee ete 108 FUNG tO UNG core cute ded IE tae R tet awa a E bea AA TIE AIE e 109 Using the Chopper xx oo e broadband ddr ae die 111 Working in the Chopper window lt lt lt lt eee eens 111 VIEWING The CHODDER ip a at hie do dido dl o ia a o oo o de Lo 111 Changing the Chopper grid sala taa 111 Changing Chopper snapping Options lt lt lt lt e e eee eee ees 111 Macaniying the ChODDer 130 A A eer a eee meee ee 112 Previewing inthe Chopper
179. elect a region right click a region tag and choose Select Region from the shortcut menu The loop bar appears between the region tags and the tracks are highlighted Deleting regions You may remove regions from the project at any time Because regions are automatically numbered when they are placed the existing regions are not renumbered when one is removed Rather the existing regions retain their numbers However if you add regions later numbering begins to fill the sequence gap that exists For example if you have six regions in your project and delete regions four and five the remaining regions are listed as one two three and six When you add regions again the regions are numbered as four and five To remove a region from a project right click the region tag marker and choose Delete from the shortcut menu Using snapping Snapping helps you to align events in your project with other items Event edges are preset to snap to the project s grid lines as you drag an event along the track If snapping is enabled and the Grid Only option is turned off the event s edges automatically align to these designated snap points Cursor position Grid lines Markers Regions start and end points Loop region time selection in and out points You may turn on snapping for these elements in the project or limit snapping to grid lines CHP 5 WORKING IN THE TRACK VIEW 104 Choosing snapping options If the snap function is pr
180. em eumeres es ceuces 204 rimming VidGO even S cuca iii 204 Slipping and sliding video eventS 0c ccc eee eee eee eee eee 204 Using the Video WINdOW ccccocccc eee eens 205 Copying a frame to the clipboard 0 nunnorna annann 205 SING toolbar DULLONS lt A dl 205 Using the shortcut menu ssn ee ee e e e e e A eee eee eee 205 VIEWING the SlatuS Dar isso EA A ones les 206 Previewing on external montors a n nananana e e ees 206 SCONO VISO ips oh ten eee iii dida 206 Working with 5 1 Surround oocccccccocc es 207 What r E SUIfOUNG 054 34 airs 24 ia 207 Setting up surround hardware e eee eee ee eee eee eens 208 Setting up surround projects mermar ds prada ati 208 Routing to hardware in the mixer lt e eee eee 209 Assigning audio to the LFE channel lt lt 000 cece eee eee eens 210 TABLE OF CONTENTS 10 y FUN UE Ts eT e TTT 210 STRIS eR ee 2093 dad dice e AA et aoa 211 Ranning MICECONTOLS ies ets os ies laa 211 Using the Surround Panner WINdOW 0000 eee eee eee eee eee eee eee eeeees 212 Automating paning atada 214 Turning on panning keyframes e lt e lt ee eee eee eee eens 214 Adding panning keyframes e e annn eee eee eee eee eee etna 215 VVOFKing With KeViraMmes ssp ae bbe bee a is 215 Rendering surround projects sssaaa aasar ernn eens 217 BurningAC 3 tiles to DVD cur IRA O 218 Customizing ACID Software 000 cee ee 219 Working with
181. empo sync Period 1 000 E leasures Rate 0 001 to 20 0 Hz 10 00 Depth 1 to 100 10 L Dry out Wek out Inf to 12 dB Inf to 12 dB 2 There are two ways to arrange plug ins in your chain e Drag the plug in to a new location in the chain e Right click the plug in and select Move Left or Move Right from the shortcut menu 3 Click the Close button to close the Audio Plug In window Bypassing plug ins on plug in chains You can bypass a plug in without removing it from the chain by clearing the check box on the plug in Alternately right click the plug in and choose Bypass from the shortcut menu c Graphic EG E aaas Tip To bypass or re enable all plug ins in a chain right click the FX button 44 on the mixer control and choose Bypass All or Enable All ann Removing plug ins from chains You can remove a plug in from a chain at any time 1 Click the FX button 4 on the mixer control The Audio Plug In window appears 2 Right click the plug in and choose Remove from the shortcut menu or click the Remove Selected Plug In button kl 3 Click the Close button BI to close the Audio Plug In window CHP 8 USING THE MIXER 1064 r Removing or bypassing all effects on a mixer control You can clear a mixer control of all effects by right clicking the FX button 44 and choosing Delete All from the shortcut menu You can bypass the effects on a mixer contro
182. encies between the graph and perceived output p Be UU q AAA lt lt Automating panning You can automate panning on a track or mixer control by adding keyframes Keyframes are similar to envelope points in that they mark specific locations in the track where settings change However unlike envelope points keyframes appears just below the track to which they apply To add panning keyframes to a mixer control you must first view the mixer control in track view From the View menu choose Show Bus Tracks to view the bus track at the bottom of the track view For more information see Viewing bus tracks on page 165 Turning on panning keyframes Before adding individual keyframes you must first turn on the panning keyframes for the track or bus track 1 Select the track or bus track for which you want to automate panning 2 From the Insert menu choose Envelopes and choose Surround Pan Keyframes from the submenu An additional row appears below the track with a single keyframe positioned at the beginning of the project This single keyframe represents the current panning settings for the track WORKING WITH 5 1 SURROUND CHP 12 215 ara Dialog Ake QI VOL 120dB 0 Keyframe Adding panning keyframes With panning keyframes turned on you can add keyframes at any location along the track or bus track 1 Position the cursor where you want to begin panning the track 2 Double click the surround panner to displ
183. ens when you slip and slide events think of an event as a window to a media file The window can display the entire media file or a small section When the window displays only a portion of the media file you can move either the window or the underlying media to adjust the media played by an event e When you slip an event your event maintains its place on the timeline but the media file moves in the direction you drag e When you slide an event the media file maintains its place on the timeline but the event moves in the direction you drag Shifting the contents of video events slipping Hold Att while dragging the video event to move the position of the video within the event The event itself does not move Slip trimming video events Hold Att while dragging the beginning or end of a video event The video moves with the event edge and the opposite edge of the event remains fixed Sliding video events Hold 4 while dragging the video event to move the event while leaving the video in place The relative position of the video changes as when you slip an event WORKING WITH VIDEO CHP 11 2005 Using the Video window The Video window is used to view the video as it plays or to view the frame at the cursor position To display the Video window choose Video from the View menu or press Alt 4 Yideo Preview J icefield EG Copy Frame Jest Monitor Toolbar buttons e O Copy Frame Shortcut menu Ba
184. epresent the amount a track is being stretched to match the project tempo The mark in the center of the bar represents the original tempo of a file When the bar appears to the right of the mark the project tempo is faster than the original file when the bar appears to the left of the mark the project tempo is slower than the original file The amount of change also displays as a percentage at the right end of the bar As you drag the slider a colored bar appears for each track Synth Pad 01 Project tempo is slower than file tempo PA a A ACID PRO 5 PROM Sl re S Project tempo is faster than file tempo ERE ACID LATIN sPROM Ee ZERO GRAVITY BE 114 174 4 x 7 A Project Tempo slider Changing project tempo to match file tempo Each track s shortcut menu contains the option Use Original Tempo The original tempo of the file used on the track appears to the right of this option in the shortcut menu To change the project s tempo to match the original file tempo simply choose Use Original Tempo from the shortcut menu CHP 5 WORKING IN THE TRACK VIEW 106 r Changing project time signature Click the Project Time Signature control and select a time signature from the menu to adjust a project s time signature Select Other from the menu to enter a custom time signature Changing project key Click the Project Key control and select a key from the menu to adjust a project s key 107 61
185. er level You can select multiple nonadjacent controls by holding the key while clicking each control s name You can select multiple adjacent controls by clicking the first control and holding the key while clicking the last control in the range a Note You cannot group the Preview fader in this manner with other mixer controls I oe Automating mixer controls in track view This feature is available only in ACID Pro and ACID Music Studio software You can automate bus assignable effect and soft synth controls in track view You can view each of these controls on tracks at the bottom of track view and to add envelopes to automate functions such as volume pan and assignable effect chain input output levels You can also add envelopes to automate effect parameters for plug ins that support automation For more information see Adding effect automation envelopes on page 125 For creative ways to use bus automation see Fading in and out of mixes on page 240 Viewing bus tracks From the View menu choose Show Bus Tracks or press U The bus tracks appear at the bottom of the track view A bus track appears for each mixer control in your project Adding track envelopes Right click the track header in the track list choose Insert Remove Envelope from the shortcut menu and choose the appropriate envelope type from the submenu You can identify which mixer controls have envelopes by looking at each control s letter or number
186. ere the cursor is not visible There are two ways to move the cursor directly to the selected marker e Right click the marker and choose Go To from the shortcut menu e Click the marker once e Press the number key not on the numeric keypad corresponding to the marker number _ s Tip You may also navigate from one marker to the next by pressing Ctrl left right arrow key Ss 38 Adjusting tempo to match cursor to marker Position the cursor right click the marker tab and choose Adjust tempo to match cursor to marker from the shortcut menu The project tempo changes so that the cursor position matches the selected marker Deleting markers You may remove markers from the project at any time Because markers are automatically numbered up to 99 when they are placed the remaining markers are not renumbered when one is deleted Rather the remaining markers retain their numbers However if you add markers later numbering begins to fill the sequence gap For example if you have five markers in your project and delete markers three and four the remaining markers are listed as one two and five When you add markers again the markers are numbered as three and four 1 Place the mouse pointer on the marker to be deleted The hand cursor dm appears 2 Right click the marker and choose Delete from the shortcut menu The marker is removed from the project WORKING IN THE
187. ering projects CHP 2 Though you are provided with the tools to quickly build impressive musical projects you may find yourself building elaborate projects over a period of weeks or even months While you are working on a project you should save it in the ACID native format the ACID project file acd ee gt Important If you save a project originally created in an earlier version of ACID software in ACID version 5 0 it will be unusable in earlier versions of the software Use the Save As dialog to save the project with a new name after editing it in version 5 0 EO E When you are finished building a project you can render projects in a variety of formats You should determine the project s final format or formats based on how you will deliver the media For example you would render your project to a streaming media format if you plan to publish it to the Internet e 9 95959 amp 4 Note Be aware that projects containing MIDI files that are routed to external MIDI ports must be rerouted to internal DLS sets or VST instruments VSTi to be included in the rendered mix For more information see Rendering projects with MIDI tracks on page 197 lt lt lt lt GETTING STARTED EE r Saving projects An ACID project file acd is the default file format for saving a new project and should be used for saving unfinished projects There are two ACID project file types Format Extension Descriptio
188. ermine when full frame timecode messages are sent while Generate MIDI Timecode is active Full frame messages are used by some external synchronizable audio devices to seek to a proper location prior to actually starting synchronization Tape based recorders especially benefit from seeking to full frame messages because of the time it takes to move the transport to the proper location However full frame messages are ignored by some devices and may actually cause unexpected behavior in other devices Refer to your hardware documentation to find out if your hardware supports full frame messages Select this check box if you want a Start command rather than a Continue command to be sent when Generate MIDI Clock is activated When the check box is cleared a Continue command is sent as this type of command allows the chasing device to start from a specific time However some older sequencers that support MIDI Clock chase do not support the Continue command and must start playback from the beginning every time Select a radio button to determine when Song Position Pointer messages are sent while Generate MIDI Clock is active Song Position Pointer messages are used by MIDI applications and devices to seek to a proper location prior to starting synchronization CUSTOMIZING ACID SOFTWARE 234 Using the Keyboard tab This tab is available only in ACID Pro software From the Options menu choose Preferences and select the Keyboard tab
189. es that have not been used in your project Removing a groove from your project 1 Select a groove in the Groove Pool window 2 Click the Remove Selected Grooves from Project button X The selected groove is removed from your project If the groove is in use a confirmation will be displayed if the Confirm groove deletion when still in use check box is selected on the General tab of the Preferences dialog Creating grooves You can add grooves to your project by using an existing track duplicating existing grooves importing erooves or by creating an entirely new groove from scratch Using Groove Cloning to create a new groove using a track in your project ACID software can analyze a track s audio to extract its groove so you can apply its feel to other tracks eee ee Note Groove cloning can extract grooves from loop tracks only eee ps 1 Right click a track header in the track list 2 Choose Add to Groove Poo from the shortcut menu A new groove will be added to the Groove Pool window using the name of the track you selected in step I WORKING WITH TRACKS CHP 7 N CHP 7 Note Grooves that you create from existing tracks will be available only in the project where they were created If you want to make a groove available to other projects export it to a groove file SS eC CO T S __ _ _t Tip You can also click the Add to Groove Pool button S in the Track Properties window to add a
190. etting to be used whenever you add a DLS soft synth click the Set as default DLS Voice Set button If the default voice set is unavailable the Windows GS sound set will be used ps ae CHP 8 USING THE MIXER A r Changing patches Tor DLS soft synth controls The DLS soft synth Available voices pane displays the patch names numbers and other parameters of the voices included in the DLS set You can choose a patch to play until the software receives a patch change from the MIDI file ey Tip You can make ACID software ignore patch changes during playback by clicking the Playback Filter button in the General tab of the Track Properties window and choosing the Patch Change check box in the MIDI Event Filter dialog For more information see Filtering MIDI events during playback on page 178 _ _ _ _ 1 Choose a channel from the Channel drop down list 2 Choose a patch in the Available voices pane This patch is used until you choose another or until a patch change is received from the MIDI file _ _ 4 Tip You can create patch change events in the list editor in order to change patches within MIDI files For more information see Creating events on page 192 pnns T Previewing a DLS soft synth in the Soft Synth Properties window When you re using a DLS soft synth a keyboard is displayed at the bottom of the Soft Synth Properties dialog so you can play the synth with your mouse
191. evel sample in the file reaches a user defined level Use normalization to make sure you are using all of the dynamic range available to you The Nyquist Frequency or Nyquist Rate is one half of the sample rate and represents the highest frequency that can be recorded using the sample rate without aliasing For example the Nyquist Frequency of 44 100 Hz is 22 050 Hz Any frequencies higher than 22 050 Hz produce aliasing distortion in the sample if no anti aliasing filter is used while recording A media file that cannot be located on the computer If you choose to leave the media offline you can continue to edit events on the track the events point to the original location of the source media file One shots are chunks of audio that are not designed to loop and they are streamed from the hard disk rather than stored in RAM if they are longer than three seconds Things such as cymbal crashes and sound bites could be considered one shots Unlike loops one shots do not change pitch or tempo with the rest of a project A plug in that uses the Open Plug in Technology OPT standard from Yamaha OPT plug ins provide tools for working with MIDI such as edit views effect processors and filters arpeggiators and real time panel automation To place a mono or stereo sound source perceptually between two or more speakers GLOSSARY Peak Data File Proxy File Pulse Code Modulation PCM Quantization Real Time Streaming Protocol
192. eventing you from placing an event precisely where you want it you may turn snapping off Turning off snapping prevents events from automatically aligning to the cursor grid lines markers regions and time selections The Options menu allows you to toggle snap functions The button image next to the Enable command indicates when snapping is turned on The button image next to the Grid Only command indicates the type of snapping in use Options Demma o p Enable EB Select to turn all snapping on off Grid spadna C Plage RES Select to toggle between snapping to grid lines only and snapping to all elements a _ _ __ K K K Tip You can temporarily suspend snapping while dragging by holding down the key _ V oaaaooo oqo u 2u Turning snapping on and off You may turn snapping on and off in one of the following ways e Click the Enable Snapping button 8 on the Toolbar e From the Options menu choose Snapping and choose Enable from the submenu e Press F8 Snapping to grid lines With snapping turned on you may choose to snap only to grid lines From the Options menu choose Snapping and choose Grid Only from the submenu The button image next to the command indicates that it is active Snapping to all elements With snapping turned on you may choose to snap to all elements From the Options menu choose Snapping and choose Grid Only from the submenu The button image ne
193. events in reference to the musical time of bars and beats This ruler is fixed and does not update when you change the tempo This allows the events in the tracks to maintain their size when you adjust the tempo Time ruler The time ruler provides a timeline for your project This ruler can show real time in many different formats For more information see Changing the time ruler format on page 221 The ruler changes with tempo since the number of beats and beats per second of real time changes with tempo Transport bar The transport bar contains the playback and cursor positioning buttons frequently used while working on your project Record new track Pause resume project playback O a 6 Loop playback 8 Stop playback R Ie Play from beginning of project Move cursor to start of project gt Play project from cursor position N Move cursor to end of project The software also includes keyboard shortcuts for these playback commands For more information see Playback commands on page 26 Zoom controls To the right of the horizontal scroll bar are the time zoom controls Clicking the Zoom In Time button increases the horizontal magnification of the project To decrease the level of magnification click the Zoom Out Time button Directly below the vertical scroll bar are the dedicated track height zoom controls Clicking the Zoom In Track Height button increases the vertical magnification of the project To decrea
194. exception to this standard is a continuous recording such as a live concert CD For a continuous recording you can omit the pauses after tracks for continuous playback You can manually insert silence between your audio files to create a pause _ 4 Note The Red Book specification also requires a two second pause at the beginning of an audio CD This pause is automatically added when you burn your CD OE Position your audio files on the timeline in the order in which you want them to play on your CD Position the cursor where you want to insert the pause between files 1 2 3 From the Insert menu choose Time The Insert Time dialog appears 4 Enter two seconds in the Amount of time to insert box 5 Click OK Two seconds are inserted in the timeline at the cursor position Inserting CD track markers You can use CD track markers in your project to indicate to the CD R device where to mark the beginning and ending of a track during the writing process A Red Book CD can contain up to 99 tracks 1 Position your audio files and add pauses between them as necessary For more information see Adding pauses on page 62 2 Position the cursor at the start of an audio file 3 From the Insert menu choose CD Track Marker The marker appears in the marker bar and is automatically numbered a 4 Important You must place your first CD track marker at the beginning of your project Audio placed before the first mar
195. files When you select this check box a box appears so you can name markers and regions as you place them When you select this check box a backup of project files is made when you open them Backup files are stored in the same folder as your project and use the same file name with the extension acd bak You can use backup project files to revert to a project s previous state Select the check box if you want to maintain the pitch of Beatmapped tracks when the project tempo changes Select the check box if you want to start the Beatmapper Wizard when you add a file that is longer than 30 seconds to your project Select this check box if you want to update the ACID audio engine more slowly Selecting this option can prevent unwanted artifacts during timeline editing Select this check box to create a temporary project file that can aid in crash recovery Your project information is autosaved every five minutes without overwriting your project file Select this check box if you want to use ASPI Advanced SCSI Programming Interface when burning and extracting CDs ASPI enables host adapters and device drivers to share a single SCSI hardware interface Select this check box if you want to use SPTI SCSI Pass Through Interface to communicate with your CD burning drive Select this check box if you want file names to be automatically assigned to tracks that you extract from CDs File names include the CD s ID number and track number
196. ft the pitch of the track to adjust for increases or decreases in tempo Using this option you can eliminate some of the problems that occur with extreme tempo changes just create new sounds from existing loops For example if you have slowed the project tempo down and hear echo artifacts choosing Pitch shift segments can eliminate these artifacts Choose Fixed segments for material such as drum loops where silence exists between notes Instead of crossfading the segments silence is added between beats to reduce warbling or other artifacts You can adjust stretching properties creatively For more information see Overriding compress expand on page 243 Available only in ACID Pro software Type a value in the box or use the spinner control to adjust the sensitivity for beat detection Higher settings increase sensitivity and lower settings decrease sensitivity When you set the control to 100 beat markers P stretch markers h or b and beat anchors y are created for every transient As you decrease the setting markers are created for only strong transients Increasing this setting can be advantageous when working with audio that has complex rhythms Lower settings are more suitable for synthesizer pads and other basic material Available only in ACID Pro software Choose a setting from the drop down list to specify the resolution for beat anchors y Available only in ACID Pro software Choose a setting from the drop down l
197. g a DVD in the AC 3 DVD Burner online help To access online help click Help in the AC 3 DVD Burner screen WORKING WITH 5 1 SURROUND CHP 12 APPENDIX t Y BR o 219 Customizing ACID Software You can customize the software to suit your project needs and working preferences You may change these settings at any time If you use the same settings for all of your projects you may set the ACIDO application to use your settings as defaults In this chapter you will find information about functions that allow you to customize and set the application s preferences Working with ACID windows The software has various windows that allow you to perform specific tasks related to your project or manage your media These windows can float on the workspace or be docked in the window docking area All these windows may be viewed or hidden via the View menu or their respective shortcut keys Window Explorer Chopper Mixer Video Preview Media Manager ACID FX Track Properties Surround Panner Soft Synth Properties Audio Plug In Shortcut keys Description Alt 1 Alt 2 Alt 3 Alt 4 Alt 5 Alt 5 Alt 6 Alt 7 Alt 8 Alt 5 Plug In Manager Ctrl Alt 1 Groove Pool APPENDIX A Ctrl Alt 2 Allows you to view and access your media files without leaving the work area You may also preview media files and place them in your project from this window Allows you to select portions of a media fil
198. g a variety of loops and combine the backing track with a one shot vocal or guitar track that you record mnn Note MIDI recording is available only in ACID Pro and ACID Music Studio software This topic is covered in greater depth in Recording MIDI tracks on page 174 Recording audio If you are familiar with other Sony Media Software applications recording in the ACID application should be fairly intuitive The following procedure briefly outlines the steps involved in recording audio 1 Connect the audio source or MIDI device to your computer 2 For audio recording verify that the card is properly configured for the audio source microphone line level etc 3 Place the cursor in the track view at the position where recording will begin To record multiple takes create a loop region instead For more information see Recording multiple takes on page 172 4 Click the Record button on the transport bar The Record dialog appears 69 4 59 4 Record type TY Audio MIDI a z File name Record Taket sss Record Folder cenac Projects eel j ES Free space 311 0 Megabytes Time recorded 00 00 00 30 Record From f Start of project 36 C Position 11 000 E Metronome M f i 48 IZ Make new track Follow project tempo Beatmapped track Record device microsoft Sound Mapper 9 Ie Monitor Attributes 44 100 Hz 16 Bit Change 5 Set the desired recording properties For more information
199. g multiple events on page 44 2 From the Edit menu choose Join or press J The selected events are joined Select all the events that you want to join You can also select the first and last events you want to join creating an event selection range After you join the events a single event appears Joining events is similar to dragging the edge of an existing event Ripple editing This feature is available only in ACID Pro and ACID Music software ACID software includes a ripple editing feature This feature is a timeline based procedure that allows you to cut delete and paste events or portions of events within a time selection and simultaneously adjust the position of all later events on a selected track The existing events timeline position adjusts by the total amount of the time selection that is being cut deleted or pasted from the clipboard You may turn on ripple editing mode by choosing Ripple Edits from the Options menu or pressing L e _ __ _ _ _ _ JJ J AH Note Ripple editing is only available when a time selection is present Xp Cutting events in ripple editing mode Cutting events or portions of events removes them and their time information from their respective tracks This information is placed on the clipboard from which you may paste the information back into your project 1 From the Options menu choose Ripple Edits to e
200. g the Surround Panner window Whether you re adjusting track panning or mixer control panning you use the same controls in the Surround Panner window View the Surround Panner window by double clicking a surround panner on a track header or mixer control Once the Surround Panner window is open you can dock it in the ACID workspace For more information see Docking and floating ACID windows on page 220 PP _ c __ Tip You can also choose Surround Panner from the View menu to display the Surround Panner window Once the Surround Panner window is displayed double click the surround panner for a track or mixer control to view its pan settings ES jj KEKEK K KN Toggle options for constraining pan point movement Surround Panner ACID PRO 5 sPROMO 08 2 Assign track bus to LFE channel Pan point 1 Muted channel 1 Active included channel Pan type indicator WORKING WITH 5 1 SURROUND CHP 12 21 3 1 2 Click the speaker icons to mute or include channels Mutine a channel ensures that no audio bleeds through a channel For example you might want to mute all but the center channel when you re panning dialogue to the center channel Le _ _ __ K Tip click a speaker icon to solo the channel eS Drag the pan point to position the sound within the sound field For more information see Moving the pan point on page 213 Click the center speaker icon to in
201. g with other less ordinary intervals may produce surprising results When working with non pitched audio intervals do not matter thereby allowing you to freely experiment with radical pitch shifting This technique typically works best when tuning the duplicate track to a lower octave than the original track but you can also experiment with raising the pitch of the duplicate track APPENDIX B ACID TIPS AND TRICKS 238 HA _ _ gt Panning in conjunction with detuning Few things are as uninteresting as a series of tracks panned down the middle of a stereo image Particularly after detuning a paired track you should experiment with spatially positioning the tracks using the panning control on the multipurpose slider or a pan envelope Panning each track to a specific channel produces a nice wide aural effect If you are looking for something a little more dynamic position the original track anywhere in the stereo image and use a pan envelope to sweep the duplicate track from the left channel to the right channel of the mix For more information see Using track envelopes on page 124 Duplicating with offset Another way to add interesting dynamics to a project is to duplicate tracks and add an offset to one of the pair This trick works well with most instrument loops and allows you to create different levels of effect For example e Configuring a slight offset between duplicate tracks creates a natural chorus effect e Configuri
202. h 161 Track 119 123 Envelopes color preferences 234 Envelope tool 128 Event 76 Flipping 127 Mixer controls 165 Track 124 130 Erasing events 42 240 INDEX Events Changing length 42 Changing pitch 108 Copying 65 Crossfading 77 Cutting 67 71 Deleting 68 72 Editing in ripple mode 71 74 Envelopes 76 Erasing 42 Fading edges for offsets 75 Fading in and out 76 Joining 71 Moving 42 Painting 40 Pasting 65 73 Pitch shifting 75 Properties 75 reversing 68 Selecting 43 46 Shifting the contents of 75 Sliding 75 Slipping 75 Slip trimming 75 Snapping 103 Splitting 68 Start offset 75 Trimming 68 Volume 76 Explorer window 35 37 Exporting loops 148 External devices Playing MIDI from 198 Routing busses to 150 Routing MIDI tracks to 196 Routing video to 206 External monitor 206 Extracting media from CD 38 Faders Mixer 54 160 Fading edges of events 75 Fading in out Events 76 Mixer controls 165 Tracks 124 130 Filtering MIDI events During playback 178 In the list editor 187 Fitting to time 109 Flipping envelopes 127 Floating windows 220 HHH Folder tracks 40 146 adding tracks 146 creating 146 editing events 147 muting 146 removing tracks 146 soloing 146 Frame numbering 204 G General preferences tab 227 Getting media from the Web 39 Glossary 247 Go to 43 Grid 222 Groove Pool window 23 H Hardware Playing MID
203. h MIDI Key Frequency CO 0 8 176 G 3 43 97 998 D 7 86 1174 7 C O 1 8 662 G 3 44 103 82 D 7 87 1244 5 DO 2 9 177 A 3 45 110 00 E 7 88 1318 5 D 0 3 9 723 A 3 46 116 54 F 7 89 1396 9 E O 4 10 301 B 3 47 123 47 F 7 90 1480 0 FO 5 10913 C4 48 130 81 G7 91 1568 0 FHO 6 141 562 C 4 49 138859 G 7 92 16612 GO 7 12 250 D 4 50 146 83 i7 93 1760 0 G 0 8 12 978 D 4 5 155 56 A 7 94 1864 7 AO 9 13 750 E 4 52 164 81 B 7 95 1975 5 AHO 10 14 568 F 4 53 174 61 C 8 96 2093 0 BO 11 15434 F 4 54 18499 C 8 97 22175 E 12 16 352 G 4 55 195 99 D 8 98 2349 3 CHI 13 17 324 004 56 207 65 D 8 99 2489 0 Di 14 1834 A4 57 22000 E8 100 26370 D 1 15 19 445 AHA 58 233 08 F 8 101 2793 8 E1 16 20601 B4 59 246 94 F 8 102 2960 0 Fi 17 21826 C5 60 261 63 G 8 103 3136 0 F 1 18 23124 C 5 61 277 18 G 8 104 3322 4 G 1 19 24 499 D 5 62 293 66 A 8 105 3520 0 GET 20 25956 D 5 63 31113 A 8 106 37293 At 21 227500 E5 64 432968 B8 107 3951 1 ARI 22 29 135 F 5 65 349 23 C9 108 4186 0 Bi 23 30867 F 5 66 369 99 C 9 109 4434 9 C2 24 32703 G5 67 391 99 D 9 110 4698 6 C 2 25 34 648 G 5 68 415 31 D 9 111 4978 0 D2 26 36 708 A5 69 440 00 E 9 112 5274 0 D 2 27 388900 MB 70 46616 FQ 113 5587 7 E2 28 41 203 B 5 71 439 88 F 9 114 5919 9 F2 29 43 653 C 6 72 523 25 G 9 115 6271 9 F 2 30 46 249 CH6 73 554 37 G 9 116 6644 9 G2 Bi 48 999 D 6 74 587 33 AQ 117 7040 0 CHP 10 WORKING WITH MIDI 192 z Pitch MIDI Key Frequency Pitch MIDI Key Frequency Pitch MIDI
204. hanging a track s key You can change the key of an entire track without affecting the project s key For creative ways to use track key changes see Detuning paired tracks on page 237 1 Right click the track and choose Properties from the shortcut menu The Track Properties window appears 2 On the General tab enter the number of semitones by which to adjust the key in the Pitch Shift box or use the spinner control Use the minus key for negative values 3 Close the Track Properties window The pitch shift displays in the track s header Pitch shift display lel ZERO GRAVITY BEATS 30 oe Q I lt ol 130d3 Tip Another way to change the key of the track is to select the track in the track list and press or on the numeric keypad ee Changing an event s key You can change the key of an individual event without affecting the pitch of the track or project Right click the event in the track view choose Pitch Shift from the shortcut menu and choose Up Semitone or Down Semitone from the submenu The pitch shifts one ke semitone in the direction specified and the amount of shift displays on the event aT itself You can also change an event s key using keyboard shortcuts For more information see Event editing commands on page 25 Adjusting time Two commands are provided for adjusting your project s timeline Insert Time and Fit to Time Inserting time This feature is available on
205. he marker is positioned on a downbeat click Next Otherwise drag the marker to the appropriate location and click Next The Beatmapper draws the file s waveform and places a region to indicate the length of the first measure ee 4 Tip The Reset button sets the downbeat marker back to its detected position E lt lt K lt K lt K lt A lt K lt A lt gt 4 Click the Play button to verify the measures length e Select the Metronome check box to preview the measure with the assistance of a metronome e Click the Halve Loop Region 75 or Double Loop Region 25 button to change the length of the selection If the Beatmapper misdetects the length of the measure it may be off by either half or double the actual amount e If the region is positioned correctly click Next Otherwise drag the region markers to the appropriate locations and click Next The waveform appears with measure lengths selected 5 Drag the Measure slider to scroll through the song and click the Play button B to verify each measure s length If the song s tempo is consistent the measures are placed correctly If the tempo fluctuates you can drag the end of the measure selection to change the measure s position Changing the measure length affects the entire song if adjusting the last measure of the song causes the first measure to be incorrect the downbeat may not be positioned correctly or the song s tempo may not be consistent enough f
206. he same way you can route a MIDI keyboard to an outboard synthesizer module you can route each MIDI track to any soft synth control you have set up for your project a V Tip If you are using ACID Pro or ACID Music Studio you can also use soft synth controls to play MIDI from an external device For more information see Playing MIDI from external devices on page 198 o ae There are three types of soft synth bus controls you can add DLS Downloadable Sounds VSTi or ReWire devices _ 4 Note ReWire soft synths are available only in ACID Pro software VSTi soft synths are available only in ACID Pro and ACID Music Studio software ae A DLS or VSTi soft synth bus control is like a virtual synthesizer module where you can route tracks In the same way you can route a MIDI keyboard to an outboard synthesizer module you can route each MIDI track to any soft synth you have set up for your project or play a soft synth with an external MIDI controller A ReWire soft synth bus control connects a ReWire device application with ACID software which serves as a ReWire mixer application When ACID software hosts a ReWire device application playback is synchronized between the two programs and the panel application s audio is output through the ACID mixer With ReWire 2 0 panel applications you can also route MIDI tracks to ports synths in the ReWire device applications Use the soft synth bus control in the Mixer wind
207. hing your project to the Internet involves two distinct procedures creating a personal account and uploading the project Creating a personal account You can create accounts at Web sites where you can publish your song files Each Web site that offers publishing directly through ACID software will guide you through its own account creation process If you haven t created an account and you attempt to publish a song you will be directed to complete the Publish Setup utility 1 From the File menu choose Publish The Publish Setup dialog displays 2 Follow the on screen instructions to create an account At any time you can go back and create another account at a different Web site The Web site you are currently logged into in the Publish Setup utility is where your song is published when you choose Publish from the File menu Uploading a project Publishing a project file copies your media to the Web so you can share it with other Web users The following procedure assumes you already have an account set up with a publish provider If not you will first be redirected to set up an account After successfully creating an account you will be directed back to the Publish feature 1 From the File menu choose Publish The Publish Setup dialog displays 2 Log into your publishing account or follow the on screen instructions to create one 3 Select the appropriate radio button to specify whether the song to be published is the current A
208. hortcut menu SV qq Y Muting mixer controls Clicking the Mute button 211 on a mixer control temporarily suspends playback of the control When a mixer control is muted it appears grayed out and the word Muted appears at the bottom of the meter Clicking the Mute button a second time returns the mixer control to normal playback You can also press Z to mute a mixer control or group of controls SE S Tip Press and click the Mute button to mute only the selected mixer control and restore any other muted controls If the selected mixer control is already muted press and click the Mute button to restore all controls ae USING THE MIXER CHP 8 L L 1 61 Soloing mixer controls Clicking the Solo button T on a mixer control isolates playback by muting all other mixer controls For example when you solo a bus all remaining busses assignable effects and soft synths appear grayed out and the word Muted appears at the bottom of their respective meters Clicking the Solo button a second time returns all mixer controls to normal playback You can also press X to solo a mixer control or group of controls Lf Tip Press and click the Solo button to solo only the selected mixer control and restore any other soloed controls If the selected mixer control is already soloed press and click the Solo button to restore all controls _ _ ______ _ _ lt _ V aa J Adding effects to soft s
209. i WAV Waveform Waveform Display Windows Media Format GLOSSARY 254p u Law mu Law is a companded compression algorithm for voice signals defined by the Geneva Recommendations G 711 The G 711 recommendation defines u Law as a method of encoding 16 bit PCM signals into a non linear 8 bit format The algorithm is commonly used in European and Asian telecommunications u Law is very similar to A Law however each uses a slightly different coder and decoder These commands allow you to change a project back to a previous state or reapply changes after you have undone them A software only router for MIDI data between programs The VMR is used to receive MIDI timecode and send MIDI clock No MIDI hardware or cables are required for a VMR so routing can only be performed between programs running on the same PC A Virtual Studio Technology instrument VSTi is software synthesizer plug in technology for outputting MIDI developed by Steinberg Media Technologies AG A digital audio file format developed by Microsoft and IBM One minute of uncompressed audio requires 10 MB of storage A waveform is the visual representation of wave like phenomena such as sound or light For example when the amplitude of sound pressure is graphed over time pressure variations usually form a smooth waveform Each event shows a graph of the sound data waveform The vertical axis corresponds to the amplitude of the wave For 16 b
210. ia RTSP was submitted by a body of companies including RealNetworks and Netscape A metafile that provides information to a media player about streaming media files To start a streaming media presentation a Web page includes a link to a redirector file Linking to a redirector file allows a file to stream if you link to the media file it downloads before playback Windows Media redirector files use the asx or wax extension RealMedia redirector files use the ram rpm or smi extension A region is a section of time used to subdivide your project into segments The process in which the project is saved to a specific file format like WMA or MP3 The act of recalculating samples in a sound file at a different rate than the file was originally recorded If a sample is resampled at a lower rate sample points are removed from the sound file decreasing its size but also decreasing its available frequency range Resampling to a higher sample rate extra sample points are interpolated in the sound file This increases the size of the sound file but does not increase the quality When down sampling one must be aware of aliasing The word sample is used in many different and often confusing ways when talking about digital sound Here are some of the different meanings e A discrete point in time which a sound signal is divided into when digitizing For example an audio CD ROM contains 44 100 samples per second Each sample is really
211. ialog is displayed 3 Choose a drive and folder from the Save in drop down list or use the browse window to locate the folder where you want to save your groove eee lt lt lt lt _ _ rf Note By default grooves will be saved in the folder specified in the Default groove folder box on the Folders tab of the Preferences dialog Grooves in this folder will be available in the Groove Pool window when you create a new ACID project ee 4 Type a name in the File name box or select a file in the browse window to replace an existing groove 5 Click the Save button to save your groove Creating a new groove 1 Click the New Groove button 8 A new groove is added to the Groove Pool window 2 Type a name for your groove in the edit box and then press Enter Use the Groove Editor at the bottom of the Groove Pool window to adjust the length and feel of your eroove For more information about editing grooves please see below Editing grooves You can use the bottom portion of the Groove Pool window to edit grooves Your edits are saved with your project If you want to use the edited groove in other projects you ll need to export it as a groove file and import the edited groove in each project where you want to use it 1 From the View menu choose Groove Pool to display the Groove Pool window 2 Select a groove in the top portion of
212. ick the Add New Track button in the General tab of the Track Properties window to add a new track to the MIDI file Select a track and click the Delete Track button _ to remove a track Renaming tracks 1 In the General tab of the Track Properties window double click a track name and type a new name 2 Press to rename the track Editing channel information channelization 1 In the General tab of the Track Properties window double click the number in the Channel column for a track 2 Type a new channel number in the box 3 Press Enter All MIDI messages are sent to the new channel WORKING WITH MIDI CHP 10 e 177 eS ee Note After you ve edited the channel for a multichannel track channel information cannot be edited in the list editor To revert to the previous channelization and enable channel editing in the list editor enter 1 in the Channel column For more information see Using the list editor on page 186 aaa Muting and soloing tracks To mute or solo a track within a MIDI file click the Mute 8 or Solo T button for the track in the General tab of the Track Properties window Changing track volume and pan Drag the volume or pan sliders in the General tab of the Track Properties window to adjust volume or panning for a track in a MIDI file The adjustment you make adds a bias to the original volume or pan setting in the MIDI file For example if a track has a volume setting of 50 and yo
213. iew in Explorer window check box If you want you can enter values in the Number of times to repeat each Loop box Seconds of each One Shot to play box and Number of Beatmapped measures to play box to specify how different file types are previewed 2 Click OK to close the Preferences dialog 3 In the Explorer select the media you want to preview Hold while clicking to select multiple adjacent files or hold while clicking to select multiple nonadjacent files 4 Click the Start Preview button The first selected file in the list is previewed followed by each file in the list A file s icon changes to a Play icon to indicate which file is currently previewing CHP 2 GETTING STARTED 3 _A gt e _ _ __ _ _ _JJJJoooooom0 SS Note To add the currently previewing file to your project press CtrI Enter Press to add all selected files to your project SSS VSL Using Auto Preview Click the Auto Preview button to toggle automatic playback of media files when you select them in the Explorer If your project is currently playing when you select a new file the new file plays back along with your project This feature allows you to listen to the media file in the context of your project Adding media to the project You must add media files to a project before you can paint arrange and process them When you add a file to a project a new track is created to accommodate it New tracks are added a
214. iginal tracks and their events are unaffected when you mix to a single track Typically you would use this feature when you are finished refining a few tracks and want to combine them to conserve processing power Also when you mix multiple tracks to a single stereo track any envelope or track effects that you applied are rendered into the newly mixed down track You can also use this feature to downmix 5 1 surround projects to stereo This option also allows you to destructively process any track effect plug ins 1 Solo the tracks you want to mix To mix down the whole project skip to step two 2 From the Tools menu choose Render to New Track or press M The Render to New Track dialog appears 3 Complete the Render to New Track dialog e From the Save in drop down list choose the location where you want to save the new media file e Enter a name for the track in the File name box e From the Save as type drop down list choose a file format e From the Template drop down list choose an audio format from the template list or click Custom to create custom rendering settings r a _ Yk Note If you want to downmix a 5 1 surround project choose a stereo rendering format e ae e Select the Render loop region only check box if you want to render only the loop region to the new mixed down track Clear the check box to render the full length of the project CHP 7 WORKING WITH TRACKS 1 AI 4 Click Save The time
215. il the level is maximized CHP 9 RECORDING IN ACID SOFTWARE 172 pS _ 4 Note Setting digital recording levels can be difficult If you are not familiar with the source audio and have only one opportunity to capture the recording allow yourself plenty of headroom ps Recording multiple takes Using the Loop Playback button in conjunction with the record feature allows you to record multiple takes into an ACID project All takes are recorded into the same track and saved as one WAV file However each take is delineated by creating a region that is saved with the recorded media file To view the regions open the recorded track s properties 1 Create a loop region for the part of the project you want to play while recording your take Loop region S 2 Verify that the Loop Playback button is selected 3 Begin recording The specified loop region is played back while your takes are recorded on a new track Reviewing and saving takes After you have recorded all your takes you can review them and save only the best take Click Cancel to close the Record dialog Click the Solo button on the track you just recorded Click the Play From Start button gt and review all takes Create a time selection containing the take you want to keep From the Tools menu choose Render to New Track The Render to New Track dialog appears Oo oOo BP U N Enter a name for the new file in
216. ile waiting to be transferred between two locations A buffer ensures an uninterrupted flow of data between computers Media players may need to rebuffer when there is network congestion A virtual pathway where signals from tracks and effects are mixed A bus s output can be a physical audio device in the computer from which the signal is heard Refers to a set of 8 bits An 8 bit sample requires one byte of memory to store while a 16 bit sample takes two bytes of memory to store The clipboard is the location where data cut or copied from ACID software is stored You can then paste the data back into the software at a different location Occurs when the amplitude of a sound is above the maximum allowed recording level In digital systems clipping is seen as a clamping of the data to a maximum value such as 32 767 in 16 bit data Clipping causes sound to distort Coder decoder refers to any technology for compressing and decompressing data The term codec can refer to software hardware or a combination of both technologies A compression ratio controls the ratio of input to output levels above a specific threshold This ratio determines how much a signal has to rise above the threshold for every dB of increase in the output For example with a ratio of 3 1 the input level must increase by three decibels to produce a one decibel output level increase e Threshold 10 dB e Compression Ratio 3 1 e Input 7 dB e Output 9
217. ime This display also shows status and error information If Trigger from MIDI Timecode is enabled but no MTC is detected the display reads Waiting If the wrong frame rate of MTC is being detected the display reads Wrong format Generating MIDI clock MIDI clock differs from MTC in that it contains tempo as well as positional information MIDI clock is essentially measured in ticks from the beginning of the project MIDI clock sends 24 ticks per quarter note The advantage of using MIDI clock is that tempo changes are sent to the chasing application and they will be preserved 1 Specify a MIDI output device to which you will send the clock This option can be found on the Sync tab of the Preferences dialog For more information see Using the Sync tab on page 232 2 From the Options menu choose Timecode and choose Generate MIDI Clock from the submenu MIDI clock is generated when you click the Play button Viewing outgoing MIDI clock You can view the outgoing clock in the time display located directly above the track list Right click the time display and choose MIDI Clock Out from the shortcut menu to display the outgoing MIDI clock time CHP 10 WORKING WITH MIDI WORKING WITH MIDI CHP 10 203 CHAPTER UT y oraig Yona with Video 67 1 UI jue By adding a video track to your ACID project you can use the software as a scoring tool Video is always added to the top track in the trac
218. in the track view makes it easier for you to fine tune the mix of the song s overall drum sound 1 Drag the track header to a new location in the track list A heavy black horizontal line appears on the track list to indicate where the track will be placed 2 Release the mouse button The track is dropped in the new location and the entire track list track view adjusts accordingly a Tip You can reorder multiple tracks by holding or while selecting tracks and dragging the tracks as a group Eee T GETTING STARTED CHP 2 AT Resizing tracks You can change the height of a track thereby affecting how many tracks display in the track view This is especially useful when building a project with a large number of tracks In addition you can decrease the track s height until only the multipurpose slider Track FX button Mute button and Solo button are visible 1 Drag the bottom edge of a track up or down in the track list The pointer displays as a vertical stretch icon 2 Release the mouse button to establish the track s new height a HF Tip You can set the default height for all new tracks by right clicking the newly resized track in the track list and choosing Set Default Track Properties from the shortcut menu For more information see Setting default track properties on page 226 pp Y Changing track colors As mentioned previously tracks are automatically created to accommodate new media files These trac
219. ination beat stretch marker to a stretch only marker double click the marker or right click the marker and choose Convert to Stretch Marker from the shortcut menu Beat anchors and markers are used only when a groove is applied to a track Offsets between beat anchors and beat markers indicate that the beat represented by an anchor is actually played at the marker position which may occur before or after the beat This mapping represents the difference required to remove an existing groove from a media file and return the media to straight machine time so that grooves can be applied accurately WORKING WITH TRACKS CHP 7 AAA 1137 If you want to hear the results of editing beat anchors and markers select the Play Quantized button W at the bottom of the Track Properties window and use the Track Properties transport controls to preview the loop Playing the track in Play Quantized mode demonstrates how the track sounds when the Quantize to Straight groove is applied In most cases you won t need to edit beat anchors a Tip Use the Zoom In Time and Zoom Out Time buttons to change the magnification of the waveform EDO AS A Important Grooves are not applied using the markers on the Stretch tab Autodetected stretch markers are used to establish a baseline for applying other grooves with the Groove Pool window and Groove tool User defined markers have no effect on groove quantization 46 DD S S
220. information see Creating custom rendering settings on page 58 6 Click Save The selection is saved and the file is added as a loop to a new track in the project Using the Chopper with one shots Selections of loops and Beatmapped files transfer flawlessly between the Chopper and the track view because the beats are clearly identified However one shot files present more of a problem You can use the following method to create accurate single hit selections in one shot files 1 Verify that the snapping options are active If snapping is not active choose Snapping from the Options menu and choose Enable from the submenu or press F8 2 Verify that the Link Arrow to Selection button 2 is selected 3 Create a selection of the desired musical length in the Chopper For more information see Creating selections of a specific musical length on page 114 From the Options menu choose Snapping and choose Enable from the submenu or press F8 to toggle all snapping options off Click the Link Arrow to Selection button 8 to toggle the linking option off You can now adjust the selection without changing the increment 6 Drag the middle of the increment arrow to reposition selection length in the Chopper 7 Use the mouse and or keyboard to fine tune the selection The increment arrow does not change 8 Insert the desired selection data in the track view For more information see Inserting selections in the tr
221. ing Temporarily suspend snapping Toggle snap to grid Ripple edit mode Draw tool Select next edit tool in list Select previous edit tool in list Mark in point Mark out point for selection Render to new track Insert show hide track pan envelope Insert remove track pan envelope Insert show hide track volume envelope Track list commands Description Mute selected tracks Solo selected tracks Record Cycle through effect automation envelopes Mixer commands Description Change selection of a mixer control Move the right channel of the fader for the selected mixer control Move the left channel of the fader for the selected mixer control Select multiple adjacent mixer controls MIDI commands Description Insert new MIDI track Generate MIDI Timecode Generate MIDI Clock Keys Ctrl R Ctrl G Shift G Ctrl Shift G F8 Shift drag Ctrl F8 Ctrl L Ctrl D D Shift D lor Oor Ctrl M P Shift P Keys Z X Ctrl R E or Shift E Keys Left Right Arrow Ctrl Up Down Arrow Shift Up Down Arrow Shift Left Right Arrow Keys Ctrl Alt Q PZ Shift F7 Description Insert remove track volume envelope Adjust envelope point value in fine increments without changing the point s timeline position Adjust envelope point value in normal increments without changing the point s timeline position Adjust envelope point s timeline position without changing its value Insert region Insert mar
222. ing showing 203 Removing 203 Removing associated audio 204 Scoring 206 Synchronizing with audio 203 Video preferences tab 231 Video Preview window 22 Video window 205 Voices Patch changes for DLS sets 155 VST instruments 157 Volume Event 76 Project 53 160 Recording 171 Track 19 48 Tracks in MIDI files 177 VST effects preferences 230 VST Instruments Preferences 231 VST instruments Loading banks and presets 157 Locating for use in ACID 158 Routing MIDI tracks to 159 Using 157 Wall of sound 240 What sThis help 15 Window docking area 21 Windows Audio Plug In 119 123 Audio plug in 23 Chopper 22 111 Docking floating 220 Explorer 22 35 37 Groove Pool 23 Hiding showing 219 Main 16 Media Manager 22 Mixer 22 53 55 149 165 Plug In Manager 23 Soft Synth Properties 22 Surround Panner 22 212 Track Properties 22 133 138 175 176 Video Preview 22 Writing to CD 60 Zoom controls Chopper window 112 Main window 20 INDEX INDEX
223. ing the compress expand feature allows you to create great bass grooves by slowing drum loops ma Slicing and dicing in the Chopper This feature is available only in ACID Pro and ACID Music Studio software You can use the Chopper to add creative slice and dice effects to your ACID project Chopping new loops for alternate time signatures The Chopper makes it easy to clone a new loop from a song or sample This feature can be particularly handy when you want to create a loop for a different time signature In this example you ll create a 3 4 pattern from a 4 4 loop 1 Set the project time signature to 3 4 For more information see Changing project time signature on page 106 2 Place a 4 4 loop file in the Chopper For more information see Placing files in the Chopper on page 113 3 Select a three beat section of audio to be used for the new loop Use the Chopper s transport bar to preview the new loop APPENDIX B ACID TIPS AND TRICKS 244 r 4 Right click the selection and choose Chop to New Track from the shortcut menu Alternately press M The Chop to New Track dialog appears ee Tip You can also drag a selection from the Chopper to the track list SSS eee KAN 5 Complete the information in the Chop to New Track dialog and click Save The selection is saved and the file is added as a 3 4 loop to a new track in the project For more information see Saving Chopper selections as new files on page 116
224. ing the default settings and ACID software attempts to start the device If the ReWire device application does not open you can start it manually 3 Use the ReWire device application s interface to open a project and adjust its settings DU p proj J 8 Opening a ReWire device application When you add a ReWire soft synth bus to your project ACID software attempts to start the device There are several additional ways to open a ReWire panel application for use with ACID software e Double click the soft synth control icon on the Mixer USING THE MIXER CHP 8 L 1167 e Right click the soft synth control icon and choose Open ReWire Panel from the shortcut menu e Double click the soft synth control icon on the Mixer to display the Soft Synth Properties window and then click the Open ReWire Device Application button Click this button again to close the application when your editing is finished _ _ _ 4 Note Click the Lock MIDI Port Configuration button A to lock MIDI ports so port assignments are not lost due to dynamic changes from ReWire panels SSS MM e If ACID software is unable to start your Re Wire device application you can start it manually a 4 Note For more information on working with your ReWire device application please see the application s documentation Ann A T Starting playback of the ACID project and synchronized ReWire devices ReWire device and mixer applicatio
225. ins in a chain 7 This feature is available only in ACID Pro and ACID Music Studio software You can bypass a plug in without removing it from the chain by clearing the check box for the plug in Alternately right click the plug in and choose Bypass from the shortcut menu coD Grophice manner Tip To bypass or re enable all plug ins in a chain right click the Track FX button 4 and choose Bypass All or Enable All S qq KYO Bypassing effect automation R This feature is available only in ACID Pro software For plug in chains that include effect automation using envelopes you can bypass automation by clicking the Bypass FX Automation button MI on the Audio Plug In window This does not remove any effect automation envelopes from the track but rather temporarily bypasses processing of the effect automation You can toggle this button on and off to hear the difference between the plug in chain as a standard non automated effect versus an automated effect Ko Removing plug ins from chains 1 Click the Track FX button 591 The Audio Plug In window appears 2 Right click the plug in and choose Remove from the shortcut menu or click the Remove Selected Plug In button 3 Click the Close button BI to close the Audio Plug In window Fr _ _ _ K EYSS Tip To remove all plug ins in a chain right click the Track FX button H and choose Delete All SS ee WO
226. inue with the following steps to locate the instruments for use in ACID software 3 Click the Browse button next to the Alternate VSTi search folder 1 box The Browse for Folder dialog appears 4 Browse to the location of your VST instrument files and click OK The VST instrument plug ins are located and displayed in the Select VST instruments to be available as soft synths box at the bottom of the dialog 5 Repeat steps three and four for the Alternate VSTi search folder 2 box if needed 6 In the Select VST instruments to be available as soft synths box select the check boxes for the VST instruments you want available in ACID software 7 Click OK to close the Preferences dialog Note Once you add TEE a VSTi soft synth to a Z af Delay Lame project the VST Locked VSTi gt FMHeaven instrument stays locked until you close the application When a VST instrument is locked you cannot clear its check box to make it unavailable in ACID software Ee USING THE MIXER CHP 8 L 1 B9 Configuring a soft synth for external input This feature is available only in ACID Pro and ACID Music Studio software Each soft synth bus control in the Mixer window can accept input from MIDI tracks and external MIDI devices You can use your favorite controller to play a DLS soft synth or VST instrument for recording or step recording 1 Double click a soft synth icon on a control 1 in the Mixer window The Soft Sy
227. is available only in ACID Pro and ACID Music Studio software You can also paste the contents of the clipboard at the cursor during playback You can use this feature to create rhythms on one shot tracks while listening to the track you re editing in the context of the rest of your project When you re done creating events you can use the Render to New Track command on the Edit menu to save the rhythm to a new track or you can copy and paste your new events across the timeline Create a time selection in the portion of the project you want to edit Select the Loop Playback button Copy the one shot you want to use Click the Play button to start playback Press Shift Y to paste at the play cursor during playback the edit cursor remains fixed and the play cursor follows playback oF O N If snapping is enabled events are pasted at the next snap point You can use snapping to quantize your events 6 Repeat step 5 as needed 7 Click the Stop button E when you re finished creating events 8 Edit event positions as necessary o 4 Tip If you re using this feature to tap rhythms with one shot tracks try applying a groove to adjust the timing of your rhythm For more information see Working with grooves on page 139 A Cutting events Cutting an event a time selection or an event within a time selection removes the audio data from the track view and places it on the clipboard Once da
228. ish to select e Press A to select all note events on a track CHP 10 WORKING WITH MIDI 184 T Moving note events After you select note events you can drag them to new positions e _ Q _ _ a Tip Press while dragging note events to restrict your movement to vertical change pitch or horizontal change location in time TN T Using cut copy and paste After you select note events you can click the Cut 4 or Copy buttons to cut or copy the events You can then position the cursor in a new location and click the Paste button B to paste the events Note events are always pasted at the same pitch as the original note event Toggling note snapping Click the Enable Snapping Notes to Specified Scale button W to toggle snapping If the button is selected you can only draw or drag notes within the selected scale Hold while drawing or dragging notes to override snapping Click the down arrow lt next to the button to choose a root note and scale Quantizing note events You can use the MIDI Quantize dialog to force notes to align with musical beats based on the parameters you specify 1 Select the notes you want to quantize For more information see Selecting note events on page 183 2 Click the Quantize button The MIDI Quantize dialog appears 3 From the Quantize resolution drop down list choose the beat to which you want the selected notes to be quantized 4 Select the Start ti
229. ist editor to create or step record MIDI CHP 10 WORKING WITH MIDI 174 T la Recording MIDI tracks This feature is available only in ACID Pro and ACID Music Studio software The Record dialog allows you to record audio or MIDI tracks For more information see Recording in ACID Software on page 169 1 Click the Record button S 1 on the transport bar The Record dialog appears 2 Select the MIDI radio button in the line labeled Record type 3 In the Record device drop down list choose the MIDI device from which you will record __ Note If the device from which you want to record does not appear in the list you may need to enable the device in the MIDI tab of the Preferences dialog SS _ _ _ _ m 4 From the MIDI Thru drop down list choose the output device or soft synth control to use for monitoring the incoming MIDI This allows you to hear the MIDI input as you record 5 In the File name box enter a name for the recorded file 6 If necessary click Browse and select a location to save the recorded file 7 Complete the remainder of the Record dialog as needed For more information see Setting ACID recording properties on page 170 8 Click Record to begin recording 9 When you have finished click Stop to end recording The recorded MIDI file is saved with the name and location you selected and a new MIDI track is added to the project You can paint the recorded MIDI o
230. ist to specify how many stretch markers 4 will be displayed along the bottom of the waveform display Audio that contains rapid notes such as drum rolls benefits from setting the divisions at a smaller fraction of a beat Slower paced material however may actually suffer from high resolution Available only in ACID Pro software Click to automatically detect the beats in the current file Use this button to apply the ACID 5 0 beat detection algorithm to existing media Available only in ACID Pro software WORKING WITH TRACKS 136 A gt Stretch markers for loop tracks KR This feature is available only in ACID Pro software Stretch markers y correspond to subdivisions of beats in the audio file These markers tell ACID software where to divide the audio when performing time stretching to match tempo Accurately detecting these beats is the key to making the time compression process sound good Each beat marker J on the beat ruler corresponds to a combination beat stretch marker h on the timeline If you want to convert a combination beat stretch marker to a stretch only marker double click the marker or right click the marker and choose Convert to Stretch Marker from the shortcut menu a Tip Use the Zoom In Time l and Zoom Out Time buttons to change the magnification of the waveform o ae As a general rule markers that are excessively close to each other may cause clicks in the audio However mar
231. it sounds the amplitude range is 32 768 to 32 767 For 8 bit sounds the range is 128 to 127 The horizontal axis corresponds to time with the leftmost point being the start of the waveform In memory the horizontal axis corresponds to the number of samples from the start of the sound file A Microsoft file format that can handle audio and video presentations and other data such as scripts URL flips images and HTML tags Advanced Streaming Format files can be saved with asf wma or wmv extensions APPENDIX C Index Numerics 5 1 Surround Plug In Pack 207 217 218 5 1 Surround See Surround A AC 3 Encoder 207 217 218 ACID FX 119 Add channels panning model 131 214 Adding Assignable effects 151 Busses 149 Events 40 Media to projects 36 MIDI tracks 173 Soft synth controls 154 Video 203 Adjusting the mix 48 Assignable effects 151 152 160 165 Adding 151 Adjusting levels sent from tracks 124 130 Assigning tracks to 152 Deleting 152 Routing to busses 152 Saving effect packages 164 Audio Plug In window 23 119 123 Audio preferences tab 229 Audio properties tab 34 Audio signal flow 29 30 Automating Effects 124 130 Mixer controls 165 Surround panning 214 216 Balance panning model 131 214 Beat ruler 20 Beatmapped tracks 39 Stretching properties 134 137 Beatmapper wizard 131 Bit depth 34 C Burning CDs 60 Bus tracks 165 Busses 149 151 160 165
232. itar EE ik ii z A Ebow Vibration 10 wav Guitar E Ebow Vibration 11 wav Guitar E Ebow vibration 12 wav Guitar E Ebow Vibration 12 wav Guitar Guitar 13 items found out of 1 092 total theme Media Manager USING THE MEDIA MANAGER CHP 4 a BG 3 You can refine the search results using any of the following methods e Select tag check boxes e Use the Advanced search controls For more information see Using advanced search options on page 90 e Choose Match Any from the Match Any Match All drop down list to display all media that matches any of your keyword tag or advanced search criteria Using this option in the search displayed in step 2 the Search Results pane would display all files that contain the keyword EBow OR the Guitar tag e Choose Match All from the Match Any Match All drop down list to display only media that matches all of your keyword tag and advanced search criteria Using this option in the search displayed in step 2 the Search Results pane would display all files that contain the keyword EBow AND the Guitar tag Searching using tags Sorting search results Vi CHP 4 In the Search pane select the check box for each tag you want to find The Media Library searches your media files and displays the results in the Search Results pane on the right side of the window Quick test search Choose Match Any from the Match Any Match All drop down list if you want to C
233. ithout opening the Extract Audio from CD dialog mnn Note When adding media from multiple CDs you may need to press to refresh the Explorer window to view the new CD s contents ppp GETTING STARTED CHP 2 0 0 III 39 Downloading media files from the Web The Get Media from the Web command allows you to view and download various audio and video files available on the Internet 1 From the File menu choose Get Media from the Web 2 Choose an icon from the left frame to specify the media provider from which you want to download files 3 Preview the file select the file you want to open and click Download The Browse for Folder dialog appears 4 Select a folder for the download The selected file is downloaded to the folder specified in the Destination box 5 When you are finished downloading close the Get Media from the Web dialog The file is added to your project Click Show Details to display additional information about your download In this mode you can add files to a download queue specify where the downloaded files should be stored and monitor the progress of your downloads Click Start to begin downloading queued files or click Hide Details to return to basic mode Understanding track types When you add media to a project a new track is created for the file Depending on the type of media you add one of four track types is created to accommodate it loop one shot Beatmapped or MIDI You can identify
234. k EX check boxes for the properties you wish to leave as they are TATE S T Restore original defaults Cancel Tip Select the Restore original defaults check box to return to the original track properties ann 4 Click OK CUSTOMIZING ACID SOFTWARE APPENDIX A 227 Setting ACID preferences From the Options menu choose Preferences to display the Preferences dialog 4 Important Not all preferences listed here are available in all versions of ACID S _ QT E KEKE 0 E QQ A Using the General tab Item Automatically open last project on startup Show logo splash screen on startup Use Net Notify to stay informed about Sony products Draw contents of events Create undos for FX parameter changes Confirm media file deletion when Still in use Close media files when ACID is not the active application Close audio and MIDI ports when ACID is not the active application Enable multimedia keyboard support Automatically render large Wave files as Wave64 Prompt for region and marker names if not playing Create project file backups on save acd bak Preserve pitch for new Beatmapped tracks when tempo changes Automatically start the Beatmapper Wizard for long files Use slower updates to prevent playback clicks during editing Enable autosave Use ASPI for CD burning and extracting Use SPTI for CD burning Autoname extracted CD tracks APPENDIX A Description Select
235. k in the stereo field Dragging the slider to the left places the track in the left speaker more than the right while dragging the slider to the right places the track in the right speaker Because true stereo panning is used you can introduce clipping when panning a track to the left or right Unlike a left right balance control which simply decreases the volume of one channel the default panning mode actually adds the audio from one channel to the other When panning a track adjust the track volume accordingly You can choose among five panning types to determine how a track is panned For more information see Choosing stereo pan types on page 131 Controls the level of the track sent to each of the assignable effect chains that you have created Dragging the fader to the left cuts the volume dragging to the right boosts the volume Available only in ACID Pro software Controls the level of the track sent to each of the additional busses that you have created for your project Dragging the fader to the left cuts the volume dragging the fader to the right boosts the volume Available only in ACID Pro software CHP 2 e S K Once you have chosen what you want to adjust drag the slider to adjust the level You can hold Or to select multiple tracks and move the sliders together as a group PP _ _ III Note When adjusting the mix of your tracks remember to look at the meters on the mixer Because you are adding the volumes of a
236. k list Depending on your horizontal zoom level each frame displayed in the video track may represent multiple frames from the source video As you zoom in marks display to represent each frame and you can zoom further to view individual frames This feature is available only in ACID Pro and ACID Music Studio software Managing video ACID software makes it easy to add video to a project and work with the video track Adding or replacing video files Use the Explorer window to find the file you want to use and then add it to the project by double clicking it or dragging it into the track view The video file is placed in the top track and if the file has an audio stream it is placed as a separate one shot track in the track view If your project already contains a video track you are prompted to replace the existing video if you open another video file LEE Y Tip You can also add a still image such as a BMP JPEG PSD GIF PNG or TGA file to the video track See Removing the video track Right click anywhere in the video track and choose Remove Video from the shortcut menu Hiding and showing the video track By default video displays in the track view when you add it to a project You can hide or show the video track at any time by choosing Show Video Track from the View menu A check mark next to the command indicates that the video track displays Synchronizing audio and video Editing the audio associated
237. ker standard Insert time marker Insert disc at once CD track marker Change tempo Insert command marker Insert tempo change Insert key change Insert time signature change Insert tempo and key change Maximize timeline vertically window docking area will be hidden Maximize timeline vertically and horizontally window docking area and track list will be hidden Maximize timeline horizontally track list will be hidden Description Render to new track Show hide bus tracks Insert folder track Insert new MIDI track Description Select multiple nonadjacent mixer controls Delete the selected bus or assignable FX control Move the fader of the selected mixer control for assignable effect controls moves the Out fader Description Trigger from MIDI Timecode Reset all MIDI ports Keys Shift V Ctrl drag envelope point or segment Ctrl Alt drag envelope point or segment Alt drag R M H N Alt drag time marker C T K Shift K Shift T Fil Ctrl F1 1 Shift F1 1 Keys Ctrl M B Ctrl Alt F Ctrl Alt Q Keys Ctrl Left Right Arrow Delete Up Down Arrow Keys Ctrl F7 Ctrl Alt F7 INTRODUCING ACID SOFTWARE jg jJ Chopper commands This feature is available only in ACID Pro and ACID Music Studio software For more information see Using Chopper toolbar and keyboard commands on page 112 Surround Panner commands For more information see Moving the pan point on page 213 This fea
238. ker will not be burned to CD n T aaas Tip Once you have inserted a marker you can move or delete them as needed nnn 4 Repeat step 3 until vou have marked all CD tracks GETTING STARTED CHP 2 a Burning a disc disc at once 1 Insert a blank CD in a supported CD R CD RW drive 2 From the Tools menu choose Burn Disc at Once Audio CD The Burn Disc at Once Audio CD dialog appears 3 From the Drive drop down list use the CD drive that you want to use to burn your CD 4 From the Speed drop down list choose the speed at which you want to burn Max will use your drive s CHP 2 fastest possible speed decrease the setting to prevent the possibility of buffer underruns 5 Select the Buffer underrun protection check box if your CD recorder supports buffer underrun protection Buffer underrun protection allows a CD recorder to stop and resume burning _____ AAA a Note Buffer underrun protection can create a disc that can be played in CD players but may contain a bit error where burning stopped and restarted Consider clearing this check box when creating a premaster disc o Choose a radio button in the Burn mode box e Burn CDs begins recording audio to your CD immediately e Test first then burn CDs performs a test to determine whether your files can be written to the CD recorder without encountering buffer underruns No audio is recorded to the CD during the test and recording begins after the
239. kers should not be more than one second apart or pitch and echo artifacts may result You can add move and delete stretch markers on the Stretch tab If snapping is enabled markers will snap to the current grid spacing Moving markers You can drag any marker to a new location If you move a combination stretch beat marker h its associated beat marker f will also be moved Adding markers Double click the marker bar at the bottom of the waveform display to create a new marker It is advantageous to add new markers if the software does not detect any quick subdivisions in beats The biggest cause of audio artifacts due to time compression is a lack of beat detection Make sure that you add markers anywhere the application fails to put one on a pronounced beat Deleting markers You can remove a user defined marker by right clicking and choosing Delete from the shortcut menu or by double clicking a disabled marker Reset stretching markers Click the Reload button Etrebad to reset the markers to their last saved positions R Beat anchors and markers Tor loop tracks This feature is available only in ACID Pro software Beat anchors W correspond to musical beats on the ruler at the top of the waveform display Beat markers P correspond to points in time on the ruler at the bottom of the waveform display Each beat marker corresponds to a combination beat stretch marker h on the timeline If you want to convert a comb
240. king selections You must select events before you can move or edit them Selecting an event 1 Click the Draw Tool button 4 2 Click an event The event is highlighted C seeded event CHP 2 GETTING STARTED A r Selecting multiple events You have several methods of selecting multiple events e Press or while clicking events e Use the Select All on Track command e Use the Select Events to End command e Use the Select All command e Use the Selection tool RRA AAA AAA AAA Note Unless stated otherwise selections can only be made using the Draw tool os 2 Selecting multiple events using the keyboard and mouse Holding while clicking events allows you to select multiple nonadjacent events that reside on any track This method is useful when you need to move several scattered events by an equal amount within the project Holding allows you to select multiple adjacent events Selecting any two events while holding automatically selects all events located between the selected events Events may be selected from the same track or across tracks This method is useful when you want to move several adjacent events by an equal amount within the project Selecting multiple events using the Select All on Track command Right clicking any track in the track view and choosing Select All on Track from the shortcut menu selects every event on the track Selecting multiple events using the Select Events to End comman
241. ks are assigned a default color However you can change track colors to organize the tracks in your project To change the color right click the track in the track list choose Color from the shortcut menu and choose the desired color from the submenu Renaming tracks To rename a track right click the track name and choose Rename from the shortcut menu or double click the track name Renaming a track applies to the project only and does not change the file associated with the track Duplicating tracks To duplicate a track right click it and choose Duplicate Track from the shortcut menu An exact copy of the track is created and its events and adds it below the original track in the project The words Copy of appear before the name of the duplicate track to identify it in the track list For creative ways to use duplicate tracks see Playing with duplicate tracks on page 237 Deleting tracks You can delete unnecessary tracks from a project by selecting the track and using any of the following methods e Choose Delete from the Edit menu e Right click a track and choose Delete Track from the shortcut menu 6 Press Delete CHP 2 GETTING STARTED Byn Copying cutting and pasting tracks Copying a track places an exact copy of the selected track on the clipboard but leaves the track view unchanged To copy a track select the track and do one of the following e Click the Copy button on the toolbar e Choos
242. l without removing them by right clicking the FX button H and choosing Bypass All from the shortcut menu To apply them again right click the FX button and choose Enable All from the shortcut menu Saving plug in chains as packages You can save plug in chains as packages so that you may re use them in other projects If you use a combination of plug ins often saving them as a package saves you time Effect packages retain their chain order and individual plug in settings You may save plug in chains as packages from existing plug in chains or in the Plug In Chooser dialog during the actual creation of the chain The plug in chains that you save as packages appear in the Plug In Chooser dialog in the Packaged Chains folder 1 Click the FX button 4 on the mixer control The Plug In Chooser dialog appears if a plug in chain does not already exist To save an existing chain click the FX button 7591 to open the Audio Plug In window and skip to step four 2 Add and arrange plug ins to create a plug in chain and click OK 3 In the Audio Plug In window adjust the settings for each plug in to achieve the effect you want For more information about effect parameters click the Plug In Help button 17 in the Audio Plug In window 4 Click the Save Chain Preset button H The Save Plug In Package dialog appears 5 Enter a name for the package 6 Click OK to save the plug in chain as an effect package Organizing your plug ins
243. likely replacement file when you clicked Smart Search yf Found The file listed in the Offline File column will be replaced by the file listed in the Replacement File column A status of Found indicates that you chose the file you want to use after clicking the Browse button Select the files you want to resolve e To select a single file click the file e To select multiple consecutive files click the first file hold the key and then click the last item e To select multiple files that are not consecutive hold the key and click each file USING THE MEDIA MANAGER CHP 4 a 9 3 3 Specify how you want to resolve the selected files e Click the Smart Search button to search quickly and allow the Media Manager tool to suggest the replacement file e Click the Browse button to choose a specific replacement file e Click the Leave Offline button to leave the file offline The file will not be added to your project e Click the Remove button to remove the file from the media library The file will not be added to your project The original media file is not deleted 4 Repeat step 3 for each file in the list 5 Click the OK button to preview the files or add the files to your project and update the media library with the replacement files Customizing the Media Manager window Much of what you see in the Media Manager window can be customized to suit your preferences Automatically hiding the Search pane Click the push pin
244. ll the tracks together it is easy to clip the audio output Make sure that the meters never display the red clip indicator during playback ann Muting tracks Each track has a Mute button Clicking this button shades the corresponding track to indicate that it is muted and renders it inaudible during playback Clicking the Mute button a second time returns the track to its original level in the mix Toggle muting a track is an effective way of determining whether a track contributes to the overall sound of a project You can also press Z to mute a track or group of tracks eee aaa l Tip Press and click the Mute button to mute only the selected track and restore any other muted tracks If the selected track is already muted press and click the Mute button to restore all tracks C T CHP 2 GETTING STARTED 50 gt Soloing tracks Located next to the Mute button the Solo button T allows you isolate tracks in a project during playback When you click this button during playback the corresponding track remains audible and all other tracks are muted Clicking the Solo button a second time returns all tracks to their original levels in the mix Toggle soloing a track is an effective method of configuring and previewing isolated track effects against how they sound in the project You can also press X to solo a track or group of tracks _ 4 Tip Press and click the Solo button to solo only the selected
245. lly detect and offset for hardware recording latency User recording latency offset Open files as loops if between seconds Quick fade edit edges of audio events Quick fade time Default All APPENDIX A Description Choose a driver type from the drop down list The Microsoft Sound Mapper is the default setting If you want to activate specific sound cards choose Windows Classic Wave Driver or an ASIO driver and choose a device from the Default Stereo and Front playback device drop down list Choose the device that you want to use for playing sound data In a 5 1 surround project this device plays the right and left channels Selecting a device such as the Microsoft Sound Mapper allows Windows to select an appropriate device to use for the current sound data If you have selected Microsoft Sound Mapper you cannot assign busses to different devices Choose the device that you want to use for playing the rear surround channels right surround and left surround in a 5 1 surround project Choose the device that you want to use for playing the center and LFE channels in a 5 1 surround project The Playback buffering seconds slider specifies the total amount of buffering that is used during playback The larger the number the more buffering that occurs during playback This value should be as low as possible without gapping To set it start at 25 and play a typical song Move some of the track faders If the playback g
246. ls are beyond the scope of this chapter For more information see Using the Mixer on page 149 Viewing the Mixer window The Mixer window appears by default when you start the application but you can hide it if necessary To view or hide the Mixer window choose Mixer from the View menu or press Alt 3 A check mark appears adjacent to the command to indicate when the window is displayed Using the mixer toolbar CHP 2 The Mixer window toolbar allows you to access project properties add busses and add assignable effects chains to the Mixer Button ba au Se Insert eee A Insert Bus gp Insert Soft Synth Description Displays the Project Properties dialog Downmixes your audio from 5 1 surround to stereo or from stereo to mono so you can ensure your mix will sound the way you intended it even when your audience s hardware has fewer channels than the original mix The button represents the current playback mode 5 1 surround output ba Stereo output e Mono output Available only in ACID Pro software Attenuates the volume of all busses that are routed to hardware outputs by 20 dB Click again to restore original volume Available only in ACID Pro software Adds an assignable effect chain to your project The Plug In Chooser dialog appears so that you can create a plug in chain For more information see Using assignable effects on page 151 Available only in ACID Pro software Adds ano
247. lug In Help button 21 in the Audio Plug In window _ 4 Tip You can save an effect s parameters as a preset to be used in other projects To save a preset enter a name in the Preset box and click the Save Preset button H EE 5 Click the Close button J to close the Audio Plug In window Working with assignable effects chains After you add an assignable effect control you can add plug ins to the chain and modify them as needed For more information see Adding effects to soft synth mixer controls on page 161 Routing tracks to assignable effect controls Routing tracks to an assignable effect control allows you to assign multiple tracks to a plug in chain 1 Click the multipurpose slider label this icon displays Volume by default and choose the desired assignable effect control from the menu that appears The slider changes to reflect the name of the assignable effect control e acid PRO 5 sPROMO 08 5 Yolk 3 0 dE e vol 9 0 de Pan Center Bus 4 Inf 2 Drag the fader to adjust the level of the track sent to the assignable effect chain sy Tip Assignable effect chains are post volume by default To change to pre volume click the multipurpose slider label in the track list choose the appropriate assignable effect chain from the menu and choose Pre Volume from the submenu ell aS o T If you set the Dry Out faders in your effect chain to inf you can adjust
248. ly in ACID Pro and ACID Music Studio software To render projects that contain MIDI tracks route the MIDI tracks to soft synths DLS sets rather than to external MIDI devices MIDI tracks that are routed to external MIDI devices are not included in the rendered file For more information see Rendering projects on page 57 CHP 10 WORKING WITH MIDI 198 _ _ gt ya MIDI from external devices This feature is available only in ACID Pro and ACID Music Studio software You can receive MIDI input from an external device such as a MIDI keyboard You can then use a soft synth control with its DLS set or VST instrument or external MIDI device to output the sound from the external device Adding external devices as MIDI inputs 1 Verify that the Enable Real Time MIDI command is selected in the Options menu 2 From the Options menu choose Preferences The Preferences dialog appears 3 Click the MIDI tab 4 Select a device in the Make these devices available for MIDI input pane 5 To enable MIDI thru for the selected input right click the entry in the MIDI Thru column and choose a MIDI thru device from the shortcut menu ee _ _ __xso K lt Note The MIDI thru device must be selected in the Make these devices available for MIDI track playback pane in order to appear in the menu You can choose more than one MIDI device for MIDI thru output if desired S 6 Click OK Assigning MIDI i
249. ly in ACID Pro and ACID Music Studio software Use the Insert Time command to insert a specified amount of blank space into the project at the current cursor position This feature can be used to create space in the project for new events 1 Position the cursor where you want to insert time 2 From the Insert menu choose Time The Insert Time dialog appears 3 Enter the amount of time you want to insert and click OK 4 Note The Insert Time dialog uses the measures beats ticks format used by the beat ruler gn A T WORKING IN THE TRACK VIEW CHP 5 e 109 Fitting to time The Fit to Time command allows you to adjust the project s overall length to a specified amount of time PP ss Note The maximum and minimum length is limited to reduce the possibility of creating audible artifacts through the compression expansion process NS T 1 From the Edit menu choose Fit to Time The Fit to Time dialog appears with the current project length displayed in the New length box 2 Enter the new project length in the New length box The length is always entered in time format regardless of the format used on the time ruler 3 Click OK The dialog closes and the tempo is adjusted to alter the project s length CHP 5 WORKING IN THE TRACK VIEW WORKING IN THE TRACK VIEW CHP 5 L 111 sg Using the Chopper A QTM The Chopper feature in ACIDO allows you to quickly create slice and dice effects F
250. ly suspend Snap To Erase entire event Split event s Playback commands Description Start stop playback Stop playback Toggle looped playback Play from start Play from cursor Pause resume playback INTRODUCING ACID SOFTWARE Keys Delete Numeric keypad 6 Numeric keypad 4 Shift while dragging an event Ctrl click event with Erase tool S Keys Spacebar Esc Q Shift Spacebar or Ctrl Shift Spacebar when the timeline or track view has focus Shift F12 from any window Ctrl Spacebar when the timeline or track view has focus F12 from any window Enter when the timeline or track view has focus Ctrl F12 from any window Description Change an event s gain setting Change an event s gain setting by 10 Change an event s gain setting by 25 Set an event s gain to 0 0 dB Set an event s gain to silence Render to new track Chop to new track if the Chopper window has focus Description Record Go to start of project Go to end of project Skip backward Skip forward EA Keys Keypad or Shift Keypad or Ctrl Keypad or Shift Ctrl Keypad Shift Ctrl Keypad Ctrl M Keys Ctrl R Ctrl Home or W Ctrl End Page Up Page Down CHP 1 S E Y CHP 1 Timeline commands Description Record Go to using measures beats ticks Go to using current time ruler format Set end of time selection using measures beats and ticks when Time Selection tool is selected Toggle snapp
251. menu to hide it The check mark next to the command is removed and the toolbar disappears The toolbar remains hidden until you choose Toolbar from the View menu to display it again Reordering toolbar buttons You can change the toolbar s button order to suit your preferences You may either reorder the buttons directly on the workspace or via the Customize Toolbar dialog Reordering buttons on the ACID workspace 1 Hold and drag the button that you want to move to the new location on the toolbar A hand icon La within an outline of the button indicates that you are moving the button 2 Release the mouse to drop the button in its new location aoe sss sss sss Tip If you drag the button off the toolbar the button is removed LS SV oowo_oaoan9msaaan_oanmaan_saaa _ T Reordering buttons in the Customize Toolbar dialog The Customize Toolbar dialog allows you to control the order and functionality available on the Toolbar You may return the toolbar to its default settings by clicking the Reset button 1 From the Options menu choose Customize Toolbar The Customize Toolbar dialog appears Customize Toolbar ajx Available toolbar buttons Current toolbar buttons Close Reset de Show Yolume Envelopes a Show Pan Envelopes LS Trigger from MIDI Timecode Add gt Generate MIDI Timecode Gemucuoicn chee Reena L Burn Disc at Once Audio CU G Groove Tool il Move Up Gr Extract Audi
252. mes check box to snap start times to the beat selected in the Quantize resolution drop down list 5 Select the Note durations check box to snap note durations to the beat selected in the Quantize resolution drop down list 6 Click Apply WORKING WITH MIDI CHP 10 185 Deleting note events Use the Erase tool to erase events in the piano roll Alternately you can select events and press Delete For more information see Selecting note events on page 183 Undoing and redoing You can easily undo and redo actions in the piano roll editor by using keyboard shortcuts Press Z to undo an action and press Z to redo an action Saving MIDI When you create or edit MIDI in the piano roll editor the MIDI information is saved in the project but the information is not saved to a MIDI file You can save the MIDI information to a MIDI file by clicking the Save File button For more information see Saving reloading or replacing MIDI files on page 196 CHP 10 WORKING WITH MIDI 1865 K Using the list editor This feature is available only in ACID Pro and ACID Music Studio software The List Editor tab on the Track Properties window allows you to view and edit all MIDI data using the list editor plug in The list editor displays each event in your MIDI file as a row in a table The columns in the table contain information on each event s parameters Viewing the list editor 1 Double click the MIDI icon
253. ming signal is too high to be represented as a digital value and is indicated visually by a red clip warning at the top of the meters The aural result of clipping is distortion Be assured that digital clipping distortion is very different from analog clipping distortion The saturation level of analog tape is non exact and pushing the levels into the red often create a nice overdriven effect However the saturation point of digital recording is exactly O dB and levels surpassing that result in ugly digital distortion that can easily ruin a project 1 Connect the audio source to the sound card s input and verify that the card is properly configured for the audio source microphone line level etc 2 Click the Record button O and set the desired recording properties For more information see Setting ACID recording properties on page 170 3 Select the Monitor check box Incoming audio levels appear on the record meters and the peak signal level appears in decibels at the top of the meters Keep in mind that a meter reading of O dB is the maximum for a digital sienal and any signal that surpasses that level will distort 4 Continue adjusting the input level of the source audio until maximum levels are achieved without clipping If the meter clips decrease the source audio level and click the numbers at the top of the meter The peak is reset and a new peak reading is calculated Continue adjusting the levels and resetting the meter unt
254. n ACID Project File acd Contains all information regarding the project including track layout envelope settings and effects parameters However this type of file does not contain actual audio only references to the audio files ACID Project with acd Zip Contains all information regarding the project including Embedded Media track layout envelope settings and effects parameters In addition all audio files used in the project are embedded into the project file If you save a project in acd zip format the project file and all media files are copied to a temporary files folder If you continue to work on your project after saving the acd zip file your changes are saved to the files in this temporary folder You can customize the location of the temporary files folder For more information see Using the General tab on page 227 1 To save a file display the Save As dialog using any of the following options e Click the Save button H on the toolbar e From the Edit menu choose Save e Press S From the Save in drop down list choose the drive and directory where the file will be saved Enter a name for the project in the File name box From the Save as type drop down list choose the desired ACID project file type Qn A W N If you want to save a copy of each of the project s media files to the same location as your project file select the Copy all media with project check box This is available when savi
255. n fxp B Opens an effect bank Choose an fxb file to file to replace the current instrument replace the current effect bank preset al Saves the current effect settings as a EJ Saves the current effect settings as a new effect new effect preset bank Playing a soft synth with a MIDI device This feature is available only in ACID Pro and ACID Music Studio software 1 Double click a soft synth icon on a control 2 in the Mixer window The Soft Synth Properties window is displayed 2 In the Soft Synth Properties window click the External MIDI Input Port button and choose a port from the menu USING THE MIXER K HA Locating VST instruments This feature is available only in ACID Pro and ACID Music Studio software A folder is designated where you can store VST instrument files However if you have VST instrument files elsewhere on your system you can direct the software to look for files in alternate locations 1 From the Options menu choose Preferences The Preferences dialog appears 2 Click the VST Instruments tab The Default VSTi search folder box shows the default location of VST instrument files for use in ACID software VST instrument plug ins located in this folder already appear in the Select VST instruments to be available as soft synths box at the bottom of the dialog If the VST instrument you want to use appears in this box select its check box If the VST instrument does not appear in the box cont
256. n Chooser Galileo co Track EQ H Resonant Filter So Select the plug in parameters that you want to automate using track envelopes Frequency Resonance Filter Type Cancel Filter Order Bypass Select All iiaa Select None 5 Click OK to close the FX Automation Chooser Envelopes display on the track for parameters that you selected in the FX Automation Chooser To control which effect parameter envelope displays on the track click the arrow adjacent to the Track FX button 4 and choose an envelope from the menu __ 4 Tip Press E to toggle through the display of all effect parameter automation envelopes a Adjusting envelopes This feature is available only in ACID Pro and ACID Music Studio software To adjust the overall level of an envelope simply drag the envelope line up or down A tooltip displays the amount of the adjustment as you drag You can adjust envelopes in real time You can also change the level of an envelope over time by adjusting individual envelope points that you place along the envelope line A Tip If you have multiple eae eS envelopes on a track L i hover over an envelope to SA display a tooltip indicating the name of the envelope T nnan T Adding envelope points After you have inserted an envelope you can add envelope points to control the level of signal or amount of panning at specific points in time 1 Place the mouse pointer on the envelope line The envelope cur
257. n in place plug ins will be automatically bypassed to prevent synchronization problems with the Re Wire mixer application The effects chain icon will be displayed as a Apply the plug ins within the ReWire mixer application e Before rendering from a ReWire mixer application turn off the ACID metronome or the metronome will be included in the rendered output e Ifthe mixer has a Render in Real Time option this mode may reduce the possibility of drop outs from the ACID ReWire device while rendering The ACID online help from the Help menu choose Contents and Index provides setup information for several common ReWire mixer applications This information is intended to help you get up and running with ACID software as a ReWire device For the most up to date information about using each Re Wire mixer application please refer to the manufacturer s documentation USING THE MIXER CHP 8 169 CHAPTER eee Recording in ACID gt Software ACID software is a loop based audio production tool It is not designed for multi track recording projects However the application does allow you to record audio from your system s sound card This limited recording capability makes it possible for you to record audio or MIDI from an external source and place it in your project This feature actually makes ACID software an excellent tool for recording song demos You can build a backing track of the appropriate length and tempo usin
258. n is deleted it is not placed on the clipboard Events before delete Clipboard contents Events after delete Deleted information is not 41 000 Existing events on the placed on the clipboard A top track adjust to occur sooner in the project Pasting events in ripple editing mode Once information is copied to the clipboard you may choose a variety of ways to paste the clipboard items into tracks For more information see Pasting events on page 65 The following procedures explain pasting information in ripple editing mode a Note Events are always pasted into their own tracks at the cursor position PPP _ _ _ 22 1 From the Options menu choose Ripple Edits to enter ripple editing mode 2 Move the cursor to the desired timeline location 3 Place the cursor within the track where you want to paste the event 4 Click the Paste button B on the toolbar to paste the event into the track Clipboard information is pasted at the cursor s position on the track Existing events or portions of events after the cursor adjust to occur later in the project The amount of adjustment is based on the total length of the information being pasted Pasting single track information in ripple editing mode The information on the clipboard determines how many tracks are affected when you paste If you have copied or cut information from one track only the selected track is affected by the pasted event and
259. n of the track s first downbeat as determined by the Beatmapper wizard Enter a value in the box or use the spin control to adjust the location Beatmapper Wizard Click the Beatmapper Wizard button to adjust a track s tempo information For more information see Using the Beatmapper on page 131 CHP 7 WORKING WITH TRACKS 1 gt Adjusting track properties for MIDI tracks You can use the General tab to change the track s pitch and root note as well as work with the tracks inside a MIDI file The Piano Roll Editor and List Editor tabs allow you to view and edit all MIDI data If you are using ACID Pro you can also load third party OPT MIDI plug ins on your system in the Track Properties window For more information see Working with MIDI on page 173 Reloading files Clicking the Reload button Esrebad restores all settings from the media file Any setting changes made on the Stretch tab of the Track Properties are discarded Clicking this button also updates the Track Properties window when changes are made to the properties from an external editor Replacing files Clicking the Replace File button Ekee displays the Replace File dialog and allows you to replace the audio file on the current track with a new audio file This feature only replaces the actual audio All track timing effects and envelopes remain ee 8 Tip You can also replace a file by dragging an audio file from the Explorer and dropping it on the track
260. n the Audio Plug In window during automated effect playback To make automated frequency changes sound more natural use envelope fade curves to change the rate at which interpolation happens between two envelope points For a high to low frequency sweep use a fast fade curve between points and for a low to high frequency sweep use a slow curve Although the fast and slow curves are not logarithmic curves they are similar enough to make the frequency transitions sound more even For more information see Changing envelope fade curves on page 127 Effect automation is available only in ACID Pro software Ra Overriding compress expand This feature is available only in ACID Pro software One of the most powerful features of the software is its ability to compress or expand a loop while maintaining the loop s original pitch However you can override this feature in order to produce specific effects in your projects 1 Right click a track in the track list to view the track s Track Properties window 2 Click the Stretch tab 3 From the Stretching method drop down list choose Pitch shift segments The track s pitch will change in relation to the tempo of the project While this may seem like just a way of producing old school effects it actually has practical applications as well For example specifying Pitch shift segments can actually improve the fidelity of drum loops recorded at a tempo near the project tempo In addition overrid
261. n the new MIDI track 1 _ vP ES gt lt gt X4 lt lt 4Ss Tip You can also record MIDI using the step recording feature of the list editor plug in For more information see Step recording events on page 192 ee T WORKING WITH MIDI CHP 10 875 Changing MIDI track properties The General tab of the Track Properties window allows you to pitch shift or set a root note for a MIDI file in the same way you can with a loop or Beatmapped file In addition the General tab allows you to add delete and work with the tracks within the MIDI file You can mute solo rename and change channel volume or pan settings for individual tracks in a MIDI file Eo Track Properties MIDI Keys 01 A Reload Replace Piano Fall Editor List Editor General Pitch shift semitones Jo El x gt Track Name Chammel MutelSolo Wolme l RB Rook note Don t transpose 9 Copyright Mone Guitar EI a a a a e e L Attributes Type 1 7 Tracks strings Tempo 120 000 BPM Piano solo _ Size 0 42 KB Synth Brass L Ll Ll Ll ol File name MIDI Keys 01 mid Fretless Location CiDocuments and Settings sp Gle gt ll di Track Properties Chopper ACIDFX Explorer j ACID Fs Pitch shifting MIDI tracks You can chanee the pitch of all events on a MIDI track 1 Double click the MIDI icon E73 on the track header to open the Track
262. n the track view A dashed rectangular box appears on the track view and all events within and adjacent to it are selected While holding the left mouse button click and release the right mouse button referred to as toggle clicking The selection method changes to vertical and again all events within and adjacent to the selection area are selected Toggle click the mouse once more The selection method changes to horizontal and all events within and adjacent to the selection area are selected Creating time selections CHP 2 You are not limited to selecting events Frequently you may want to select only audio events occurring within a time selection You can do this using the Time Selection tool 1 Click the Time Selection Tool button 4El or choose Editing Tool from the Edit menu and choose Time Selection from the submenu The pointer displays with an adjacent cursor hp 2 Drag the mouse in the track view The selection area is highlighted on the track view Release the mouse button A time selection is created and all events within it are selected _ 4 Note If the selection area is automatically snapping to the track view s grid lines the ACID snapping feature is turned on You can turn snapping off by pressing F8 nnn E GETTING STARTED A AAA Creating event selections within time selections You can select specific events within a general time selection This technique is useful for sele
263. n this pan type as you move the pan point from the center to a channel the signal in the channel you are panning towards starts at the base dB level either O dB 3 dB or 6 dB and increases to O dB The signal in the channel you are panning away from starts at a base dB level either 0 dB 3 dB or 6 dB and decays to no signal level For example when you pan fully to the right only the right channel is audible This pan type uses a linear panning curve e The Constant Power pan type maintains a constant volume as you move the pan point from channel to channel This pan type which uses the constant power panning curve is most useful for panning monaural source media Using the grid to monitor panning The grid in the Surround Panner window helps you to visualize how your panning will sound The grid s spacing changes to match the current pan type The vertical lines represent the points where the left to right signal ratio is 6 dB 0 dB and 6 dB respectively at the far left line the left channel is 6 0 dB louder than the right channel The horizontal lines represent the points where the front to rear signal ratio is 6 dB 0 dB and 6 dB respectively As you adjust the Center fader the lines move forward or backward to compensate for the center channel gain o The grid assumes that you re using a correctly set up surround system matched speakers and ideal positioning Variations in your monitoring system will cause inconsist
264. nd mixer controls Tracks routed to mixer controls busses assignable effects or soft synths do not have surround panners panning for these tracks takes place on the mixer control Track list in 5 1 surround mode Mixer in 5 1 surround mode Se aco pR R El OL POS Mirer ES Vol 80d 1 Surround 44 100 Hz 16 Bit EN MED z anner e 4 ACID PROS E ie G T E p O Surround Master Vol 130d 10 Ql a Wr DANCE s E O I 44 ce Insert SR dE Insert Bus 41 Insert Soft Synth Synth Bass Front Rear Center hh nf Track routed o 38d dI LTE E Sa zero GRAM Ar O Track routed e E Male a BTR to Bus E S SunthPador E Ol MIDI track Yal 0 routed to soft synth Front L R Rear L R Center LFE Surround panners Routing to hardware in the mixer You must route the surround audio to the correct output in the mixer 1 From the Options menu choose Preferences 2 Click the Audio tab 3 From the Audio device type drop down list choose an audio device type other than Microsoft Sound Mapper such as Windows Classic Wave Driver 4 Choose the playback devices for the six surround channels e From the Default Stereo and Front playback device drop down list choose the appropriate device for the front left and right surround channels e From the Default Rear playback device drop down list choose the appropriate device for the rear left and right surround channels e From th
265. nd sliding events changing event properties and adding event envelopes o O V Note For the basic event editing topics in this chapter make sure that ripple editing is turned off Verify that the Ripple Edits command in the Options menu is not selected This feature is available only in ACID Pro and ACID Music Studio software For more information see Ripple editing on page 71 PP __ _ Copying events Copying an event a time selection or event within a time selection places an exact copy of the selected event s on the clipboard but leaves the track view unchanged Events copied to the clipboard can be pasted in the project an unlimited number of times In addition clipboard content remains on the clipboard until replaced by new content 1 Select the event data you want to copy or make a time selection For more information see Making selections on page 43 2 Copy the event data using any of the following methods e Click the Copy button on the toolbar e Choose Copy from the Edit menu e Right click the selection and choose Copy from the shortcut menu o Press C Pasting events The clipboard s contents can be pasted in a project an unlimited number of times However an event is always pasted in the track it was copied cut from In addition pasting the contents of the clipboard over an existing event results in the pasted event overlapping the existing event To avoid pasting over existing e
266. ne Glitches and other unexpected results can occur when sound effects are applied to files that contain DC offsets A unit used to represent a ratio between two numbers using a logarithmic scale For example when comparing the numbers 14 and 7 you could say 14 is two times greater than the number 7 or you could say 14 is 6 dB greater than the number 7 Where did we pull that 6 dB from Engineers use the equation dB 20 x log V1 V2 when comparing two instantaneous values Decibels are commonly used when dealing with sound because the ear perceives loudness in a logarithmic scale In ACID software most measurements are given in decibels For example if you want to double the amplitude of a sound you apply a 6 dB gain A sample value of 32 767 maximum positive sample value for 16 bit sound can be referred to as having a value of 0 dB Likewise a sample value of 16 384 can be referred to having a value of 6 dB A program that enables Windows to connect different hardware and software For example a sound card device driver is used by Windows software to control sound card recording and playback A system for delivering songs videos and other media over the Internet in a file format that protects copyrighted material Current proposals include some form of certificates that validate copyright ownership and restrict unauthorized redistribution A general term describing anything that alters digital data Signal processors have existe
267. ne to indicate that it has been reversed CHP 3 EDITING EVENTS IE OA Using event envelopes You can use envelopes on individual events Envelopes give you the ability to control each event s fade in fade out and overall volume Envelopes are useful for transitional effects between events by subtly fading out one event s volume while another fades in These envelopes are different than track envelopes because they affect only the event whereas track envelopes can affect multiple events on the track For more information see Using track envelopes on page 124 The event s volume level and fade curves are represented by a line on the event Setting an event s volume envelope You can control an event s overall volume by setting an envelope at the desired decibel dB level 1 Place the mouse pointer at the top of the event The envelope cursor 1 appears 2 Drag the volume line to the desired level As you drag the volume line the event s decibel level is displayed AS Banz 5 3 dB 3 Release the mouse to set the event s dB level After you set the event volume level you may change it later by dragging the envelope line Setting an event s fade in and out envelope curve You can control an event s envelope fade in and out characteristics by adjusting the event s envelope handles These handles allow you to control the length and dB level of fade ins and fade outs Also you can change the type of curve that the event use
268. ng as an ACID project file 6 Click Save The project is saved mnn Tip Once the project is saved you can use the Save As command from the File menu to create a copy of the project with a new name or save to a different ACID project file format pp T GETTING STARTED CHP 2 L B7 Rendering projects CHP 2 Rendering refers to the process of converting the ACID project into a file that is formatted for a specific playback method Possible playback methods include media player applications Internet streaming media CD ROM and CD audio When an ACID project is rendered it is not overwritten deleted or altered and you are able to return to the original project to make changes and re render 1 2 Enter a new name for the project in the File name From the Save as type drop down list choose the If the selected file type supports it you can choose From the File menu choose Render As The Render As dialog appears From the Save in drop down list choose the drive and folder where the file will be saved Save in 3 ACID Pro 5 0 Projects ef E box desired file format an encoding template from the Template drop down list or click Custom to create a new e Fil i SampleProject 5 template For more information see Creating custom pr m mnm Save as type Wave Microsoft wav Cancel rendering settings on page 58 Template Default Template Custom Select or
269. ng events 2 oe Z id A Ge Sati AAA AA had ee oe eae 194 WNGOING ANG h s le oe is a aros ios liceos 194 SYS VAL ALS A eae A ae eT tT ee a er eee 194 Loading third party OPT plUQ ANS oocccccccccc ee 195 TABLE OF CONTENTS e 9 Saving reloading or replacing MIDI Tiles 0 0 0 cece ee 196 Routing MIDI tracks to MIDI devices or soft synth controls 196 Resetting MIDI OOS lt lt lt 0 ccc eee eee eens 197 Rendering projects with MIDI tracks 0 000 cee eee eee eens 197 Playing MIDI from external devices 2 eee eens 198 Adding external devices as MIDI inputs 0 0 eee 198 Assigning MIDI inputs to soft synth controls 2 0 ce eee eee 198 Synchronizing using MIDI timecode 00 cece eee ees 199 Generating MIDI tmMecode 2002 A as 199 Triggering from MIDI timecode 0 00 cc ee eee eee eens 200 Generating MIDI Clock ache ddan ii alae ae ede td Ave dante 201 Working with Video 200 c eee eee ees 203 Managing VICO ria a Re ga Ee as a ne OS A ae we 203 Adding or replacing video Tiles 0 0 eee eee eee eens 203 Removing the VIdeo Tack cicle CAE AS 203 Hiding and showing the video track lt 203 Synchronizing audio and video TTT 203 Removing the video s audio 4 ks beet tue Pe eee ive tee dsd sabe 204 Changing frame numbering lt lt e e wet cia ba a eds 204 Editing VIGGO EVENTS cerdas dada 204 VIOVING VICO CV EMIS asia deis ES Ne so
270. ng routed to an assignable effect control The multipurpose slider defaults to displaying a track s volume control ACID tracks are preset to 6 0 decibels dB but the volume range is inf to 12 dB Each track s slider position is independent from the others however you can move sliders simultaneously by selecting multiple tracks before making your adjustment If you do not see this slider expand the track You may choose what the slider controls by clicking the slider label Changing the slider type for one track changes it for all tracks so you can compare levels of the same control across the project For more information see Adjusting the mix on page 48 Track view In the track view you can view and edit the events in a track The area in which events display is the timeline The track view contains other elements which are described in the following sections CHP 1 INTRODUCING ACID SOFTWARE 20 Loop bar Marker bar 125 G 4 4 Beat ruler DS juni D Tr bin Polhill hs rp ITE AO a aaia R K i nb NE gt gt 109 b gt hep hi p gt 1 00 00 45 00 01 00 00 01 15 00 01 30 4 ll Zoom controls gt gt il E Transport Time ruler if displayed Marker bar The marker bar runs the length of your project and contains the tags for markers and regions positioned along the project s timeline Beat ruler The beat ruler allows you to place
271. ng settings For more information see Using the Surround Panner window on page 212 3 Close the Surround Panner window aaas Tip You can also use the surround panner in the track header to pan your track eee Panning mixer controls You may choose to route tracks to busses or other mixer controls such as soft synths or assignable effect chains and pan them as a group rather than panning each track individually A eooo A Note When you route a track to a bus or soft synth control stereo two channel output is sent to the mixer control and the mixer control sends 5 1 six channel output to the Surround Master bus E 1 Add a mixer control to the project For more information see Using the Mixer on page 149 2 Route tracks to the mixer control For more information see Using the Mixer on page 149 3 Double click the surround panner on the mixer control to display the Surround Panner window CHP 12 WORKING WITH 5 1 SURROUND xl 44 100 Hz 16 Bit Em fel RL Sleet Fx QPinsert Bus Insert Soft Synth Double click to display the Surround Panner window O Surround Master 2 Bus A L Synth Bass El 0 Elke OQ 1 Center ln 4 Adjust the panning settings For more information see Using the Surround Panner window on page 212 5 Close the Surround Panner window E _ 4 Tip You can also use the surround panner on the mixer control to pan your track a Usin
272. ng small offsets creates various reverb effects e Configuring larger offsets creates interesting echoes 1 Right click a track and choose Duplicate Track from the shortcut menu A copy of the track is added to the track list 2 Hold Att while dragging the waveform of the duplicate track Notice that the waveform moves within the event which retains its size and position on the timeline 3 Experiment with different offsets between the duplicate tracks _ _ _ _ Y gt k Tip As with most tricks this method can be combined with pan and volume envelopes to produce an unlimited range of effects nnn T Creating ping pong pan effects You can use a pair of tracks to ping pong audio from one speaker to another 1 Right click a track and choose Duplicate Track from the shortcut menu A copy of the track is added to the track list 2 Use the multipurpose slider to pan the original track 100 right and the duplicate track 100 left 3 Use the Erase tool to erase every other beat alternating between the original and duplicate track _ _ ee Tip You can also use a pan envelope on a single track to create the same effect For more information see Using track envelopes on page 122 SE _ _ _ _ e ACID TIPS AND TRICKS APPENDIX B 239 depth with assignable effects This feature is available only in ACID Pro software You can add depth to your mix
273. nputs to soft synth controls This feature is available only in ACID Pro and ACID Music Studio software You can route MIDI input from an external device to any soft synth control in your project mnn Note You can assign both individual tracks and external MIDI devices to a single soft synth SS 1 In the Mixer window double click the soft synth icon on a control The Soft Synth Properties window appears 2 Click the External MIDI Input Port button S 7 and select the MIDI input device from the menu WORKING WITH MIDI CHP 10 999 Soloing MIDI device inputs External MIDI devices can be routed to multiple soft synths or MIDI thru devices Soloing a MIDI device input prevents your device from playing through other soft synths and MIDI thru devices soloing the input through the selected soft synth control You can solo MIDI input on more than one soft synth control if desired 1 Double click the soft synth icon on a control The Soft Synth Properties window appears 2 Click the Solo Listen to MIDI Input button Al R Synchronizing using MIDI timecode This feature is available only in ACID Pro software ACID software can generate MIDI timecode MTC and MIDI clock as well as trigger from MIDI timecode These features allow ACID software to be synchronized with other audio applications and external audio hardware _ _ a _ _o k Note The software canno
274. ns by telephone please call 608 256 5555 About your rights in ACID software ACID software is licensed to you under the terms of the End User License Agreement The End User License Agreement is first presented to you when you install the software Please review the End User License Agreement carefully as its terms affect your rights with respect to the software For your reference a copy of the End User License Agreement for ACID software is located at http www sony com mediasoftware About your privacy Sony Media Software respects your privacy and is committed to protecting personal information Your use of the software is governed by the Software Privacy Policy A copy of this policy is incorporated into the registration process and you are asked to agree to its terms prior to accepting the terms of the End User License Agreement Please review its contents carefully as its terms and conditions affect your rights with respect to the information that is collected by the software For your reference a copy of the Software Privacy Policy is located at http mediasoftware sonypictures com corporate privacy asp Proper use of software ACID software is not intended and should not be used for illegal or infringing purposes such as the illegal copying or sharing of copyrighted materials Using ACID software for such purposes is among other things against United States and international copyright laws and contrary to the terms and conditions
275. ns communicate song position data back and forth with sample level accuracy Position the cursor or create a loop region in the ACID timeline to indicate where you want playback to begin and then click Play Displaying the Soft Synth Properties window for a ReWire 2 0 Device When you add a ReWire 2 0 synths master bus as a soft synth bus you can double click the soft synth control icon 2 to display the Soft Synth Properties window where you can view the device s MIDI ports start or close the application or lock MIDI ports Click the Open ReWire Device Application button to start the device some synths cannot be started by a ReWire mixer application When you re finished editing in the Re Wire device application you can click this button again to close the ReWire application Select the Lock MIDI Port Configuration button a to lock MIDI ports so your ACID project does not lose port assignments due to dynamic changes from Re Wire devices Using ACID software as a ReWire device When ACID software is used as a ReWire device the output from your ACID mixer is output to a ReWire mixer application After you add the ACID synth to a ReWire mixer application the mixer application sends song position data to the ACID synth which sends its audio back to the ReWire mixer Because ACID software supports Re Wire 1 0 MIDI data is not sent to the mixer MIDI tracks are output as audio data through soft synths Impor
276. nt Track number type Track FX Track name Mute A Solo SGSELECTAIC El gt O LIR STI ae 1 C SJE ZERO GRAVITY El er O 1 Yolk 130dB Il Surround panner surround projects only Multipurpose slider Multipurpose slider mode View buttons View buttons These buttons control the track s appearance size on the track list and the track view Track number and type This area identifies the type of file loop one shot MIDI Beatmapped contained in the track as well as the track s number in the project You can quickly change the track order by dragging selected tracks within the track list Track type icons ERZ Loop One shot Beatmapped MIDI Track name When you add a file to a project the track name is initially the same name as the file s name Right click the track name and choose Rename from the shortcut menu or double click to change the track name Bus assignment Device selection Clicking the Bus Assignment button El and selecting a letter from the menu allows you to assign the corresponding track to the specified output bus However the button is only available in projects containing multiple busses For more information see Adding busses to the project on page 149 Bus assignment is available only in ACID Pro On a MIDI track the Device Selection button appears instead of the Bus Assignment button This button allows you to route a MIDI track to a soft synth
277. nt and leave the rest of it intact The easiest method of deleting a section of an event is to use the Erase tool 1 Click the Erase Tool button or choose Editing Tool from the Edit menu and choose Erase from the submenu The pointer displays as an eraser icon 2 Drag in the track view to delete event data o _ _______ lt Tip With the Erase tool you can delete an entire one shot Beatmapped or MIDI event Just hold while you click the event eee HR Moving events The position of the left edge of an event indicates when the event becomes audible during playback You can move events along the timeline either individually or as a group In addition you can stack events on top of one another A longer event placed over a smaller event conceals the smaller event and makes it inaudible A smaller event placed over a larger event is audible and renders the section of the longer event it covers inaudible 1 Click the Draw Tool button 4 2 Click the event to be moved The event is highlighted to indicate that it is selected 4 Tip You can hold or to select multiple events eee RL 3 Drag the event to a new location on the track 4 Note Multiple selected events move in relation to the event being dragged Y GETTING STARTED CHP 2 SS BZ Using the cursor The ACID cursor is a flashing vertical line that spans the track view of the entire project The cursor position de
278. nter ripple editing mode 2 Click the event to be cut or make a time selection To cut multiple events use the key the key or the Selection tool to select the events For more information see Selecting multiple events on page 44 3 Click the Cut button on the toolbar to cut the event s to the clipboard The cut events and their time information are removed from the selected track s and placed on the clipboard Existing events in the selected track s move forward to occupy the space created by the cut CHP 3 EDITING EVENTS 72 Cutting time selections in ripple editing mode Events within the time selection are reproduced and placed on the clipboard Also the time information is placed on the clipboard Existing events occurring after the time selection move forward in the project by the length of the time selection Events before cut Clipboard contents Events after cut Existing events adjust to occur sooner in the project Cutting time and event selections in ripple editing mode Events and portions of events within the time selection are reproduced and placed on the clipboard Also the time information is placed on the clipboard Existing events occurring later than the time selection move forward by the length of the time selection Only tracks containing selected events are affected by the ripple edit Events before cut Clipboard contents Events after cut Existing events on the top track adjus
279. nter your parameter Time in measures beats ticks where you want the event to begin MIDI channel 1 16 where you want to send the event Numeric value of the note you want to play For more information see MIDI notes and frequencies on page 191 Speed of the notes attack 0 127 Low values produce a soft attack high values produce a strong attack Speed of the note s release 0 127 Low values produce a soft release high values produce a staccato release Length of the note s sustain in measures beats ticks Time in measures beats ticks where you want the event to begin MIDI channel 1 16 where you want to send the event Parameter s most significant byte Parameter s least significant byte Value for the most significant byte Value for the least significant byte Time in measures beats ticks where you want the event to begin MIDI channel 1 16 where you want to send the event Parameter s most significant byte Parameter s least significant byte Value for the most significant byte Value for the least significant byte WORKING WITH MIDI 190 __ gt Pitch Bend Poly Pressure Program Change Editable parameter Start Time Channel Bank LSB Bank MSB Patch Start Time Pitch Start Time Channel Note Pressure Start Time Channel Patch Description Time in measures beats ticks where you want the event to begin MIDI channel 1 16 where you want to send the event Le
280. nth Properties window is displayed 2 Click the External MIDI Input Port button and choose a port from the menu If the port you want to use isn t displayed choose External MIDI Device Preferences from the menu The MIDI tab in the Preferences dialog is displayed so you can select a port in the Make these devices available for MIDI input section of the dialog a __ _ _ oauoom AA 4 Note This step is necessary only if the Auto MIDI imput routing check box on the MIDI tab of the Preferences dialog is not selected S lt lt _ 3 If you re using a VSTi soft synth select the Enable button on the Soft Synth Properties window to allow real time MIDI playback Soloing external MIDI inputs This feature is available only in ACID Pro and ACID Music Studio software Your external MIDI devices can be routed to multiple soft synth bus controls and MIDI thru devices Soloing an external input prevents your device from playing through other soft synths and MIDI thru devices LU P 1 Double click a soft synth icon on a control 1 in the Mixer window The Soft Synth Properties window is displayed 2 Click the Solo Listen to MIDI Input button 1 You can select the Solo Listen to MIDI Input button on additional soft synth bus controls to add them to the solo group a 4 Note This button is unavailable if the Auto MIDI mput routing check box on the MIDI tab of the Preferences dialog i
281. nu Note When rendering Windows Media files copyright information is based on the settings on the Summary tab of the ACID Project Properties dialog or the Index Summary tab of the Custom Template dialog The summary information from the Project Properties dialog will be used if information has been specified in both places To view this information during playback choose Now Playing Options from the Windows Media Player View menu and select the items you want to display Allows you to define an area in the RealPlayer video display that users can click to jump to another RealMedia file Allows you to define an area in the RealPlayer video display that users can click to jump to a Web page that you specify Allows you to define an area in the RealPlayer video display that users can click to jump to a point in the current RealMedia file WORKING IN THE TRACK VIEW 102 Sp Defining HotSpot commands Hotspots are defined using the following parameter syntax HotSpotPlay MM SS LEFT TOP RIGHT BOTTOM LABEL FILENAME HotSpotBrowse MM SS LEFT TOP RIGHT BOTTOM LABEL URL HotSpotSeek MM SS LEFT TOP RIGHT BOTTOM LABEL MM SS The Parameter box for a typical HotSpotBrowse command for a hotspot rectangle that is 50 pixels wide by 20 pixels tall and lasts for 10 seconds would look like this HotSpotBrowse 00 10 0 0 50 20 Sony http www sony com mediasoftware All parameters are optional except the last The hot
282. o a ReWire device application click the ReWire Devices tab and choose an installed ReWire 2 0 device from the list If you are using ACID Music Studio Route the soft synth control to a DLS or VSTi soft synth by choosing an available soft synth from the list 4 Click OK to return to the Soft Synth Properties window If you selected a VST instrument the VSTi synth is displayed in the Soft Synth Properties window and you can adjust the controls as necessary If you selected the DLS soft synth you can click the Open DLS Voice Set button 211 to choose a DLS voice set If you selected a ReWire 2 0 device the Soft Synth Properties window displays information about the synth s MIDI ports Click the Open ReWire Device button 4 to start the device some applications cannot be started by a ReWire mixer or select the Lock MIDI Port Configuration button _a to lock MIDI ports so the software does not lose port assignments due to dynamic changes from ReWire devices ReWire soft synths are available only in ACID Pro software Changing voice mapping for DLS soft synth controls You can choose a DLS set from anywhere on your system for output from a DLS soft synth control 1 Double click the soft synth icon on a control 2 The Soft Synth Properties window appears 2 Choose a DLS set from the Voice set drop down list or click the Open DLS Voice Set button 151 to browse toa DLS set a Note To set the current voice set as the default s
283. o and ACID Music Studio software This window displays plug ins and settings for track assignable bus and soft synth effects chains Display the Audio Plug In window by clicking a track s Track FX button by choosing Audio Plug In from the View menu or by pressing Alt 9 For more information see Using track effects on page 119 and Adding effects to soft synth mixer controls on page 161 Plug In Manager This feature is available only in ACID Pro software This window allows you to view and choose effects plug ins to be added to a track bus or assignable effects chain Display the Plug In Manager window by choosing Plug In Manager from the View menu or by pressing Ctrl Alt 1 Groove Pool This feature is available only in ACID Pro software This window allows you to view and edit the grooves in your project Display the Groove Pool by choosing Groove Pool from the View menu or by pressing Ctri A1t 2 The upper half of the Groove Pool window shows all of the groove maps currently in your project The lower half of the window displays the selected eroove map in the Groove Editor which allows you to make changes For more information see Working with grooves on page 139 Keyboard command reference The ACID keyboard commands are shortcuts that you can use while working on your project a A Important Some keyboard commands listed below are associated with features that are not available in all version
284. o fill output frame do not letterbox check box to have your video reformatted so that it fills the output frame size listed in the Description box When the check box is cleared the current aspect ratio is maintained and black borders are added to fill the extra frame area called letterboxing This check box is only available in ACID Pro software e If your project contains video and you see unacceptable artifacts in the rendered video you can clear the Fast video resizing check box Turning off this option can correct the artifacts but your rendering time will increase significantly This check box is only available in ACID Pro software Click Save A progress dialog appears GETTING STARTED 58y 8 When rendering is complete you can choose one of the following options e Click Open to start the associated media player and play the newly rendered file e Click Open Folder to open Windows Explorer and display the location of the newly rendered file Click Close to close the progress dialog and return to the ACID window Supported formats for rendering The following table briefly describes the file formats available for rendering a project Format Extension Description AIFF File aif The standard audio file format for audio used on Macintosh computers Available only in ACID Pro and ACID Music Studio software MPEG 1 and MPEG 2 mpg MPEG files are a format used when burning audio and video to a Video CD Super Video CD or DVD
285. o from CL 6 Groove Erase Tool EM Edit in Sound Forge 7 0 an Separator of Move Down 4 K K 2 On the Current toolbar buttons pane select the button that you want to move and click Move Up or Move Down Help ile kif 3 Click Close to save the toolbar changes and close the dialog APPENDIX A CUSTOMIZING ACID SOFTWARE 224 A gt Adding buttons to the toolbar A series of buttons are included that you may add to the toolbar These buttons are listed in the Customize Toolbar dialog You may also add separators on the toolbar to organize the buttons to suit your preferences You may return the toolbar to its default settings by clicking the Reset button on the dialog 1 From the Options menu choose Customize Toolbar The Customize Toolbar dialog appears 2 On the Available toolbar buttons pane use the scroll bars to locate the button that you want to add and select it 3 On the Current toolbar buttons pane select the button that you want the newly added button to proceed in order For example if you want to add the Save As button and want it to precede the Publish button select the Publish button in the Current toolbar buttons pane Customize Toolbar ajx Curent toolbar buttons ose Separator Reset Save As ine ete fe Render Ag HES cr Ex Project Properties tds p o ae in ORS S iz Ripple Edits Bie He Snap to Grid Only 4 Click Add The new button is add
286. o outputs e Three stereo sound cards There are several ways to set up your system depending on the sound card and speaker setup you are using Six powered speakers Six passive speakers with a six channel amplifier 5 1 compatible Connect powered speakers to your sound card s Connect your sound card s front rear and center subwoofer sound card outputs as indicated by your sound card s outputs to the appropriate inputs on a six channel amplifier documentation home theater receiver Connect front rear center and LFE speakers to the amplifier Sound card with Connect powered speakers to your sound card s Connect your sound card s outputs to the appropriate inputs on three stereo outputs where you have routed each of the pairs of a six channel amplifier nome theater receiver Connect front outputs channels The left channel of the Center LFE pair is the rear center and LFE speakers to the amplifier center channel the right channel is the LFE channel Three stereo Connect powered speakers to your sound cards Connect your sound card s outputs to the appropriate inputs on sound cards outputs where you have routed each of the pairs of a six channel amplifier nome theater receiver Connect front channels The left channel of the Center LFE pair is the rear center and LFE speakers to the amplifier center channel the right channel is the LFE channel Setting up surround projects You can configure an ACID project to use 5 1 surround in the
287. o side this pan type creates the illusion of the source moving around the listener from one side to the other in a semi circle This pan type uses the constant power panning curve You can choose a pan type as a default for all new tracks you create For more information see Setting default track properties on page 226 Using the Beatmapper CHP 7 When you add a file to a project that is longer than 30 seconds the Beatmapper Wizard starts This allows you to decide whether or not to add tempo information to the file The Beatmapper identifies a file s downbeats and measures allowing the file to stretch compress in conjunction with the project s tempo A file added without the Beatmapper behaves as a one shot maintaining its original length regardless of the project tempo 1 Add the file to your project The Beatmapper Wizard starts if the file is longer than 30 seconds LEE se Note You can change the file length that triggers the Beatmapper in the Audio tab of the Preferences dialog For more information see Using the Audio tab on page 229 cs Sp T Specify whether you want to use the Beatmapper Wizard e Select the Yes radio button and click Next to detect measures and downbeats e Select the No radio button and click Finish to close the Beatmapper and add the file as a one shot WORKING WITH TRACKS 132 gt ___ gt 3 Click the Play button to verify the downbeat marker s position If t
288. o the file when you save changes to a track in the Track Properties window For more information see Saving file properties on page 138 The following table describes each of the settings in the Event Properties dialog Item Description Start offset The Start offset for an event specifies a playback starting position that is different than the beginning of the file This is especially useful for loops you can change the feel of a loop by simply starting on beat two rather than beat one Pitch shift The Pitch shift value specifies a pitch shift for the selected event Event based pitch shift is calculated after the project Key and any pitch shift assigned to a track For more information see Changing tempo time signature and key on page 104 Quick fade edges to When you add an offset to an event so that it does not end on a loop point you prevent clicks can introduce an audible click at the edges of the event Select the Quick fade edges to prevent clicks check box and a quick fade in or fade out is performed on the event edges To adjust a quick fade zoom into the event and hover over the upper left or upper right corner of an event until the cursor is displayed as Drag the edge of the fade to adjust its duration For more information see Setting an event s fade in and out envelope curve on page 76 Reverse Select the Reverse check box to reverse the event s audio and peak data An arrow appears on the event in the timeli
289. odify the pattern matching you can edit the Auto lagPatterns xml file which is created in your My Documents Sony Media Libraries folder the first time the application starts a a Note Changing the selection of the Add tags and custom properties from files and Use file and folder names to apply tags automatically check boxes also changes the settings in the Media Manager Options dialog S N 9 Click the Search button to start adding files to the library 10 Click the Close button when you re finished A tag is automatically added to the Tag tree when you search The tag name will include the date and time of the search and all files that were added or updated in the library are marked with this tag CHP 4 USING THE MEDIA MANAGER 82 Removing media files from a library You can remove a reference to a media file from a library without affecting the media file itself 1 Select files in the Search Results pane to choose the files you want to delete e To select a single file click the file e To select multiple consecutive files click the first file hold the key and then click the last item e To select multiple files that are not consecutive hold the key and click each file 2 Right click a selected file and choose Remove from Library from the shortcut menu or press the key on your keyboard A confirmation dialog is displayed 3 Click OK to remove the selected files from the library Tagging media files Tagging hel
290. of the End User License Agreement Such activity may be punishable by law and may also subject you to the breach remedies set forth in the End User License Agreement Legal notices Vegas Vegas DVD DVD Architect Vegas Movie Studio Vegas Movie Studio Platinum Vegas Movie Studio DVD DVD Architect Studio ACID Music Studio ACIDized Sony Sound Series Groove Mapping Groove Cloning Media Manager CD Architect Sound Forge and Audio Studio are trademarks or registered trademarks of Madison Media Software Inc or its affiliates in the United States and other countries All other trademarks or registered trademarks are the property of their respective owners in the United States and other countries Thomson Fraunhofer MP3 MPEG Layer 3 audio coding technology licensed from Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson Supply of this product does not convey a license nor imply any right to distribute content created with this product in revenue generating broadcast systems terrestrial satellite cable and or other distribution channels streaming applications via internet intranets and or other networks other content distribution systems pay audio or audio on demand applications and the like or on physical media compact discs digital versatile discs semiconductor chips hard drives memory cards and the like An independent license for such use is required For details please visit http mp3licensing com Microsoft DirectX programming interface Por
291. older or to another application that is an OLE object linking and embedding drop target ae Double clicking a media file in the Search Results pane if the Double click in Search Results pane adds media to project check box is selected in the Media Manager Options dialog The file is added to the bottom of the track list Right clicking a media file in the Search Results pane and choose Add to Project from the shortcut menu The file is added to the bottom of the track list If the file is offline you ll be prompted to locate the file or choose a replacement For more information see Resolving offline media files below Resolving offline media files An offline media file is a file that is no longer available to the Media Manager Media may be classified as offline if you eject removable storage after adding a file to your library or change a file s name or location 1 Add media to your project or preview media files If any of the files are not accessible the Resolve Offline Media dialog is displayed with a listing of offline files and their status Icon Status Description T Offline The file listed in the Offline File column cannot be found The status will be Offline if you did not search or browse for a replacement file es Probable The file listed in the Offline File column will be replaced by the file listed in the Replacement Match File column A status of Probable Match indicates that the Media Manager tool found a
292. op button MA or press Space Selecting MIDI tracks As you view add or edit MIDI note events you must first select a track within the MIDI file to work with Choose a track from the Track drop down list to work with that track Adding note events You can add note events using the Draw tool 4 or the Paint tool 4 in the same way you do in the main ACID window Tip As you drag to create new events the event edge snaps to the divisions on the beat ruler To snap to smaller divisions click the Zoom In Time button 1 at the bottom of the window to zoom in more tightly Or to turn off snapping altogether click the Enable Snapping button to toggle it off EE T Drawing note events The Draw tool limits you to drawing one pitch at a time In other words you cannot drag up and down with the Draw tool to draw note events across several pitches at once 1 Click the Draw Tool button 4 The Draw tool is selected 2 Drag in the row for the pitch you wish to create A new note event appears as you drag WORKING WITH MIDI CHP 10 Ae Painting note events Unlike the Draw tool the Paint tool allows you to create note events across multiple pitches with a single drag of the mouse The Paint tool also allows you to select the note length you want to paint 1 Click the arrow adjacent to the Paint Tool button 4 and choose a note length to paint from the menu 2 Click the Paint Tool bu
293. or creative ways to use the Chopper see Slicing and dicing in the Chopper on page 243 This feature is only available in ACIDO Pro and ACID Music Studio software Working in the Chopper window Selecting a track automatically places it in the Chopper where it can be immediately manipulated and inserted into the track view ACID PRO 5 sPROMO 08 insert I Jlle l cece a lt Toolbar 1 1 31 51 71 g1 Beat ruler Transport bar Viewing the Chopper To display the Chopper choose Chopper from the View menu or press Alt 2 Changing the Chopper grid The Chopper s grid uses the same increments available on the track view To change the grid display right click the waveform area of the Chopper choose Grid Spacing from the shortcut menu and choose the desired display from the submenu Changing Chopper snapping options The snapping behavior of the track view and Chopper are linked To enable snapping in both components choose Snapping from the Options menu and choose Enable from the submenu or press F8 When snapping is turned on you can choose between snapping only to the grid or snapping to all elements For more information see Using snapping on page 103 CHP 6 USING THE CHOPPER DM Magnifying the Chopper There are three ways of adjusting the magnification of the Chopper e Click the Zoom In Time and Zoom Out Time buttons located in the lower right corner of the window e Click
294. or the Beatmapper 6 Click Next when the measure lengths are correct The Beatmapper adds tempo information to your file and displays some additional options 7 Specify your preferences for the following options e Select the Change project tempo to match Beatmapped track check box if you want to set your project tempo to match the tempo calculated by the Beatmapper Wizard Selecting the check box ensures that your Beatmapped track plays at the original tempo e Select the Preserve pitch of the Beatmapped track when tempo changes check box to maintain the track s original pitch regardless of the project s tempo e Select the Save Beatmapper information with file check box if you want the file to open with the Beatmapper settings each time you use the file 8 Click Finish to close the Beatmapper Wizard The file is added to the project as a Beatmapped track 9 Draw the event in the track view ee 4 Tip You can place the entire event by using the Paint 4 tool With the Paint tool selected press while you click once in the track to place the Beatmapped file T WORKING WITH TRACKS CHP 7 L 1 33 Understanding stretching properties All loops on the ACID CD ROM as well as all loop collection CD ROMs contain stretching properties This means that tempo and key information is stored in the loops allowing the application to accurately perform its time stretching compressing and pitch shifting functions on these loops
295. ording multiple 172 Tempo changes Marker 106 Project 105 Temporary files 36 235 Time Fitting projects to time 109 Inserting into projects 108 Time display 225 Time markers 99 Time ruler 20 221 Time signature changes Marker 106 Project 106 Timecode synchronization 199 201 Tips and tricks 237 246 Toolbar 17 223 225 Track list 18 Track Properties window 22 133 138 175 176 Track view 19 VI Tracks Adjusting bus send levels 150 Adjusting mix 48 Adjusting several simultaneously 50 Assigning to busses 18 149 Assigning to effect chains 152 Assigning to soft synth controls 159 beatmapped 39 Changing color 47 Changing pitch 108 color preferences 234 Copying cutting pasting 48 Default properties 226 Deleting 47 Device selection 18 Duplicating 47 Effects 119 123 Envelopes 124 130 folder 40 146 loops 39 MIDI 39 Muting 19 49 one shots 39 Panning 19 48 124 130 211 Properties 133 138 175 176 226 Renaming 47 Reordering 46 Resizing 47 Soloing 19 50 Stretching properties 133 137 Types 39 133 Volume 19 48 Transport bar 20 Transposing Beatmapped tracks to the project key 137 Keys within a project 106 Loop tracks to the project key 135 MIDI tracks to the project key 175 Project keys 106 Trimming events 68 Tutorials 15 U Undo 50 Undo history 51 V Video 203 206 Adding 203 Editing events 204 Frame numbering 204 Hid
296. ormation internally MP3 Windows Media Format WMA and WMV WAV WAV 64 SFA PCA Scott Studios For other file types the Media Manager tool will save metadata to an sfl file using the same base name as your media file Follow these steps to save tag and property information in your media file s 1 In the Search Results pane select media files for which you want to save tags and properties e To select a single file click the file e To select multiple consecutive files click the first file hold the key and then click the last item e To select multiple files that are not consecutive hold the key and click each file 2 Click the Save Tags and Properties to File s button in the top right corner of the Search Results pane Tags and other information from the Search Results pane is saved for the selected file s Backing up your media libraries Media Manager software automatically saves your library as you make changes so you don t need to tell the application explicitly to save your library as you re working However you can create a backup of the current library as a restore point or as a template to create new libraries 1 Click the Media Library Actions button w and choose Back Up Media Library from the menu The Back Up Media Library dialog is displayed 2 Choose a drive and folder from the Save in drop down list or use the browse window to locate the folder where you want to save your backup
297. orporation of America 1617 Sherman Avenue Madison WI 53704 USA The information contained in this manual is subject to change without notice and does not represent a guarantee or commitment on behalf of Madison Media Software Inc in any way All updates or additional information relating to the contents of this manual will be posted on the Sony Media Software web site located at http www sony com mediasoftware The software is provided to you under the terms of the End User License Agreement and Software Privacy Policy and must be used and or copied in accordance therewith Copying or distributing the software except as expressly described in the End User License Agreement is strictly prohibited No part of this manual may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purpose without the express written consent of Madison Media Software Inc Copyright 2005 Madison Media Software Inc Program Copyright 2005 Madison Media Software Inc All rights reserved 1 Table of Contents Introducing ACID Software e e ee 13 VUZ Te e MS ra aiii 13 System Te quirenentS Vicio st A AS ee EEEN 13 LISING this Mantal iia E a Ge baa Eee 13 Installing ACID sc joes acter cate Joe ned Oe REESE aes ead oe ote Gee eee een 14 Using online Melissa sah KONE eee haw bee nee nee dbase ees 14 ORME NO EE ded E E e cds 14 Whats This aT Te dc ds WK AA A is 15 HelboONine ebria ds 15 Snow Wie HOW tUtOrnalS sccsaiaddadaia caracas 15 Overview of
298. osition Be sure to set your cursor position before selecting events Attempting to set your cursor after selecting events causes you to lose your event selection Events before splitting Events after splitting Only the selected Events to events split be split at the cursor position Cursor position and split point Splitting a time selection Making a time selection allows you to split events at the time selection s in and out points across all tracks Events before splitting Events after splitting Loop bar Loop bar Split point Split point Splitting events within a time selection When selecting events within a time selection only the selected events in the time range split at the in and out points Events before splitting Events after splitting Selection bar Selection bar Event to be Only the selected split at the time event splits at selection s in and the in and out out points points In point Out point Split point E Split point EDITING EVENTS CHP 3 71 Joining events You may join events on ACID tracks that have been segmented along the timeline Joining events is an efficient way to redraw an event and remove any splits or silent regions between events You would want to join events if you decided that the event should play uninterrupted over the specified time range 1 Select the events or range of events that you want to join For more information see Selectin
299. ow lt r _ _ a Important Be aware that using non in place plug ins such as Time Stretch Pitch Shift without preserving duration and some Vibrato settings will cause audio to play out of synchronization with the waveform display in the timeline and with other tracks If an effects chain includes non in place plug ins the effects chain icon will be displayed as a r When using ACID software as a ReWire device any effects chain that includes non in place plug ins will be automatically bypassed to prevent synchronization problems with the ReWire mixer application The effects chain icon will be displayed as a Apply the plug ins within the ReWire mixer application SS OO Add all desired plug ins using one of the following methods e Double click the desired plug in e Drag the desired plug in to the chain area e Select the desired plug in and click Add r _ 4 Note If you have preset plug in chaims saved double click the Packaged Chains folder to view those presets For more information see Saving plug in chains as packages on page 164 ee Click OK The Plug In Chooser dialog closes The Audio Plug In window opens and displays the plug in chain USING THE MIXER 182 Ec gt 4 Click a specific plug in and adjust the effect s parameters manually or choose one of the presets from the Preset drop down list For more information about effect parameters click the P
300. ow to mute solo add effects to and adjust the volume of each soft synth A A Note If you receive an error that a MIDI port is currently in use when you try to play back your project check the MIDI tab in the Preferences dialog and verify that your ReWire device applications are not trying to access the same MIDI ports ACID software is configured to use ee T USING THE MIXER Lu 184 jp Adding soft synth controls to projects If you have no external MIDI devices defined a soft synth control is added with a default DLS voice set for you when you add a MIDI track to your project You can add more soft synth controls to a project as needed 1 Click the Insert Soft Synth button insert soft synth in the Mixer window The Soft Synth Chooser dialog appears 2 To add a DLS or VSTi soft synth click the Soft Synths tab and choose an available synth from the list To add a ReWire device application in ACID Pro click the ReWire Devices tab and choose an installed device application from the list a Note ReWire soft synths are available only in ACID Pro software VSTi soft synths are available only in ACID Pro and ACID Music Studio software eee eae 3 Click OK E Note If the VST instrument you want to use does not appear in the list click VSTi Preferences For more information see Locating VST instruments on page 158 If the ReWire panel application you want to use does not appear in the list see Locating ReWi
301. owing actions to display the Tag Chooser dialog e Click an empty palette button pim e Click an existing button and choose Choose Tag from the shortcut menu 2 Select the tag you want to assign to the button 3 Click the OK button Clearing a button Right click a palette button and choose Clear from the shortcut menu Deleting a saved palette 1 Right click a palette button and choose Delete Current Palette from the shortcut menu 2 Click the OK button when prompted to delete the palette from your library CHP 4 USING THE MEDIA MANAGER AAA Saving tags and properties to media files Saving tags and properties to files makes all your organization portable if tags and custom properties are saved to files that information will be preserved in the files and can be added to the library by selecting the Add tags and custom properties from files check box in the Add Files to Media Library dialog Saving tags and properties to files affects only the current media library and libraries that you create after saving the information If you have multiple libraries you can add embedded tags and custom columns to existing libraries by opening the desired library and rescanning your media folders with the Add tags and custom properties from files check box selected in the Add Files to Media Library dialog Embedded file properties are also updated when you preview or add media to a project The following file formats can store this type of inf
302. p Marker GLOSSARY 2 _ gt A quick way to perform certain operations using the mouse To drag and drop you click and hold an item drag it hold the left mouse button down and move the mouse and drop it let go of the mouse button at another position on the screen The difference between the maximum and minimum signal levels It can refer to a musical performance high volume vs low volume signals or to electrical equipment peak level before distortion vs noise floor For example orchestral music has a wide dynamic range while thrash metal has a very small always loud range Envelopes allow you to automate the change of a certain parameter over time In the case of volume you can create a fade out which requires a change over time by adding an envelope and creating a point in the line to indicate where the fade starts Then you pull the end point of the envelope down to inf Equalizing a sound file is a process by which certain frequency bands are raised or lowered in level EQ has various uses The most common use for ACID users is to simply adjust the subjective timbral qualities of a sound An instance of a media file on a track An event may play an entire media file or a portion of the file A file format specifies the way in which data is stored In Windows the most common audio file format is the Microsoft WAV format Audio uses frame rates only for the purposes of synching to video or other audio To
303. perties window to apply the ACID 5 0 beat detection algorithm to the loop _ _ _ _ _ gt O Note Groove maps are applied nondestructively If you want to change a media files s inherent groove use the Render to new track command to render a new grooved media file pms _ o O Important Grooves cannot be applied to Beatmapped tracks A WORKING WITH TRACKS 140 gt Applying a groove to an entire track 1 From the View menu choose Groove Pool to display the Groove Pool window if it isn t already visible 2 Drag a groove from the Groove Pool window to a track You can drop the groove in the track list or on the timeline A groove event is displayed at the bottom of the track to indicate that a groove has been applied to the track To toggle the height of the groove strips choose Show Full Size Groove Strips from the View menu 4 Tips Drag a groove from the Groove Pool to an existing groove event to change the event s groove Right click and drag with the Groove tool to erase a groove event Hold and right click a groove event with the Groove tool to erase the entire event Hold and click a groove event with the Groove Erase tool S to erase the entire event ol G Gaaaoaoaw_ gt _ Setting a default groove for new tracks If you have a groove that you d like to use to set the overall feel of a project you can set it as a default for
304. pinner control to adjust the pitch of all events on the track Adjusting stretching properties for loop or Beatmapped tracks The Stretch tab allows you to specify how pitch shifting and time stretching is handled for loop or Beatmapped tracks After you have edited a file s properties click the Save File button H to embed ACID information with the file mnn Tip To save to a different file click the Save File As button Al O T Ifyou cannot or do not wish to embed ACID information with the file you can set the properties to suit your needs and they will be saved with the ACID project but not with the file This means however that you must set the properties for every project where you use the loop Configuring the stretching properties and clicking the Save File button allows you to set and forget the properties so the properties will be set for any project If you edit the file in another audio editing program ACID specific data may be removed If this occurs simply set the stretching properties again and click the Save File button fl mnn Note The Stretch tab for Beatmapped tracks is essentially the Beatmapper without the wizard Oe WORKING WITH TRACKS CHP 7 JJJJJ A 135 Stretching properties for loop tracks The following table describes the settings on the Stretch tab for loop files CHP 7 Item Root note Number of beats Stre
305. plorer window to locate preview and add media to your project You can also extract audio from a CD or download media from the Web If you have ACID Pro software you can also use the Media Manager to locate and add media files Previewing media from the Explorer window The Explorer window allows you to preview files in looped playback at the current project tempo before adding them to your project You can also preview files in the Explorer in conjunction with playing your project thereby allowing you to preview how a file will sound in the project To preview files use the Start Preview Stop Preview and Auto Preview buttons at the top of the Explorer window Previewing a media file 1 Select the media file in the Explorer window that you want to preview 2 Click the Start Preview button The media file begins looped playback You can monitor its levels on the preview bus 3 Click the Stop Preview button to end playback Previewing multiple media files You can use the Explorer s multiple selection preview feature to preview a group of files in the order that you select them 1 From the Options menu choose Preferences In ACID Pro software click the Other tab of the Preferences dialog and select the Enable multiple selection preview in Explorer window check box In ACID Music Studio or ACID XMC software click the Audio tab of the Preferences dialog and select the Enable multiple selection prev
306. problems _ ___ 22222 Note When effects are bypassed you can choose whether bypassed effects remain open When the Keep bypassed FX running check box on the General tab of the Preferences dialog is selected effects remain open so you can bypass enable effects with no pause for A B testing When the check box is cleared effects are fully bypassed conserving processing power S lt lt lt GETTING STARTED CHP 2 ss Using the Mixer window The Mixer window is a dockable window with a default location in the lower right corner of the ACID workspace The Mixer window contains the following controls e A Preview fader which allows you to adjust the loudness of media files previewed from the Explorer window Track Properties window Beatmapper or the Chopper tool Also the Preview fader s volume determines the volume of new tracks added to the project unless you have set a default track volume level For more information see Setting default track properties on page 226 This allows you to set up a quick mix while you are adding media to your project A Master bus fader which controls the overall volume Faders for up to 26 project busses when added to the project Available only in ACID Pro Faders for up to 32 assignable effect chains when added to the project Available only in ACID Pro Faders for up to 32 soft synth controls when added to the project The function of the bus assignable effect and soft synth contro
307. ps you classify your media files For example if you wanted to keep track of loops played by a specific instrument you could create a tag with the name of the instrument and apply it to the appropriate loops Similarly you could create tags for genres moods seasons client names locations scenes performer names and so on When you create a new library a default tag tree is displayed in the Tags pane You can create your own tags to customize the tags for your needs Tags are the fastest way to search a media library and they require very little disk space Tags are saved in your media library If a media file exists in multiple libraries tagging the media file in one library has no effect on the other libraries unless you save the tags to the files and use the Add Files to Media Library dialog to update tags and custom properties for all files AA Tip If you want to see which tags are associated with a file as you re adding or removing tags drag the Tags column in the Search Results pane to the left so you can see the Name and Tags columns at the same time pp Creating a tag Adding tags creates new tags in the current library only 1 Click the Add Tag button to add a new tag to the tree Ifa tag is selected the new tag will be added below the selected tag If no tag is selected the new tag will be added to the bottom of the tag tree 2 Type a name for the tag 3 Press Enter 4 If you want to change the icon
308. quist Frequency instead of hearing a high pitch you may hear a low frequency rumble To prevent aliasing an anti aliasing filter is used to remove high frequencies before recording Once the sound has been recorded aliasing distortion is impossible to remove without also removing other frequencies from the sound This same anti aliasing filter must be applied when resampling to a lower sample rate ASIO Audio Stream In Out is a low latency driver model developed by Steinberg Media Technologies AG ASF Stream Redirector file See Redirector File The attack of a sound is the initial portion of the sound Percussive sounds drums piano guitar plucks are said to have a fast attack This means that the sound reaches its maximum amplitude in a very short time Sounds that slowly swell up in volume soft strings and wind sounds are said to have a slow attack A decrease in the level of a signal The Audio Compression Manager from Microsoft is a standard interface for audio compression and signal processing for Microsoft Windows The ACM can be used by Windows programs to compress and decompress WAV files GLOSSARY Audio Interchange File Format AIFF Audio Proxy File sfapO Bandwidth Beatmapped track Beats Per Minute BPM Bit Bit Depth Buffer Bus Byte Clipboard Clipping Codec Compression Ratio audio GLOSSARY 248yz gt An audio file format developed by Apple See Proxy
309. r and drag the increment arrow length to four beats Click Insert Selection button insert Press to shift the selection right by the length of the insert increment arrow Repeat steps five and six as desired Place the file from track two in the Chopper Repeat steps four through six to insert events from track two 10 Select all events on the two beatmapped tracks in the track view 11 Press F Crossfades are created between your events oo EE CRIADA Creating pseudo granular synthesis 1 2 3 Create a sixty fourth note or shorter selection in the Chopper Click the Insert Selection button insert Use the Shift Selection Left and Shift Selection Right buttons to move the selection randomly through the track clicking the Insert Selection button Mime to insert events APPENDIX B ACID TIPS AND TRICKS 246 _ gt R Building instrument solos This feature is available only in ACID Pro and ACID Music Studio software The previous section described an extended technique to create challenging rhythmic variations in your projects You can use a slightly different version of the slice and dice technique to build instrument solos for your projects To demonstrate this let s start with an event containing a simple bass riff 1 Slice and dice the file in the Chopper to create new riffs and add them to the project For more information see Using the Chopper on p
310. r application a USING THE MIXER 1 E J Adding plug in chains 1 Click the FX button H on the mixer control The Plug In Chooser dialog appears 2 Select the plug ins that you want to add The selected plug ins appear in the chain area There are three ways to add a plug in to the chain e Double click the plug in e Drag the plug in to the chain area e Select the plug in and click Add mnn Tip If you have saved any plug in chain packages double click the Packaged Chains folder to view those packages For more information see Saving plug in chains as packages on page 164 nnn T 3 Click OK to close the Plug In Chooser dialog The Audio Plug In window opens and displays the plug in chain 4 Click a specific plug in and adjust the effect s parameters manually or choose one of the presets from the Preset drop down list For more information about effect parameters click the Plug In Help button in the Audio Plug In window a Tip You can save an effect s parameters as a preset to be used in other projects To save a preset enter a name in the Preset box and click the Save Preset button H E 5 Click the Close button J to close the Audio Plug In window Adding plug ins to existing plug in chains 1 Click the FX button 4 on the mixer control The Audio Plug In window appears 2 Click the Edit Chain button The Plug In Chooser dialog appears 3 Add the desired plug in s to the chain 4 Click
311. r by track or by event type Filtering the list by track Choose a track from the Track drop down list to view only the events for that track CHP 10 WORKING WITH MIDI w835 Filtering the list by event type 1 Click the Event Filter button The MIDI Event Filter dialog appears MIDI events bo hide DU Control Change D Patch Change i C Poly Pressure i C After Touch Pitch Bend D Packed NRPN D Packed APN Sysex H O Meta H O Channels cei 2 Select the check box for an event type to hide that type or clear the check box to display that event type 3 Click OK The list is filtered according to the criteria you selected Editing events Once you have located a particular event you can edit the parameters of the event as needed 1 Click in the event row you want to edit 2 Click the Edit Event button 41 The Edit MIDI Event dialog appears _ _ a _o gt ee Tip You can also double click an event s Message parameter to open the Edit Event dialog pp 3 Edit the values in the dialog For more information see Event parameters on page 189 4 Click OK The event updates to the new values A Tip You can edit individual parameters in columns other than Message by double clicking the parameter and entering a new value one _ _ WORKING WITH MIDI CHP 10 e 189 Event parameters The table below describes the
312. r each event type that you do not want to chase during playback Clear a check box to chase events of that type 3 Click OK to close the Chase Event Filter dialog Filtering MIDI events during playback You can choose to filter out certain event types when you play MIDI from the General tab 1 Click the Playback Filter button to display the MIDI Event Filter dialog 2 Select the check box for each event type that you want to exclude during playback Clear a check box to include events of that type 3 Click OK to close the MIDI Event Filter dialog Using the piano roll editor This feature is available only in ACID Pro and ACID Music Studio software The Piano Roll Editor tab on the Track Properties window allows you to view and edit a MIDI file The top pane of the piano roll editor displays MIDI information in the manner of a piano roll for a player piano Each note is represented by a rectangular note event of a certain length and pitch The piano keys along the left side of the window indicate the pitch of a note event The beat ruler across the top of the window shows the length and location of a note event The lower pane of the piano roll editor displays velocity information for each note event A transport bar for previewing MIDI appears at the bottom of the window WORKING WITH MIDI CHP 10 179 Viewing the piano roll editor 1 Double click the MIDI icon E3 on the track header to open the Track Properties
313. r saturation Icon color tint CUSTOMIZING ACID SOFTWARE Description Use these controls to change the default colors used to display tracks in your project Select a track from the Track drop down list and then click the color swatch to display a color picker You can choose any color using the RGBA or HSLA controls or click the eyedropper to sample a color from your screen When you click OK or Apply all tracks that used the selected color are updated To customize an envelope s color select an envelope from the Envelope type drop down list Click the color button to the right to display the Envelope Color dialog and choose a custom color Drag the slider to adjust the color intensity of icons in the ACID window Drag to the left to decrease the color saturation or drag to the right to increase it Drag the slider to adjust the amount of tinting that is applied to the icons in the ACID window Drag the slider to the right to add an average of the title bar colors to the icons Drag to the left to decrease the amount of tinting applied APPENDIX A e 235 Using the Other tab Item Enable multiple selection preview in Explorer window Using the Folders tab Item Default project folder Default groove folder Use a single default folder for project media saves Use separate defaults for each type of project media save Temporary files folder Free storage space in selected folder APPENDIX A This tab i
314. racks to assignable effect controls 0 00 c cece eee eee eens 152 Routing assignable effect controls to busses 2 2 cc eee 152 Deleting assignable effect controls nrnna anann eee ee eee eee eeeeeees 152 Using soft synth controlS 1 0 eee eens 153 Adding soft synth controls to projectS 0 cc eee eee eens 154 Modifying soft synth control properties lt e e eect eee eens 154 Deleting sort Synth Controls Aa Ho SS wes eis R clado 159 Routing MIDI tracks to soft synth controls lt e 2 0 cece eee eee nee 159 Using mixer CONTO ries erate A A A ee ee eee 160 Working with Mer contro lSisidasas loto 160 Adding effects to soft synth mixer Controls ccc eee eens 161 Working with multiple mixer controls e e e cece eee eee eee eee e eee e eens 165 Automating mixer controls in track VIEW e eee eee eee nnen 165 Working WIE REWI arias riada 166 Using ACID software as a ReWire mixer 220 c cece eee eee eee eens 166 Using ACID software as a ReWire device 2 ccc eee eee eens 167 TABLE OF CONTENTS 3 lt IK Recording in ACID Software xs e cece eee ees 169 RECOraiNg audio id A a ee eee ES 169 Setting ACID recording properties 0 00 ces 170 Setting recording levels ronca fades ia eae ere a er eee aes 171 Recording multiple takes 0200 172 Reviewing and Saving Takes ccc eee eee eens 172 Working wi
315. rameters appears 4 Select the Bypass check box and click OK An envelope for the Bypass parameter of the effect appears on the track 5 Add multiple points to the envelope For more information see Adding envelope points on page 126 6 Adjust the envelope points to alternate between bypassing the effect Bypass True and processing the effect Bypass False For more information see Adjusting individual envelope points on page 127 Preview the effect The track alternates cleanly between processing the effect and bypassing the effect You can repeat the pattern by copying and pasting the envelope points repeatedly For more information see Cutting copying and pasting envelope points on page 128 ACID TIPS AND TRICKS APPENDIX B L 243 Ra Making automated frequency changes more natural This feature is available only in ACID Pro software When you automate an effect s frequency parameters such as the frequency parameters in the track EQ effect you may notice that the frequency changes are more apparent moving through the lower frequencies than the higher frequencies Without getting too technical frequency scales in track EQ and other plug ins use a logarithmic scale instead of a linear scale Since effect automation uses linear interpolation an effect s automated frequency parameter will sound as if it sweeps through the lower frequencies faster than the high frequencies You can visualize this if you watch the plug in settings i
316. ranging and editing loop based music The power of the application stems from its ability to take any audio loop and make it fit into the tempo of a project You no longer need to lock yourself into a tempo and go through great pains to make your loops and samples fit ACID software will take all of your audio and make it match any tempo you choose in real time S Information or features unique to ACID Pro software are indicated by this icon Information or features unique to ACID Music Studio software are indicated by this icon a Information or features unique to ACID XMC are indicated by this icon Information or features unique to ACID XPress are indicated by this icon New features The Contents tab provides a list of available help topics Double click a closed book to open the pages and then click a topic page 211 The Index tab provides a complete listing of the help topics available Scroll through the list of available topics or type a word in the Type in the keyword to find box to quickly locate topics related to that word Select the topic and click _bisplas The Search tab allows you to enter a keyword and display all of the topics in the online help that contain the keyword you have entered Type a keyword in the Type in the word s to search for box and click List Topics Select the topic from the list and click Bse _ The Favorites tab allows you to keep topics that you revisit often in a separate
317. re CD track or MIDI file on an ACID track with a single click 1 Add a long file such as a CD track or MIDI file to your ACID project For more information see Adding media to the project on page 36 2 Click the Paint Tool button 4 The Paint tool is selected 3 Press and click in the track The entire file is painted onto the track at the position you clicked a Note In a Beatmapped track the file is painted starting from the location you identified as the downbeat If the file contains pick up notes drag the left edge of the event to reveal audio before the downbeat E A lt _ e o Playing with duplicate tracks You can duplicate a track in your ACID project and then use the new track to create some interesting effects Detuning paired tracks Detuning a paired track is a quick and easy way to thicken an audio track without adding the additional processing of effects This trick works extremely well with synths pads strings and ambient sounds but you can also experiment with it to add body to drums basses and horns 1 Right click a track and choose Duplicate Track from the shortcut menu A copy of the track is added to the track list The new track is the currently selected track 2 Use the and keys on your numeric keypad to change the pitch of the duplicated track Octave intervals e g 12 12 24 typically sound best when working with pitched audio however experimentin
318. re are three ways to add media files from the Open dialog e Select the desired file and click Open e Right click the selected file and choose Select from the shortcut menu e Double click the selected file Adding media files from outside the application You can also add a media file to a project by dragging it from Windows Explorer to the track view Adding multiple media files simultaneously To add multiple media files to the project Ctrl click or Shift click to select the files and drag them to the track view or the track list CHP 2 GETTING STARTED 3 __ _ _ gt Extracting media files from CD You can extract 44 100 Hz 16 bit stereo data from CDs Extracted CD tracks are added to new tracks in your ACID project 1 Insert a CD in the CD ROM drive 2 From the File menu choose Extract Audio from CD The Extract Audio from CD dialog appears 3 If you have more than one CD drive choose the CD drive that contains the audio you want to extract from the Drive drop down list 4 From the Action drop down list choose how you Extract ATE want to extract audio Action Read by track sl Ii e Choose Read by track and select each track you pace le send Cancel want to extract Each track is extracted to a new 7 0002 00 0224 35 S 4 y i 03 24 35 08 08 35 track in your project 080835 1110 27 redi i 11 10 27 14 44 62 ne e Choose Read entire disc to extract the current CD 144462 182337 s i 18 33 37 21
319. re panel applications for use in ACID software on page 166 EE CDC SC Ss Modifying soft synth control properties Once you add a soft synth control to your project you can use the Soft Synths Properties window to change the DLS VSTi or ReWire 2 0 soft synth used by the control or you can configure soft synths for external input from a MIDI controller Soft synths that are routed to VST instruments available only in ACID Pro and ACID Music Studio or ReWire 2 0 panel applications available only in ACID Pro inherit voicing information Soft synths that are routed to the DLS DirectX soft synth can be voiced using DLS or DLS 2 files Accessing the Soft Synth Properties window You can display the Soft Synth Properties window by double clicking the soft synth icon on a Mixer control or by right clicking the icon and choosing Soft Synth Properties from the shortcut menu USING THE MIXER CHP 8 L 155 Changing the soft synth control routing This feature is available only in ACID Pro and ACID Music Studio software 1 Double click the soft synth icon on a control The Soft Synth Properties window appears 2 Click the Edit Soft Synth button Edit sat synth The Soft Synth Chooser dialog appears 3 If you are using ACID Pro e Route the soft synth control to a DLS or VSTi soft synth by clicking the Soft Synths tab and choosing an available soft synth from the list OR e Route the soft synth control t
320. removed e To select a single tag click the tag e To select multiple consecutive tags click the first tag hold the key and then click the last tag e To select multiple tags that are not consecutive hold the key and click each tag 2 Click the Delete Selected Tag button to delete the tag from the current library A confirmation dialog is displayed 3 Click OK to remove the selected tags from the library Merging subtags Merging tags combines a selected tag with its subtags and removes the subtags from your library permanently To merge a tag with its subtags right click the tag and choose Merge Subtags into Selected Tag from the shortcut menu All subtags are combined with the main tag and the subtags are removed from the library All media formerly associated with the subtags is associated with the main tag Arranging tags in the tag tree Tags are displayed in a tree view in the Media Manager window You can organize tags hierarchically click the Expand button in the Search pane to expand a list or click the Collapse button E in the Search pane to hide an expanded list You can drag copy and paste tags within the list to arrange them and create parent and child tags You can also display tags in a palette view by clicking the Change Tags View button l Editing tag names or images 1 Double click a tag or right click a tag and choose Edit from the shortcut menu to display the Tag Editor dialog
321. rmation see Saving command properties as a custom template on page 100 e From the Command drop down list choose the type of command For more information see Defining streaming media commands on page 101 e Enter parameters in the Parameter box to define the behavior of the command e Enter your own notes or comments in the Comment box e Specify the timing of the command in the Position box Command markers are automatically set to the current cursor position unless you change this value 4 Click OK The new command marker appears on the command bar After you create a command marker you can move the marker by dragging it to a new location Editing command marker properties Double click any command marker to open the Command Properties dialog and edit its contents You can also right click a command marker and choose Edit from the shortcut menu Saving command properties as a custom template If you plan to use a command more than once you can save command properties as a template You can then reuse the command properties by selecting the template from the Template drop down list 1 Create a command and complete the Command Properties dialog 2 Click in the Template box and enter a name for the template 3 Click the Save Template button E _ _ ___ _ ooo Tip Your metadata command templates are saved in the cmdtemp xml file in the ACID program folder You can edit this file
322. rom the track view and discarded Reversing events You can select events in the timeline and reverse their audio and peak data Select an event in the timeline right click and choose Reverse or press B from the shortcut menu An arrow appears on the event in the timeline to indicate that it has been reversed Trimming events Whereas deleting allows you to select event data to be removed from the project trimming allows you to select the data that remains Trimming is performed by creating a time selection or selecting an event within a time selection and subsequently deleting all unselected data 1 Create a time selection or select specific events within a time selection For more information see Creating time selections on page 45 2 Press T to trim the data within the selection All unselected event data is removed from the track view and discarded Splitting events Splitting is a quick way to create independently functioning events from a single one You might consider splitting an event if you want to adjust a small part of the track For example you may want to apply pitch shift to a guitar track for a few measures and then return the track to its original setting Splitting occurs at the cursor position or at the in and out points of a time selection When you split an event a new ending point is created for the original event and creates a starting point for the newly created event When you split an event
323. roperties Event 75 MIDI track 175 176 Project 33 Recording 170 Track 133 138 Proxy file 252 Publishing projects 59 Q Quantizing MIDI In the list editor 194 In the piano roll editor 184 R Recording 169 172 MIDI step recording 192 MIDI tracks 174 Multiple takes 172 Properties 170 Setting levels 171 Redo 51 Reference library 87 Sony Sound Series Loops and Samples 87 Regions 102 103 In the Chopper 113 Reloading Media files 138 MIDI files 196 Removing Audio from a video 204 Video tracks 203 Renaming Mixer controls 54 Tracks 47 Tracks in MIDI files 176 Rendering MIDI projects 197 Projects 57 Supported formats 58 Surround projects 217 To new tracks 147 Using custom settings 58 Reordering tracks 46 Replacing Media files 138 MIDI files 196 Resetting MIDI ports 197 Resizing Tracks 47 Windows 221 Reversing events 68 ReWire 166 ACID as a device 167 ACID as a mixer 166 ReWire panel applications inserting as soft synth 166 Locating for use in ACID 166 opening 166 Ripping tracks from CD 38 Ripple editing 71 74 Cutting events 71 Deleting events 72 Pasting events 73 Ruler offset 221 Sample rate 34 INDEX vi _ _ __ As Saving Changes to MIDI files 196 Plug in packages 123 164 Presets 162 Projects 56 Track properties to media files 138 Scoring video 206 Search pane autohiding 93 automatically hiding
324. rround Pan Keyframes from the submenu Deleting keyframes Right click a keyframe and choose Delete from the shortcut menu WORKING WITH 5 1 SURROUND CHP 12 a 217 Rendering surround projects 5 1 surround projects are rendered to produce six monaural files WAV or AIFF You can then use an authoring application to create the final cinema DVD Audio DVD Video or DTS 5 1 Music project from the rendered files With the addition of the Sony 5 1 Surround Plug In Pack you can render AC 3 files and burn the resulting files to DVD o 7 Note Before rendering your surround project check your surround authoring application s documentation to determine its required audio format with respect to the LFE channel For more information see Setting up surround projects on page 208 SS SSS From the File menu choose Render As The Render As dialog appears From the Save in drop down list choose the drive and folder where the file will be saved Enter a new name for the project in the File name box KR OU N From the Save as type drop down list choose the desired file format AIFF or WAV If you have the Sony AC 3 Encoder you can choose AC 3 from the list as well 5 If necessary click Custom to customize the rendering settings For more information see Creating custom rendering settings on page 58 mnn Note You are limited to creating monaural files when rendering a surround project AAA 6 Click Save
325. rt bar at the bottom of the list editor to preview your MIDI As you preview the list editor highlights the current note being played Previewing a selection in looped playback You can preview a selection in looped playback just as you would in the main ACID window 1 Click the Loop Playback button to turn on looped playback 2 Define the loop region e Select the event where you want the loop to start and click the Mark Loop Start button 17 e Select the event where you want the loop to end and click the Mark Loop End button Ed The loop boxes in the lower right corner of the window display the loop start loop end and loop length values 3 Select the event where you want to begin playback and click the transport bar s Play button or press Space The piano roll editor begins playback and loops the marked selection To stop playback click the transport bar s Stop button or press Space Previewing events You can preview individual note events within the MIDI file 1 Select the Enable Real Time MIDI button SJ at the top of the Track Properties window 2 In the list editor click the Monitor button 4 to turn on the event monitor 3 Click anywhere in an event row to play the event Filtering the list A MIDI file can contain a dizzying number of individual events You can speed the task of locating events in the list editor by applying a filter You can filter what the list editor displays eithe
326. rties The General tab displays information about the file associated with a track and allows you to change the track type except for MIDI track types apply pitch shifting to all events on the track and adjust time stretching for Beatmapped tracks Changing track type For non MIDI tracks choose a setting from the Track type drop down list to change the way the track is handled Track Type Description Loop When you select Loop the track is transposed to the key of the project and stretches the track to fit the project tempo Loops can be drawn across the track and will repeat end to end One Shot When you select One Shot the track is streamed from the hard disk rather than storing it in RAM if it is longer than thirty seconds One shot files do not change tempo with the rest of the loops and are not transposed to the project key The Stretch tab is not available when One Shot is selected Beatmapped When you add a file that is longer than 30 seconds to a project the Beatmapper Wizard allows you to add tempo information to the file CHP 7 WORKING WITH TRACKS 134 gt Adjusting time stretching Beatmapped tracks only If you want to preserve the track s pitch while you adjust the tempo select the Preserve pitch when stretching check box When the check box is cleared you can still adjust the tempo of the track but the pitch is also affected Adjusting pitch shift Enter a value in the Pitch Shift box or use the s
327. rties to 138 searching 88 tagging 82 Media libraries tagging files 82 Media library adding media files 80 backing up 86 creating new 79 opening 79 removing media files 82 INDEX II _ _ AA Media Manager 37 79 adding custom columns 94 adding media from 92 automatically hiding Search pane 93 customizing view 93 moving columns 93 Moving the Search pane 93 options 94 resizing columns 93 resolving offline media 92 searching for media files 88 showing hiding columns 94 Media Manager window 22 Meter resolution 160 MIDI 173 199 201 Adding tracks 173 DES sets 196 List editor 186 194 Notes and frequencies 191 OPT plug ins 195 Panic button 197 Piano roll editor 178 185 Playback devices 196 Playing from external devices 198 Preferences 230 Quantizing 184 194 Recording 174 Rendering 197 Resetting ports 197 Routing to hardware 196 Signal flow 31 32 Step recording 192 Timecode synchronization 199 201 Track properties 175 176 Tracks 39 MIDI tracks Device selection 18 Mixer window 53 55 149 165 Automating controls 165 Routing surround through 209 Working with mixer controls 160 Working with multiple controls 165 Mixing to a single track 147 Monitor for video editing 206 Moving Events 42 Tracks 46 Multipurpose slider 19 48 Muting Mixer controls 160 Tracks 19 49 Tracks in MIDI files 177 O Offsetting tracks 238
328. s Description Keys Go to beginning of active loop Home region or viewable area if no selection Go to end of active loop region or End viewable area if no selection Toggle cursor between beginning Numeric keypad 5 and end of loop region Time select loop region when Time Shift Q Selection tool is selected Toggle previous selection Backspace Go to beginning of project W or Ctrl Home Go to end of project Ctrl End Move left by grid marks Page Up Move right by grid marks Page Down Go to Ctrl G using measures beats and ticks Go to Shift G using absolute time Set end of time selection Ctrl Shift G using measures beats and ticks when Time Selection tool is selected Event editing commands Description Keys Paint the entire media length for all Ctrl click in timeline media except video only when Paint tool is selected Select Draw tool Ctrl D Select next edit tool in list D Select previous edit tool in list Shift D Undo Ctrl Z Redo Ctrl Shift Z Cut selection Ctrl X Copy selection Ctrl C Copy event Ctrl drag Paste from clipboard Ctrl V Paste repeat from clipboard Ctrl B Paste insert Ctrl Shift V Insert event at cursor De Paste event at cursor Shift Y Description Center in view Move cursor to corresponding marker or select corresponding region Move left right one pixel Move to marker s Move left right to event edit points including fade edges Move through a video event one frame at a
329. s of ACID software For information on a specific feature and its availability please refer to the description of the feature in this manual nnn General commands Description Keys Display online help Fi Display What sThis help Shift F1 and click an item Refresh screen F5 Shortcut menu Shift F10 Temporarily suspend snapping Shift drag Project file commands Description Keys Description Keys Create new project Ctrl N Save project Ctrl S Create new project and bypass the Ctrl Shift N Open project properties Alt Enter Project Properties dialog Open existing project or media file Ctrl O Close the current project Ctrl F4 CHP 1 INTRODUCING ACID SOFTWARE Description Show Explorer window Show Chopper window Show Mixer window Show Video Video Preview window Show Media Manager window Show Track Properties window Show Surround Panner window Show Soft Synth Properties window Show Audio Plug In window Show Plug In Manager window Show Groove Pool window Shift focus forward through open ACID windows Shift focus backward through open ACID windows Shift focus forward clockwise through track list timeline bus track timeline and bus track list when track view or timeline has focus Shift focus backward counterclockwise through track list bus track list bus track timeline and timeline when track view or timeline has focus Keys Alt 1 Alt 2 Alt 3 Alt 4 Alt 5 Alt 6 Alt 7 Alt 8 Alt 9
330. s or MIDI check boxes to indicate the types of media you want to add Clear a check box to exclude that type of media file Files that contain audio and video streams will be added if either or both of the Audio or Video check boxes are selected 6 Specify whether you want to search for new files or all files e Select the New files only radio button if you want to search only for new media files Files that already exist in the media library will be skipped e Select the All files radio button if you want to search for all media files in the specified folder New media files will be added and files that already exist in the media library will be searched to determine whether their properties have changed 7 Select the Add tags and custom properties from files check box if you want to add tags and custom columns saved in the media files to your library For more information about tagging media please see Tagging media files on page 82 For information about adding custom columns to the Search Results pane see Adding custom columns on page 94 8 Select the Use file and folder names to apply tags automatically check box if you want to automatically tag files based on the file path For example when this check box is selected a loop saved in the d Noops drums hi hats folder would have the tags Drums and Hi Hats applied when it is added to the library Some synonyms and variant spellings will be resolved automatically If you need to m
331. s selected or if you have not selected an external MIDI imput port eee KA A Deleting soft synth controls Just as you can add soft synth controls to a project at any time you can also delete superfluous soft synth controls When you delete a soft synth control from a project tracks assigned to it are reassigned to the first soft synth control in the Mixer window To delete a soft synth control right click the control in the mixer and choose Delete from the shortcut menu or select the control and press Delete Routing MIDI tracks to soft synth controls If your project contains multiple soft synth controls you can assign each MIDI track to a specific soft synth control To assign a track to a soft synth control click the Device Selection button 1 on the track header and choose the desired soft synth control from the menu For more information see Routing MIDI tracks to MIDI devices or soft synth controls on page 196 CHP 8 USING THE MIXER 160 r Using mixer controls Although busses assignable effects and soft synth controls are used to accomplish different tasks they have many features in common You can adjust fader levels mute or solo audio and apply effects on all mixer controls In addition you can select multiple mixer controls to apply changes to several controls simultaneously You can also view mixer controls in track view in order to automate them Working with mixer controls You can adjust solo and m
332. s available only in ACID Pro software Description Select this check box if you want to preview multiple selected files in the Explorer Enter values in the Number of times to repeat each Loop Seconds of each One Shot to play and Number of Beatmapped measures to play boxes to specify how different file types are previewed Description This box displays the path to the folder that will be used for creating new projects Click the Browse button to choose a different folder This box displays the path to the folder where default grooves for new ACID projects are saved Click the Browse button to choose a different folder This folder is also used as the default location for saving exported grooves from the Groove Pool window Select this radio button if you want to save all project media in a single folder Select this radio button if you want to choose where to save each type of project media The following boxes display the location where each type of media file will be saved Record This box displays the path to the folder that will be used when you record new audio or MIDI tracks Click the Browse button to choose a different folder Render to new _ This box displays the path to the folder that will be used when you render to a new track Click the Browse button to choose a different folder Chop to new This box displays the path to the folder that will be used when you create new tracks with the Chopper window Click the
333. s markers regions and snapping options You ll also learn about the different ways to change a project s tempo key and time signature Finally you ll learn several options for adjusting the project timeline Using project markers and regions ACID markers and regions identify areas of your project and provide navigational cues for quickly finding those areas After you insert markers and regions you may adjust their position along the project s timeline and label them with meaningful names for your reference Marker type Description Marker standard Jill This isa marker The Sena Markers identify specific reference points in your project Points that you may 2 want to identify are introductions bridges refrains choruses or whatever us you choose Time marker D I Time markers are fixed to the time ruler and mark absolute time in your project They are very useful when scoring video Command marker Command markers indicate when an instruction or function occurs in a TEXT This is a command marker f i streaming media file 25 1 SSS ES SE Regions Regions subdivide your project into time segments Regions have in and out points which allow them to function as permanent time selections EJ This is a region marker 3 Working with standard markers Markers are tools that can make creating music easier by identifying specific points along the project s timeline They can be named moved and serve as snap and
334. s to control the volume s fade characteristics 1 Place the mouse pointer on the upper corner of the event The envelope cursor appears 2 Drag the envelope cursor and position the envelope curve As you drag the cursor the following information is displayed e The event decibel level e The length in measures beats ticks of the fade in or fade out J Gain at 1 2 000 is 0 0 dE 3 Release the mouse to set the fade in or fade out characteristics Changing the event s fade curve type You can set an event s fade curves fast linear slow smooth or sharp that are used to raise or lower the volume over time Right click the fade region select Fade Type from the shortcut menu and choose the appropriate fade curve from the submenu EDITING EVENTS CHP 3 17 Creating crossfades between events You can quickly create crossfades between overlapping events painted on different tracks 1 Select two events The events must overlap but do not need to be on adjacent tracks 2 Press F The end of the first event fades out and the second event fades in For creative ways to use crossfades see Creating DJ style crossfades on page 245 CHP 3 EDITING EVENTS 79 gt __A A EDITING EVENTS CHP 3 79 CHAPTER E Using the Media Manager UE ues S pane E A A 39 This chapter covers the management and tagging of your media files in ACID Pro software using the Media Manager
335. se Gate e Paragraphic EQ de Parametric EQ Ay Pitch Shift ff Resonant Filter Ereverb Simple Delay hd Smooth Enhance e Time Stretch Remove Save As BS Track Compressor HS Track EQ HS Track Noise Gate CHS vibrato His Wave Hammer e Select the plug in and click the Add button Select the plug ins that you want to add There are three ways to add a plug in to the chain Rearrange the order of plug ins as needed by dragging plug ins to different locations in the chain or by selecting a plug in and clicking the Shift Plug In Left and Shift Plug In Right buttons the settings for the plug in last selected on the Plug In Chooser dialog Click OK The Plug In Chooser dialog closes The Audio Plug In window displays the plug in chain and Click a specific plug in and adjust the effect s parameters manually or choose one of the presets from the Preset drop down list For more information about effect parameters click the Plug In Help button 21 in the Audio Plug In window mnn Tip You can save an effect s parameters as a preset to be used in other projects To save a preset enter a name in the Preset box and click the Save Preset button ee Click the Close button HJ to close the Audio Plug In window You can use a track effect chain as a default for all new tracks you create For more information see Setting default track properties on page 226 Automating plug in parame
336. se the level of magnification click the Zoom Out Track Height button INTRODUCING ACID SOFTWARE CHP 1 nnn 3 aaae Note Double clicking the horizontal or vertical scroll bars adjusts the magnification so that as much of the project either horizontally or vertically is displayed as possible Ee N Click the Zoom Tool button 41 in the corner of the track view to temporarily change the cursor into the Zoom tool After you select an area of the track view to magnify the cursor reverts to the previously active tool a 4 Note Double clicking the Zoom tool adjusts both the horizontal and vertical magnification so that as much of the project is displayed as possible et Ka Window docking area This area allows you to keep frequently used windows available while working on a project Windows can be docked side by side or in stacks in the windows docking area For more information see Docking and floating ACID windows on page 220 Docking windows are available only in ACID Pro software The windows in ACID Music Studio and ACID XMC software are displayed in fixed positions in the lower portion of the window Click the Close button to remove aK x y TN Landscape window from a floating dock or the window docking area A VS Landscape Dl way Landsc landscape 02 wav Landsc Bi Lander aps 03 way Landsc Py Landscape 04 aw Landsc Landscape OS way Landsc B Lander aps O68 way
337. seconds on the time ruler and hold Att while dragging the marker to 5 1 on the beat ruler the project s tempo is adjusted so the first beat of measure five occurs at ten seconds Working with command markers CHP 5 This feature is available only in ACID Pro and ACID Music Studio software Command markers add interactivity to a multimedia presentation streamed over the Internet As your media plays any number of other actions can be programmed to execute These commands are a part of the Windows Media and RealMedia streaming formats Most frequently these actions add text or open a related Web site The specific commands available vary depending on the final format of your project e Note Streaming media files can be played back from a hard drive or CD ROM but in order to stream properly across the Internet the file must be on a streaming media server Check with your internet service provider for details and availability of this service e E WORKING IN THE TRACK VIEW 100 Placing command markers Command markers appear on the command ruler which is above the marker bar URL command marker URL bip wi sony com mediasoftware Commana ruler L Marker bar 1 Position the cursor where you want to place the command marker 2 From the Insert menu choose Command or press C 3 Complete the Command Properties dialog e From the Template drop down list choose a custom template For more info
338. selection or project is mixed down to a new track and a copy of the file is saved in the folder specified As the tracks are being mixed down a status bar appears in the lower left corner of the ACID window a _ __o JJJJJ___ lt Tip You may cancel the Mateok S rendering process by e clicking the Cancel button 37 Rendering New tack 2 wav e I on the status bar 4 SA e T After the new track is mixed down it appears at the bottom of the track view If you mixed down the entire project you may delete or mute the other tracks from the project as they are all contained on the new track 5 Use the Draw 4 tool to paint the waveform on the new track Ra Exporting loops This feature is available only in ACID Pro software From the File menu choose Export Loops to create new loops using the original loop media files in your ACID project A new loop file is created for every tempo change in the project which can result in multiple loop files being created from a single loop media file 1 From the File menu choose Export Loops The Export Loops dialog appears From the Save in drop down list choose the drive or folder to which the new files will be saved 2 3 4 From the Save as type drop down list choose the file format From the Template drop down list choose an audio format or click Custom to create custom rendering settings Click Save A progress dialog appe
339. signable effect chain panning is available only in 5 1 surround projects In 5 1 surround projects assignable effect chains routed to the Surround Master bus send surround panning six channel information Assignable effect chains routed to busses e g Bus A send stereo panning two channel information e Bus panning is available only in 5 1 surround projects In 5 1 surround projects busses routed to the Surround Master bus send surround panning six channel information Busses routed to hardware send stereo panning two channel information INTRODUCING ACID SOFTWARE CHP 1 31 MIDI signal flow Track Volume Device or Soft Synth Assignment Soft Synth External MIDI Device DLS Voice Set Soft Synth Bus Audio Bus Volume Master Bus From FX FX Chain Bus Hardware Output Master Bus FX Chain Gain Mute Hardware Output CHP 1 INTRODUCING ACID SOFTWARE 32 pS Notes on MIDI signal flow e Soft synth panning is available only in 5 1 surround projects In 5 1 surround projects soft synth controls routed to the Surround Master bus send surround panning six channel information Soft synth controls routed to busses e g Bus A send stereo panning two channel information e Bus panning is available only in 5 1 surround projects In 5 1 surround projects busses routed to the Surround Master bus send surround panning six channel information Busses routed to hardware send stereo panning t
340. sor 4 appears 2 Add an envelope point in one of the following ways e Double click the envelope e Right click the envelope and choose Add Point from the shortcut menu o O Tip If you add too many points you may delete a point by right clicking it and choosing Delete from the shortcut menu You may also clear all envelope points by selecting Reset All from the shortcut menu EA A A lt 0 e WORKING WITH TRACKS CHP 7 L 1 27 CHP 7 Adjusting individual envelope points You can set the level of each envelope point by dragging it up or down As you move an envelope point a tooltip displays both the point s occurrence on the timeline and its level Wolume at 1 3 0000 12 1 1 dB Other ways to set the level include e Right click an envelope point and choose a setting from the shortcut menu e Choose Select All from the shortcut menu to raise or lower all points on the envelope e Right click an envelope point and choose Set To from the shortcut menu This displays a box in which you can specify a setting You can adjust an envelope point s location on the timeline by dragging it right or left If snapping is enabled the envelope point snaps to time divisions as you drag Hold while dragging to override snapping For more information see Using snapping on page 103 Flipping envelopes You can flip an envelope to invert the envelope around its center 1 Right click an envelope A shortcut men
341. spot defaults to the entire duration of the file and the entire video frame if the duration and dimensions are not specified Adjusting tempo to match cursor to marker Position the cursor right click the marker tab and choose Adjust tempo to match cursor to marker from the shortcut menu The project tempo changes so that the cursor position matches the selected command marker Deleting command markers To delete a command marker right click the marker and choose Delete from the shortcut menu Working with regions Regions are useful tools that allow you to subdivide your project into time sections by designating in and out points along the timeline Regions can function as permanent time selections for playback and editing purposes Like markers regions can serve as reference points and may be moved named and provide snap points for the cursor and events When you place regions they are automatically numbered in the order that you place them Placing and moving regions Regions are placed at the start and end points of a loop region time selection You may place a region in one of the following ways e From the Insert menu choose Region e Right click the marker bar choose Markers Regions from the shortcut menu and choose Insert Region from the submenu e Press R Region start Region end Loop region After you place a region you may change its position by dragging the region tag to the desired position rr a Tip
342. stance from the center of the surround panner Arrow keys Moves front back left right Ctrl Arrow keys Makes fine adjustments Page Up Page Down Moves front back Shift Page Up Page Down Moves left right Numeric keypad 1 9 Jumps to a corner edge or center of the surround panner Ctrl Numeric keypad 1 3 7 9 Jumps to a location on the maximally inscribed circle a constant radius at the greatest possible distance from the center of the surround panner Mouse wheel Moves front back Shift mouse wheel Moves left right Ctrl mouse wheel Makes fine front back adjustments Ctrl Shift mouse wheel Makes fine left right adjustments CHP 12 WORKING WITH 5 1 SURROUND 214 AA Choosing pan types When you pan a track or mixer control you can choose among several pan types to determine how the audio is panned The current pan type appears at the bottom of the Surround Panner window Right click the Surround Panner window and choose a pan type from the shortcut menu e The Add Channels pan type makes the audio appear to move as a unit among the surround channels As you move the pan point toward a channel speaker icon more and more of the signal from the other channels are folded into the channel you are panning towards until at the extreme all channels are fed at full intensity into a single channel This pan type uses a linear panning curve e The Balance pan type is most useful for adjusting the relative signal levels of the channels I
343. t to occur sooner in the project Deleting events in ripple editing mode Deleting events or portions of events removes them and their time information from their respective tracks However this information is not placed on the clipboard Existing events move forward when you delete material from a selected track 1 From the Options menu choose Ripple Edits to enter ripple editing mode 2 Click the event to be deleted or make a time selection To cut multiple events use the key the key or the Selection tool to select the events For more information see Selecting multiple events on page 44 3 Press to delete the event s Deleting time selections in ripple editing mode Events within the time selection and their time information are removed from the project Existing events occurring after the time selection move forward in the project by the length of the time selection When information is deleted it is not placed on the clipboard Events before delete Clipboard contents Events after delete Deleted information is not placed on the clipboard Existing events adjust to occur sooner in the project EDITING EVENTS CHP 3 7 3 Deleting time and event selections in ripple editing mode Events within the time selection and their time information are removed from the project Existing events occurring after the time selection move forward in the project by the length of the time selection When informatio
344. t chase MTC or MIDI clock oo E Generating MIDI timecode MIDI timecode is a standard timecode that most applications and some hardware devices use to synchronize themselves Stable MTC is generated at all available frame rates for other applications to chase 1 Specify a MIDI output device to which you will send timecode and a frame rate for the timecode These options can be found on the Sync tab of the Preferences dialog For more information see Using the Sync tab on page 232 2 From the Options menu choose Timecode and choose Generate MIDI Timecode from the submenu MTC begins generating wherever you click the Play button Generating MTC with an offset In some cases you may want to start sending timecode with an offset e g 01 00 00 00 to allow time for multiple devices to synchronize You can create an offset on the ACID time ruler to accomplish this For more information see Using the ruler offset on page 221 CHP 10 WORKING WITH MIDI 2 r Viewing outgoing timecode You can view outgoing timecode in the time display located directly above the track list Right click the time display and choose MIDI Timecode Out from the shortcut menu to display outgoing MTC time 00 00 00 000 1 1 000 Edit Cursor Position Beats Chrl 6 Edit Cursor Position Time ShiFk Time at Cursor Format e Time at Cursor MIDI Timecode Out MIDI Clock Gut MIDI Timecode In Generate MIDI Timecode F
345. t number of ticks per quarter note MIDI clock is convenient for synchronizing devices that need to perform tempo changes mid song MIDI clock out is supported but MIDI clock in is not A MIDI port is the physical MIDI connection on a piece of MIDI hardware This port can be a MIDI in out or through Your computer must have a MIDI capable card to output MIDI timecode to an external device or to receive MIDI timecode from an external device MTC is an addendum to the MIDI 1 0 specification and provides a way to specify absolute time for synchronizing MIDI capable applications MTC is essentially a MIDI representation of SMPTE timecode Multiple bit rate encoding also known as Intelligent Streaming for the Windows Media platform and SureStream for the RealMedia G2 platform allows you to create a single file that contains streams for several bit rates A multiple bit rate file can accommodate users with different Internet connection speeds or these files can automatically change to a different bit rate to compensate for network congestion without interrupting playback To take advantage of multiple bit rate encoding you must publish your media files to a Windows Media server or a RealServerG2 A standard language of control messages that provides for communication between any MIDI compliant devices Anything from synthesizers to lights to factory equipment can be controlled via MIDI Refers to raising the volume so that the highest l
346. t the current volume of the Preview fader in the Mixer window unless you have set a default track volume level For more information see Setting default track properties on page 226 There are several methods of adding media files to a project ee AR Note Proxy files may be created for media whose compression scheme may cause working with them to be inefficient and slow For more information see Proxy File on page 252 PPP _ _ _ _ _ _ _ gt gt o O Note Before using long Beatmapped or long one shot files from CDs or shared network folders copy the media to your local drive for the best possible performance a ACID temporary files When you add a media file to a project from a removable device a copy of the media file is stored in the temporary files folder This keeps the media file available for use even if the source of the media is no longer accessible Be aware that the temporary files folder is cleared when you close the ACID application However files are not cleared from the folder if the software closes inappropriately mnn Note You can customize the location of the temporary files folder For more information see Using the General tab on page 227 ee GETTING STARTED CHP 2 a B Y Adding media files from the Explorer window You can use the Explorer window which operates similarly to the Windows Explorer to locate media files for use in projects Display the Explorer if needed
347. ta is placed on the clipboard it can be pasted back into the project an unlimited number of times Clipboard content remains on the clipboard until it is replaced by new data 1 Select the event data you want to cut or make a time selection For more information see Making selections on page 43 2 Cut the event data using any of the following methods e Click the Cut button 4 on the toolbar e Choose Cut from the Edit menu e Right click the selection and choose Cut from the shortcut menu e Press X All selected events are removed from the track view and placed on the clipboard CHP 3 EDITING EVENTS 69 HS Deleting events Deleting an event a time selection or an event within a time selection removes the data from the track view and discards it Deleted events are not placed on the clipboard and do not replace or interfere with current clipboard content In addition deleted events cannot be pasted back into a project _ _ 4 Note Deleted data can only be replaced in a project using the Undo command For more information see Using undo on page 50 aa Oe 1 Select the event data you want to delete or make a time selection For more information see Making selections on page 43 2 Delete the event data using any of the following methods e Choose Delete from the Edit menu e Right click the selected event and choose Delete from the shortcut menu e Press Delete All selected events are removed f
348. tains the identical tabs and parameters as the New Project dialog SSS hi Using the Summary tab This tab allows you to enter information about the project These boxes may be left blank or if information exists you may change it at any time Item Description Title Enter the name or title of the project Artist Enter the name of the narrator band or artist s being recorded into the project Engineer Enter the name s of the people who mixed and edited the project Copyright Enter the date and ownership rights of the project Comments Enter information that identifies and describes the project Universal Product Code Media Enter the Universal Product Code UPC and the Media Catalog Number MCN to Catalog Number be written to your CD for identification purposes Start all new projects with these Select this check box if your projects requirements do not change or you want settings consistent settings for future projects CHP 2 GETTING STARTED B gt Using the Audio tab This tab allows you to set different characteristics the project uses to handle the audio Item Master bus mode Description Choose either Stereo for a standard audio project or 5 1 Surround for a surround Number of additional stereo busses project Available only in ACID Pro software Enter the number of stereo busses that you want in your project You may add up to 26 busses The busses appear in the Mixer window For more information see
349. tant notes e You must start your ReWire mixer application before starting ACID software e When ACID software is connected to a ReWire mixer application the ACID project will automatically use the mixer application s bit depth and sample rate Saving the ACID project in ReWire mode will not overwrite the project s original bit depth and sample rate e Ifa ReWire mixer application starts ACID software that ACID window will start in ReWire mode and cannot be switched from ReWire mode If a ReWire mixer connects to an existing ACID window that window will run in ReWire mode and you can switch out of ReWire mode if necessary If you exit that instance of the software and start ACID software again the new instance will start in ReWire mode and CHP 8 USING THE MIXER 168 r you can switch out of ReWire mode if necessary You can switch out of ReWire mode by choosing a new setting from the Audio device type drop down list on the Audio tab of the Preferences dialog e The ACID Tempo control below the track list is not available in ReWire Device mode Tempo information is provided by the ReWire mixer application e Ifa ReWire mixer application includes a tempo map video and long one shot tracks in your ACID project will lose synchronization with looped material Using ACID software as a ReWire mixer or in an ACID project without Re Wire will resolve the issue e When using ACID software as a ReWire device any effects chain that includes no
350. tching method Transient sensitivity Timing tightness Stretch spacing Redetect Beats Description Choose a note from the drop down list to set the base note for loops that you want to conform to the project key If you do not want a track transposed to the project Key a track that contains a drum sample for example choose Don t transpose Choose a setting from the drop down list to specify the length of the original file Selecting a value that does not match the actual file causes the loop to play at a different speed For example specifying a length of 8 beats for a 4 beat loop causes the loop to play at half speed at any given tempo You can misinform the software regarding the beat length of a loop for creative ends For more information see Playing double time half time on page 239 Stretching properties determine how time compression and expansion is performed on audio events If you hear audio anomalies due to time compression try editing the stretching properties of the track Looping segments is the default stretching method and it works well with most types of material The track media is divided into sections that are crossfaded and some sections may be looped if necessary to achieve the necessary length Choose Nonlooping segments for sustaining material such as synthesizer pads and held notes The track media is divided into sections that are crossfaded but no sections are looped Choose Pitch shift segments to shi
351. tcut menu The track or mixer control is assigned to the LFE channel To change a track or mixer control back to surround panning right click the LFE indicator and choose Surround Pan from the shortcut menu AQ SR Note Before rendering your surround project check your surround authoring application s documentation to determine its required audio format with respect to the LFE channel For more information see Setting up surround projects on page 208 o _ T Panning audio You can pan audio in a 5 1 surround project in two ways e Pan tracks individually using the Surround Panner window e Route tracks to mixer controls busses assignable effect chains or soft synths and pan the mixer controls using the Surround Panner window r 4 Note You cannot pan audio on tracks or busses that are routed to hardware outputs in a 5 1 surround project Eee II _ S S SS SSS S aaa aa _ lt ir WORKING WITH 5 1 SURROUND CHP 12 L 211 Panning tracks 1 Double click the surround panner on the track you wish to pan The Surround Panner window appears 2 ACIDPROS5 El O ES Vol 3008 1 Double click to display LJ ACID PRO 5 sPROMO 08 Lo Ho Jaco Pros He QP 6 4 the Surround co H Panner window Gey NV DANCE s El Yo 8 8908 dl are ZERO GRAY A de O vol 13 0d8 ee Z cJ SpnthPad ot 74 Gg UL Center Int 2 Adjust the panni
352. te using the Chopper and insert into the track view The insertion point also referred to as the cursor position is analogous to the cursor in a word processor It is where markers or commands may be inserted depending on the operation The insertion point appears as a vertical flashing black line and can be moved by clicking the left mouse button anywhere in the track view Loops are small audio clips that are designed to create a repeating beat or pattern Loops are usually one to four measures long and are stored completely in RAM for playback A marker is an anchored accessible reference point in a file APPENDIX C MIDI Channel Media Control Interface MCI Media File MIDI Clock MIDI Port MIDI Timecode MTC Multiple Bit Rate Encoding Musical Instrument Device Interface MIDI Normalize Nyquist Frequency Offline Media One Shot OPT Plug In Pan APPENDIX C 251 An informational pathway over which MIDI data can travel A standard way for Windows programs to communicate with multimedia devices such as sound cards and CD players If a device has an MCI device driver it can easily be controlled by most multimedia Windows software Files that may be placed within the ACID project After a media file is placed into the project it is referred to as an event A MIDI device specific timing reference MIDI Clock is not absolute time like MIDI timecode MTC instead it is a tempo dependen
353. termines where events split where playback recording starts and where clipboard contents are pasted In addition the positioning of the cursor is essential to the creation of time selections Positioning the cursor with the mouse 1 Click the Draw Tool button 4 2 Click in the track view to position the cursor Positioning the cursor with the keyboard While using the mouse to position the cursor in the timeline is quick and intuitive it is not always precise For example you may want the beginning of a guitar solo to coincide with a snare drum hit or background vocals to enter exactly 3 minutes and 24 seconds into a song For these reasons you can also position the cursor using your keyboard For more information see Cursor placement loop region and time selection commands on page 25 Positioning the cursor with the Go To command The Go To command is used to place the cursor at a specific location in the ACID project o Press G to position the cursor based on the position displayed on the beat ruler Specify a position in measures beats ticks format in the box that appears in the time display and press Entey 00 01 26 649 15 1 000 e Press G to position the cursor based on the time displayed on the time ruler Specify a time in the box that appears in the time display and press Enter 00 01 26 649 15 1 000 R 4 Tip You can also open the boxes in the time display by double clicking the desired value nne T Ma
354. ters This feature is available only in ACID Pro software You can automate the parameters of certain plug ins by adding envelopes to the track For more information see Adding effect automation envelopes on page 125 CHP 7 WORKING WITH TRACKS 422 gt Arranging plug in chain order 7 This feature is available only in ACID Pro and ACID Music Studio software The plug ins are cumulative during playback For example when the track s signal passes through the EQ it carries the EQ s settings as it passes through the compression plug in then the signal carries both those plug in settings to the next plug in Because of this cumulative effect you may need to arrange plug ins in a certain order so that one plug in s processing does not adversely affect the next plug in on the chain There is no right or wrong way to order plug ins although some plug ins work better when they follow another However the plug in order in the chain is strictly based on your preferences and desired output 1 Click the Track FX button 4 The Audio Plug In window appears 2 There are three ways to arrange plug ins in your chain e Drag the plug in to a new location in the chain e Right click the plug in and choose Move Left or Move Right from the shortcut menu e Click the plug in and then click the Shift Plug In Left and Shift Plug In Right buttons 3 Click the Close button BI to close the Audio Plug In window Bypassing plug
355. th NID lt e 173 Adding MIDI Tacks r 025 54 eh aod et touted eee E AA AA 173 Adding MIDI HES e corr id id fed aa 173 Creating new MiDiffileS 26 0 2 20 o ai id 173 Recording VIN CRACKS cando eg Wee Nie SS th a dl alias 174 Changing MIDI track properties lt 0 0 eens 175 Pitehssaitting MIDITTackKs tits arar coe sds 175 Setting root notes for MIDI tracks 0 eee eee eens 175 Working with tracks in a MIDI file nnana 0 ccc eee eee eens 176 Previewing MIDIENIGS 205 ac3t 0 iniaa A ds anna 177 Using the piano roll eT eT 6445 04 45 aliada eens 178 Viewing the piano roll editor 0 0 0 eee eee eens 179 Previewing WIND Ni a EA a TTT 179 selecting MIDI 100 ii IS ARA A 180 Adding Note events etc dai a aaa asia 180 Editing note events a ia iaa ras 181 LOGGING NOC SNapoOING corrales its E EA oa aus 184 OuantizinG Note CVEMS idiota 184 Deleting note events e A A tes tides 185 WAGOING ana redonda ira ra rata dd 185 0 EEN E E ner emer eae ee eer nee eee or mee ene 185 USNO MMEISUCCILON fuc04 ierra cheek hae ee ta eee ae ee each are 186 VIEWING the Ist editor susi daa Bese teks 186 Previewing MD letra ope a er weer or war TTT 186 SIT Tate thelist issussrlsrissla diarreas he Soe da 187 CUEING EVENS sche di a rta a o 188 Creating CVEMS viii A A A A oe ae bh oe ee ie eee ees 192 Step recording events e dnd debilidad didactica 192 Quang events sastre ss ee eh ued A ds 194 Deleti
356. th dialog appears 3 Choose the desired increment format from the drop down menu 4 Enter an appropriate value in the adjacent box and click OK The increment length is automatically configured to the selected value in both the Chopper and the track view ee O V Note It is possible to set an increment value that results in the increment arrow extending beyond the scope of the Chopper If this occurs an accurate depiction of the increment still appears in the track view Aza CHP 6 USING THE CHOPPER r Inserting selections in the track vievv You can add selections from the Chopper to your project in several ways Using the Insert Selection button After you create the desired selection and increment you can insert the selection in the project at the track view s cursor position by clicking the Insert Selection button fetlinsert After the Chopper inserts the audio the cursor moves to the end of the increment e If the increment length is equal to the selection length selections are painted end to end e Ifthe increment length is greater than the selection length an appropriate amount of silence is painted prior to the next insert position e Ifthe increment length is less than the selection length selections overlap Using copy and paste You can right click the selection in the Chopper and choose Copy from the shortcut menu to copy the current selection to the clipboard You can then use the Paste command to
357. the folder track Removing tracks from a folder track To remove a track from the folder track expand the folder track and drag the track to another location in the track list Muting a folder track To mute all tracks in a folder track click the Mute button 8 on the folder tracks header To unmute the folder track click the Mute button again Soloing a folder track To solo only the tracks in a folder track click the Solo button 11 on the folder track s header To unsolo the folder track click the Solo button again WORKING WITH TRACKS CHP 7 L 1 AZ Editing events in a folder track When the folder track is minimized you can also perform edit operations on clustered events in the group The following edit operations will affect clustered events e Pitch shifting events e Dragging events e Cutting copying pasting and deleting events Click to select a clustered group of events or hold or while clicking to select multiple clusters of events Selected events are displayed in a darker color than unselected events Events that overlap are treated as a single event when the folder track is minimized R Mixing multiple tracks to a single track This feature is available only in ACID Pro and ACID Music Studio software You can mix a selected group of tracks or an entire project to a single track stereo event If your project includes any muted tracks however those events are not mixed into the new track The or
358. the newly created events abut each other If Quick fade edges to prevent clicks is selected in the Event Properties dialog fades are added at the split point For more information see Changing event properties on page 75 EDITING EVENTS CHP 3 69 plit position Two events However you may move either of the events which creates a gap os E S one position Two beens events Splitting at the cursor position splits all selected events that the cursor crosses on all tracks 1 Select the event s that you want to split 2 Place the cursor where you want the split to occur or make a time selection 3 From the Edit menu choose Split or press S The result of the split depends on how events were selected Splitting at the cursor position Splitting at the cursor position splits all events that the cursor crosses on all tracks Events before splitting Events after splitting Cursor position After the split the three events and split point become six events Splitting an event Selecting a single event prior to splitting prevents other events from being split at the cursor s position Events before splitting Events after splitting SHH HH EEE Buenbte HH Only the selected eco be split eer event splits at the cursor position Cursor position and split point CHP 3 EDITING EVENTS 70 e na Splitting multiple events Selecting multiple events splits only the selected events at the cursor s p
359. ther bus to your project The Audio tab in the Project Properties dialog updates to reflect the new number of busses For more information see Using busses on page 149 Available only in ACID Pro software Adds a soft synth control to your project You can assign MIDI tracks or external MIDI input devices to the soft synth control and assign the soft synth control to a DLS set or VSTi plug in For more information see Using soft synth controls on page 153 GETTING STARTED 5ye Renaming mixer controls Double clicking a mixer control name allows you to rename the control Press to save the change Enter a new name for the mixer control Using the mixer s faders Adjusting the Preview fader Drag the fader up or down to adjust the preview volume Hiding the Preview fader Once you have added all desired media files to a project you may want to hide the Preview fader to make room for additional busses assignable effects and soft synth controls To hide the Preview fader right click within the Mixer window and choose Show Preview Fader from the shortcut menu The fader remains hidden until you choose Show Preview Fader from the shortcut menu again Adjusting split faders in the mixer Split faders allow you to adjust the levels of the left and right channels independently To move the faders individually drag the fader for the desired channel and release the mouse when it is in the correct position However you can adjust
360. time information Clipboard contents Events before paste Events after paste xisting even AP o Eio nano RHO event adjusts to move later in the project HHHH ppn dl Paste position CHP 3 Newly pasted event EDITING EVENTS 74 Pasting multitrack information in ripple editing mode Multiple events can be pasted as easily as single events Clipboard contents ob H H Events before paste 5 1 000 3 1 000 l al These events will be Paste T pasted position Events after paste 2181900 Bafi 3 1 0001 MA ewly pasted events Existing events on the tracks adjust later in the project Note Pasting in ripple editing mode ripples only the events on the tracks that receive the clipboard contents If you want to ripple all tracks at the paste position use the Paste Insert command from the Edit menu Slipping and sliding events To help you picture what happens when you slip and slide events think of an event as a window to a media file The window can display the entire media file or a small section When the window displays only a portion of the media file you can move either the window or the underlying media to adjust the media played by an event e When you slip an event your event maintains its place on the timeline but the media file moves in the direction you drag e When you slide an event the media file maintains its place on the timelin
361. tions utilize Microsoft DirectX technologies Copyright O 1999 2005 Microsoft Corporation All rights reserved Microsoft Windows Media 9 Portions utilize Microsoft Windows Media technologies Copyright O 1999 2005 Microsoft Corporation All rights reserved Real RealMedia RealAudio and Real Video applications 2005 RealNetworks Inc Patents Pending All rights reserved Real Real Media RealAudio RealVideo and the Real logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of RealNetworks Inc in the United States and other countries MPEGLA and MPEG 2 USE OF THIS PRODUCT IN ANY MANNER THAT COMPLIES WITH THE MPEG 2 STANDARD IS EXPRESSLY PROHIBITED WITHOUT A LICENSE UNDER APPLICABLE PATENTS IN THE MPEG 2 PATENT PORTFOLIO WHICH LICENSE IS AVAILABLE FROM MPEG LA LLC 250 STEELE STREET SUITE 300 DENVER COLORADO 80206 Manufactured under license from MPEG LA Dolby Dolby Digital AC 3 and AAC encoding This product contains one or more programs protected under international and U S copyright laws as unpublished works They are confidential and proprietary to Dolby Laboratories Their reproduction or disclosure in whole or in part or the production of derivative works therefrom without the express permission of Dolby Laboratories is prohibited Copyright 1992 2005 Dolby Laboratories All rights reserved Dolby the double D symbol AC 3 and Dolby Digital are registered trademarks of Dolby Laboratories AAC is a
362. tivates the Envelope tool to select and modify envelope points Activates the Time Selection tool to quickly select all events within range of time Activates the Groove tool to apply a groove to a track You can use grooves to manipulate the timing of tracks by quantizing media to predefined grooves or by applying the feel of one track to another This feature is available only in ACID Pro software Activates the Groove Erase tool to erase grooves or parts of grooves When used in conjunction with the Ctrl key the Groove Erase tool can erase an entire groove event This feature is available only in ACID Pro software Opens a dialog where you can download media from the Internet Opens a frequently updated Web page containing special offers tips tricks and other good stuff Note This button is displayed on the toolbar by default in ACID Music Studio software only To add this button to your toolbar in ACID Pro software choose Customize Toolbar from the Options menu Opens the Show Me How Tutorials which explain some of the basic tasks you can perform within ACID software Activates What sThis help to obtain information about a specific option menu or part of the ACID window INTRODUCING ACID SOFTWARE 19 Track list This list identifies the track order in your project and contains the track s controls The following sections identify and briefly explain the controls located in the track list Bus assignme
363. to customize the keyboard shortcuts available in the ACID interface The Current Key Bindings box displays the currently assigned shortcut keys Choose a setting from the Context drop down list to choose which shortcuts you want to see Editing shortcuts 1 Select a command in the Available commands box Choose Global from the Context drop down list to display all commands in the Available commands box or choose a different command to filter the list You can type a word in the Show only commands containing box to filter the list of commands to display only commands that contain the word you typed 2 Click the Press new shortcut keys box and press the key combination you want to assign to the selected command The commands display in the box as you type them 3 Click the Assign button to assign the key combination in the Press new shortcut keys box to the command selected in the Available commands box Importing a keyboard map Click the Import button and browse to a ACID Keyboard Map File ini to load an existing keyboard map Exporting a keyboard map Click the Export button and specify a file name and location to save your current keyboard shortcuts to a file that you can use as a backup or to share your keyboard shortcuts with other ACID users Resetting the default keyboard map Click the Default All button to restore the default configuration Using the Display tab Item Track colors Envelope colors Icon colo
364. track at the final project tempo you should clear this check box to allow the recorded file to be treated as a one shot Record device This drop down list allows you to choose the hardware device and channel used to record your audio If you chose Microsoft Sound Mapper in the Audio device type drop down list in the Preferences dialog you cannot choose a specific device Choose a device other than the Sound Mapper to specify hardware devices For more information see Using the Audio tab on page 229 When recording MIDI you can choose a device from the MIDI Thru drop down list to provide MIDI playback as you record For more information see Recording MIDI tracks on page 174 Attributes and the Change button The Attributes values display the recording sample rate and bit depth Sample rate is the number of samples per second measured in Hertz Hz used to record audio You can change the sample rate or bit depth by clicking the Change button which displays the Audio tab of the Project Properties dialog For more information see Using the Audio tab on page 34 SS Note Attributes and the Change button do not apply when recording MIDI ae Monitor Selecting this check box turns on the record meters which display the incoming audio level for the specified recording device Setting recording levels When recording audio it is important to record with the highest possible signal without clipping Clipping occurs when the inco
365. trademark of Dolby Laboratories PNG file format Copyright 2005 World Wide Web Consortium Massachusetts Institute of Technology European Research Consortium for Informatics and Mathematics Keio University All rights reserved This work is distributed under the W3C Software License in the hope that it will be useful but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTIBILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE http www w3 org Consortium Legal 2002 copyright software 20021231 Apple QuickTime Apple QuickTime application is a trademark of Apple Inc in the United States and other countries Apple Macintosh Audio Interchange File Format AIFF file format Apple Macintosh Audio Interchange File Format AIFF is a trademark of Apple Inc in the United States and other countries Targa file format The Targa file format is a trademark of Pinnacle Systems Inc Tagged Image File Format TIFF Adobe Tagged Image File Format is a registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and other countries All rights reserved Main Concept encoder Main Concept plug in is a trademark of registered trademark of Main Concept Inc in the United States or other countries All rights reserved Macromedia Flash Macromedia and Flash are trademarks or registered trademarks of Macromedia Inc in the United States and or other countries Madison Media Software Inc A subsidiary of Sony C
366. tton 4 The Paint tool is selected 3 Drag to create new note events The new events appear as you drag Editing note events You can change the length or pitch of a note event using the Draw tool You can also cut copy and paste events in the same way you do in the main ACID window Changing pitch With the Draw tool 4 selected drag a note event to a new row Changing length With the Draw tool 4 selected drag the edge of a note event to a new location ms Tip As you drag the edge of a note event the event edge snaps to the divisions on the beat ruler To snap to smaller divisions click the Zoom In Time button at the bottom of the window to zoom in more tightly Or to turn off snapping altogether click the Enable Snapping button to toggle it off o CHP 10 WORKING WITH MIDI 182 o gt gt Specifying a velocity value for notes To enter a specific velocity value right click a note event in the piano roll choose Velocity from the shortcut menu and choose the appropriate command from the submenu Command Description Set to Maximum Sets the velocity to 127 Set to Default Sets the velocity to 64 Set to Minimum Sets the velocity to O Set to Allows you to enter a custom velocity value Changing velocity data 1 In the lower left corner of the Piano Roll Editor tab click the drop down arrow and choose Velocity from the menu 2 In the area at the bottom of the Piano Roll
367. ture is available only in ACID Pro software Mouse scroll wheel shortcuts Description Keys Zoom in on timeline Rotate mouse wheel forward or back Vertical scroll Ctrl wheel Horizontal scroll Shift wheel Auto scrolling Press mouse wheel and move the mouse in the desired direction Move the cursor in grid increments Ctrl Shift wheel Move the cursor in video frames Ctrl Alt Shift wheel Agjust slider fader Wheel up or down while hovering over slider fader handle Agjust slider fader in fine Ctrl wheel up or down while increments hovering over slider fader handle INTRODUCING ACID SOFTWARE CHP 1 29 Audio signal flow Audio Media Bit Depth Conversion Time Stretch Pitch Shift Channel Conversion Resampling Event Gain ASR Processing Normalize Event Invert Track Invert Event ASR Track FX Track Volume Pan amp Mute Pre Post Post Pre Bus Send Level Assignable FX Send Level Bus Master From FX FX Volume FX Chain FX Chain Hardware Bus Output Master Bus FX Chain Gain Mute Hardware Output CHP 1 INTRODUCING ACID SOFTWARE BO Notes on audio signal flow e This diagram describes non MIDI audio events For MIDI events see MIDI signal flow on page 31 e In 5 1 surround projects tracks routed to the Surround Master bus send surround panning six channel information Tracks routed to busses e g Bus A send stereo panning two channel information e As
368. tware using the Chopper s selection shortcut menu 1 Create a selection or place the cursor in the Chopper For more information see Creating selections on page bis 2 Right click and choose the desired musical length from the shortcut menu A selection is created equal to the specified musical length Inserting Increments In addition to creating selections the Chopper feature allows you to configure the sections of silence between selections painted on a track When you click the Link Arrow to Selection button the increment arrow length is incremented with the selection length This forces the increment and selection lengths to remain equal thereby allowing you to insert selections seamlessly end to end in the project Selection and increment length Chopper selection inserted end to end three times When the Link Arrow to Selection button is toggled off the increment arrow is displayed in black and you are able to establish a increment length that is independent of the selection length The increment arrow can be set by dragging either end of the arrow or by using the increment shortcut menu When the increment length is greater than the length of the selection an appropriate amount of silence is inserted following the selection when you insert it in the track view This affects the track s insert position and allows you to paint selections separated by the specified increment Increment greater than selection Sele
369. u appears 2 From the shortcut menu choose Flip All Points ee a Tip If you want to flip only particular points on an envelope select the points using the Envelope tool right click and choose Flip Selected Points from the shortcut menu For more information on the Envelope tool see Using the Envelope tool on page 128 SSS TT Changing envelope fade curves You may set the type of fade curve that occurs between envelope points linear fast slow smooth sharp or hold To change the fade curve right click an envelope between two envelope points and choose the appropriate fade curve from the shortcut menu Locking envelope points to an event From the Options menu choose Lock Envelopes to Events if you want envelope points to move with an event when it is moved along the timeline WORKING WITH TRACKS 1283y Ra Using the Envelope tool This feature is available only in ACID Pro and ACID Music Studio software The Envelope tool 4 is designed to manipulate multiple envelope points Use the Envelope tool when you want to edit envelope points but do not want to change other elements of the project With the Envelope tool selected events cannot be moved or edited Selecting and moving envelope points To select multiple envelope points using the Envelope tool click the track that contains the envelope and drag your cursor in the track view to select the points you want to move Selected points display in an alternate color
370. u set the volume slider to 20 the resulting track plays at 70 Be aware of the following as you change track volume and panning e The volume slider settings are added to the track volume and any volume information in the MIDI file This allows you to manipulate the volume of the track and still maintain volume controller information that may be present in the file The overall volume of the MIDI track however is bound at 0 and 127 e Volume and panning settings are not saved in the MIDI file but are saved in the ACID project file When you click the Reload button Brelad to reload the MIDI file the volume and panning settings do not reset but are retained For more information see Saving reloading or replacing MIDI files on page 196 Previewing MIDI files You can play your MIDI file to test out your changes before leaving the General tab Use the buttons on the transport bar at the bottom of the window to control MIDI playback eee Tip To control volume during playback in the General tab drag the Preview fader in the Mixer window E T CHP 10 WORKING WITH MIDI 175 J ha Chasing MIDI events during playback When playback loops or begins at a point other than the beginning of the MIDI file ACID software can automatically chase update controller SysEx and patch changes to ensure correct playback 1 Click the Chase Filter button 2 1 to display the Chase Event Filter dialog 2 Select the check box fo
371. uded on CD Microsoft NET Framework 1 1 included on CD Internet Explorer 5 1 or later included on CD Using this manual This manual is provided to assist ACID Pro ACID Music Studio and ACID XMC users For this reason product features exclusive to ACID Pro software are identified throughout the manual using the following icon In addition issues and features that pertain only to ACID Music Studio software are identified by the following icon CHP 1 INTRODUCING ACID SOFTWARE 1 4 a _ oo ooo Note Unless otherwise noted the pictures you ll see of the ACID application throughout this manual are taken from ACID Pro If you are using ACID Music Studio or ACID XMC your windows and dialogs may appear slightly different Installing ACID Prior to installing the software we recommend that you exit all open applications and temporarily turn off any virus protection 1 Insert the CD ROM The setup screen appears if CD ROM AutoPlay is enabled _ 4 Note If CD ROM AutoPlay is not enabled click the star button and choose Run In the Run dialog that appears type the CD ROM drive s letter and add Asetup exe Click OK to start the installation ns 2 Click Install The installation process begins 3 Follow the on screen prompts to install the appropriate version of the software for your computer mnn Note Windows Installer is used for all versions of
372. ures e e e cece eee eens 243 Chopping multiple files into a new lOOP lt eee eee nee 244 Creating drumroll lt E re ups siria Bae Se Gos oie ued ete aa nia il 244 Creating dron cuca meet Get oee oot eee node earned ae oaneee ee A N 244 Creating ONe track remixes 000 e e ee eee eee etna eee aees 245 Creating DJ style crossfades isin crx bod oa Reese aa tas eee ee it 245 Creating pseudo granular synthesis e ee ee eee eee eens 245 Building instrument solos ts a a A cd A A 246 BUIN eT 246 E A os ee sees es oe es eee eee 247 WNC A EA aaa ak Ga ee ee ae ee coe ae kee ae TABLE OF CONTENTS 42 QS TABLE OF CONTENTS 13 CHAPTER eee Introducing ACID 4 Software Welcome Congratulations on purchasing a revolutionary software application for Microsoft Windows With ACID from Sony Media Software you can create great music by simply picking painting and playing System requirements The following lists the minimum system requirements for using the ACID software Microsoft Windows 2000 or XP 800 MHz processor 1 GHz if using video 200 MB hard disk space for program installation 600 MB hard disk space for optional Sony Sound Series Loops amp Samples reference library installation 256 MB RAM Microsoft Windows compatible sound card CD ROM drive for installation from a CD only Supported CD Recordable drive for CD burning only Microsoft DirectX 8 1 or later version 8 1b incl
373. ute mixer controls independently Adjusting faders You can adjust mixer control levels during playback and preview the results in real time In addition the stereo faders are split into two channels This allows you to adjust the levels of the left and right channels independently of one another For more information see Adjusting split faders in the mixer on page 54 In ACID Pro assignable effect controls contain two distinct faders each of which is split into two channels The left fader adjusts the level of the input signal entering the control while the right fader adjusts the output level Changing meter resolution You may specify the meter resolution at which mixer controls display their signal levels When a mixer control s meter resolution is changed all meters in the Mixer window automatically change to reflect the new resolution setting To change the meter resolution right click the meter and choose the desired resolution from the shortcut menu Setting levels When signals are routed through a mixer control the signal levels may cause the meter to clip If the meter clips the level is displayed in red at the top of the meter and the audio is distorted You can lower the mixer control level and click the red display to reset the meter A better way to reduce clipping however is to adjust the volume of each track _ 4 Tip You can also reset the clip by right clicking the meter and choosing Reset Clip from the s
374. velope colors For more information see Using the Display tab on page 234 EE Adding track envelopes This section describes how to add each type of track envelope For creative ways to use track envelopes see ACID Tips and Tricks on page 237 Adding volume or pan envelopes 1 Select the track to which you want to add the envelope You may select multiple tracks 2 Add the envelope to the selected track s in one of following ways e From the Insert menu choose Envelopes and choose Volume or Pan from the submenu e Right click the track header in the track list choose Insert Remove Envelope from the shortcut menu and choose Volume or Pan from the submenu e Press V volume envelope or P pan envelope A blue line appears across the track s for a volume envelope and a red line appears across the track s for a pan envelope Envelope line ay Note Because the default panning mode is additive you can introduce clipping when panning a track to the left or right Choose an appropriate pan type and adjust the track volume accordingly For more information see Choosing stereo pan types on page 131 SS WORKING WITH TRACKS CHP 7 L 1 3 B Adding bus envelopes R This feature is available only in ACID Pro software A bus envelope controls the level of a track sent to a particular bus Before you can add a bus envelope you must add busses to the project For more information see Adding busses to the project
375. vents you have two options e Use the Paste Insert command For more information see Using Paste Insert on page 67 e Turn on ripple editing For more information see Ripple editing on page 71 CHP 3 EDITING EVENTS 66 When events are cut copied to the clipboard and subsequently pasted into a project the time data inherent in the cut copied events is maintained and pasted For example if you select two events on the same track that are separated by five seconds of silence copying and pasting these events results in the five seconds of silence also being pasted into the project Original events Pasted FE Taking this concept a step further if you select discontinuous events from several tracks copying and pasting these events results in any selected time data being pasted into the project as well This maintains the relative position of events in the project Original events Pasted events Using the Paste command 1 Place the cursor at the desired position on the timeline 2 Paste the clipboard contents using any of the following methods e Click the Paste button B on the toolbar e Choose Paste from the Edit menu e Right click the track view and choose Paste from the shortcut menu e Press V Using Paste Repeat When building projects you often need to paste the contents of the clipboard several times Rather than repeatedly pasting and moving the content the Paste Repeat command allows you to specify the
376. vides your project into equal units based on the setting that you choose The grid setting can be based on the project type or how you prefer to work It is important to remember that in some cases the grid lines and the ruler divisions do not match This is because they are two independent functions However you may set the grid to align to the ruler which is the default setting The grid can use the following formats Ruler Marks 16th Notes Measures 16th Note Triplets Half Notes 32 Notes Quarter Notes 32nd Note Triplets Quarter Note Triplets 64th Notes 8th Notes 64th Note Triplets 8th Note Triplets Setting the grid type You may change the grid type at any time and apply it to your project There are two ways to set the grid type for your project e From the Options menu choose Grid Spacing and choose the type of grid you want from the submenu e Right click the marker bar choose Grid Spacing from the shortcut menu and choose the type of grid that you want from the submenu CUSTOMIZING ACID SOFTWARE APPENDIX A 223 Using the toolbar The toolbar is set to display below the menu bar However you may hide and customize the toolbar to suit your preferences The settings that you apply to the toolbar remain set until you change them again Hiding and displaying the toolbar If you prefer to use shortcut keys when working with your project you may hide the toolbar to create more workspace Choose Toolbar from the View
377. w Status Bar Toggles the display of the Video window status bar CHP 11 WORKING WITH VIDEO 2 T Viewing the status bar Right click the Video window and choose Show Status Bar from the shortcut menu to view the status bar The status bar shows the video s frame size frame rate and display size j ens on external monitors This feature is available only in ACID Pro software You can use your system s external monitor for previewing video playback You must have an OHCI IEEE 1394 adapter and a device to convert the DV signal to video such as a DV camcorder deck or media converter To specify an external monitor click the External Monitor button Sep montor on the Video window or choose Preferences from the Options menu and click the Video tab Other settings for the external monitor can also be found on the Video tab For more information see Using the Video tab on page 231 Scoring video ACID has tools that allow you to adjust the tempo of a project to easily synchronize audio with specific video frames 1 Add your audio track s and video to your project If the Video window is not displayed choose Video from the View menu 2 3 Click the Play button to begin playback 4 Press H each time you want to place a time marker at a frame you want to emphasize where an explosion is heard for example 5 Click the Stop button E to stop playback 6 Return to the leftmost time marker and fine tune
378. when placed in a project Keep in mind that you do not need to designate stretching properties for loops that you create for ACID projects The application typically makes an accurate estimate regarding the loop file s tempo In addition you can temporarily assign a root note to the file to allow it to be transposed to the project s key However when creating custom loops for use in multiple projects you should define stretching properties You can set the stretching properties for loops and Beatmapped tracks For more information see Adjusting stretching properties for loop or Beatmapped tracks on page 134 Configuring track properties Double click a track icon such as J to display the Track Properties window 4 Note This section addresses track properties for non MIDI tracks For information on MIDI track properties see Changing MIDI track properties on page 175 ae Once you modify the properties of a track the information is saved with your project but does not alter the original media file If you want you can save your changes to the media file as well For more information see Saving file properties on page 138 ee OO Note When you edit a track in an external editor changes to the sound file are reflected immediately after you save the file Changes to a media file s ACID properties are not updated in your ACID project until you click Reload on the Track Properties window a Adjusting general track prope
379. wo channel information INTRODUCING ACID SOFTWARE CHP 1 33 CHAPTER x E a G wd Lda d Ny Ix ha ine 3 E a T L d Getting Started m h MPT Now that you have an understanding of the interface and controls found in ACIDO software you are ready to begin learning the techniques needed to pick paint and play in ACID projects In this chapter you will learn the skills that will allow you to create music from locating media files to writing the finished project to CD Starting projects Double clicking the ACID Pro ACID Music Studio or ACID XMC icon on the desktop starts the software You can immediately begin building your ACID project using the application s default project properties However you may prefer to customize the project properties prior to beginning the project Setting project properties ACID software allows you to configure project properties and add summary information prior to beginning a project Choosing New from the File menu displays the New Project dialog This dialog contains two tabs Summary and Audio Selecting the Start all new projects with these settings check box configures the software to use the parameters and information in both tabs as defaults when starting all subsequent projects mnn Note You can edit project audio properties and summary information at any time Choose Properties from the File menu to display the Project Properties dialog which con
380. xt to the Grid Only command appears deselected when snapping to all elements 4 Tip Press F8 to toggle between grid only and all elements ann Changing tempo time signature and key You can set a tempo time signature and key for your ACID project You can also make adjustments during playback You can add specific tempo time signature and key changes within a project using tempo key time signature change markers These markers appear on the marker bar above the track view When the cursor passes over one of these markers the master project tempo key and or time signature changes in real time WORKING IN THE TRACK VIEW CHP 5 L 1 08 Set the tempo time signature and key for the whole project Or change these elements dynamically in the timeline 35 E 34 92 A 44 E 02538 4 m oe geu gw Project Key Project Tempo Project Project Time slider Tempo Signature Changing project tempo You can change the tempo of a project without affecting the project s key Changing tempo using the Project Tempo slider Drag the Project Tempo slider at the bottom of the track list Dragging the slider to the left slows the tempo while dragging it to the right speeds the tempo E aaas Tip Double click the tempo value next to the Project Tempo slider to enter an exact value Press when you are finished Sees As you drag the Project Tempo slider a colored bar appears under each track s name to r
381. ynth mixer controls CHP 8 This feature is available only in ACID Pro and ACID Music Studio software You can add DirectX or VST compatible plug ins either individually or as a chain to a mixer control You can build plug in chains from any DirectX compatible plug ins installed on your system You can add plug ins individually or as pieces of a chain to a mixer control at any time and once you have added them you can reorder them remove them and combine them with additional plug ins to achieve the desired effect Adding a plug in to a mixer control results in the track signals assigned to that control being processed by the plug in However plug ins assigned at the track level are processed before plug ins added at the mixer level For more information see Using track effects on page 119 ae Important Be aware that using non in place plug ins such as Time Stretch Pitch Shift without preserving duration and some Vibrato settings will cause audio to play out of synchronization with the waveform display in the timeline and with other tracks If an effects chain includes non in place plug ins the effects chain icon will be displayed as a i When using ACID software as a ReWire device any effects chain that includes non in place plug ins will be automatically bypassed to prevent synchronization problems with the ReWire mixer application The effects chain icon will be displayed as a E Apply the plug ins within the ReWire mixe

ACID User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents